(00A) Manual-0660274-Total-Gb

OPERATING MANUAL
Thank you for placing your trust in our company and our products.
With your selection of a König product, you have opted for the benchmark in quality
and performance in the production of rolls.
Translation of the original
König Maschinen Gesellschaft m.b.H., Austria, Tel.: +43 316.6901.0,

[email protected], www.koenig-rex.com
K-Nr.: 06.6.01 192 00
English
COMBI-LINE
OPERATING MANUAL
Machine No. 06.6.0274

Operating Manual COMBI-LINE Page 1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER PAGE
1 GENERAL REMARKS 5
2 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS - EXPLANATION OF SYMBOLS 6
2.1 SAFETY SYMBOLS 6
2.2 SYMBOLS USED FOR INSTRUCTIONS 9
2.3 GENERAL SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 10
2.3.1 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS FOR MACHINE OWNER 10
2.3.2 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS FOR OPERATING STAFF 11
2.4 SAFETY DEVICES 14
2.4.1 SLIDING WINDOWS IN FRONT OF STAMPING STATION AND SWINGS 14
2.4.2 WARNING NOTICES 15
3 MACHINE DATA SHEET 16
3.1 MANUFACTURER 16
3.2 CUSTOMER SERVICE 16
3.3 TYPE DESIGNATION / DATE OF PRODUCTION 16
3.4 PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS 17
4 TRANSPORT AND UNPACKING 18
4.1 TRANSPORT 18
4.2 UNPACKING 19
5 INSTALLATION AND ASSEMBLY - SHUT-DOWN - STORAGE AND DISPOSAL 20
5.1 SPACE REQUIREMENT FOR OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE 20
5.2 ADMISSIBLE AMBIENT CONDITIONS 20
5.3 INSTALLATION OF THE MACHINE 21
5.4 PUTTING THE MACHINE OUT OF OPERATION AND DISASSEMBLY 21
5.5 STORAGE CONDITIONS 22
5.6 DISPOSAL 22
6 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 23
6.1 INTENDED USE 23
6.2 POSSIBLE USES / DIMENSIONS 24
6.3 ACCESSORIES AND ADDITIONAL EQUIPMENT 27
6.3.1 ACCESSORIES SUPPLIED AS STANDARD 27
KÖNIG Maschinen Gesellschaft m.b.H.

Stattegger Straße 80, A-8045 Graz
Tel.: +43 316.6901.0, Fax: +43 316.6901.115 Edition 05/2009
6.3.2 OPTIONS TO ORDER 27

7 DESCRIPTION OF THE PLANT COMPONENTS 28
7.1 PLANT CONTROL AND OPERATING MODES 28
7.1.1 REX AUTOMAT CONTROL PANEL 28
7.1.2 CONTROL PANEL ON THE PROVER 29
7.1.2.1 CONTROL OF THE INDIVIDUAL COMPONENTS 30
7.1.3 OPERATING MODES 31
7.1.3.1 ASYNCHRONOUS OPERATION 31
7.1.3.2 SYNCHRONOUS OPERATION 32
7.2 DOUGH DIVIDING AND ROUNDING MACHINE REX AUTOMAT 32
7.3 PRE-LONG ROLLER WITH DISPLACE UNIT* (*ACCESSORY) 33
7.3.1 CENTRING ROLLERS* (*ACCESSORIES) 34
7.3.2 REMOVAL OF THE PRESSURE BOARD 35
7.3.3 ADJUSTING TENSION AND RUN OF THE LOWER BELT 35
7.4 PROVER WITH SWINGS 36
7.4.1 OPTION: PROVER CLIMATE 38
7.4.2 SWINGS DRYING 39
7.4.3 STERILIZATION 39
7.4.4 DISCHARGE BELT 40
7.4.4.1 ADJUSTING BELT TENSION AND RUN 40
7.5 COMBINED STAMPING STATION (STAMP) 41
7.5.1 STAMPER CUPS 42
7.5.2 DUSTER 44
7.5.3 STAMPING HEAD 45
7.5.3.1 INSTALLATION OF THE STAMPING TOOL / TOOL CHANGING 45
7.5.4 CUTTING UNIT* (*ACCESSORY) 47
7.5.4.1 FITTING / REMOVING THE KNIVES 48
7.5.4.2 REMOVING THE CUTTING UNIT 48
7.5.4.3 FITTING THE CUTTING TOOL 49
7.5.5 DISCHARGE BELT STAMPING STATION 50
7.5.5.1 ADJUSTING BELT TENSION AND RUN 50
7.5.6 TRANSFER FLAP 51
7.5.6.1 INSTALLING / REMOVING THE TRANSFER FLAP AND SCRAPER
LEDGE 52
7.6 FORMING STATION 53
7.6.1 CONVOLUTING STATION* (*OPTION) 53
7.6.1.1 REMOVAL OF THE LOWER ROLLER SCRAPER 54
7.6.1.2 TENSIONING AND REMOVING THE CONVOLUTING BELT* 54
7.6.1.3 INSTALLING / REMOVING CONVOLUTING PLATES*
(*ACCESSORY) - EXCHANGING THE CONVOLUTING CLOTH 55
7.6.2 LOWER BELT, UPPER BELT AND INTERMEDIATE BELT 56
7.6.2.1 BELT RUN ADJUSTMENT / BELT TENSION 57
7.6.2.2 REMOVAL OF THE PRE-PRESSURE ROLLER SCRAPER*
(*OPTION) 58
7.6.3 DUSTER ABOVE UPPER BELT 59
7.6.4 DRAG BELTS* (CHAIN BELTS*) (*ACCESSORY) 60
7.6.5 PRESSURE BOARD* WITH WEDGES (*ACCSESSORY) 61
7.6.5.1 INSTALLATION / REMOVAL OF THE PRESSURE BOARD 61
7.6.6 GUIDES* (*ACCESSORIES) 62
7.6.7 TIMED ROLLER AND TRANSFER ROLLER 62

Tel.: +43 316.6901.0, Fax: +43 316.6901.115 Edition 05/2009
7.6.7.1 FITTING / REMOVING THE TRANSFER ROLLER 63

7.7 RETRACTING UNIT AB 64
7.7.1 BELT RUN ADJUSTMENT / TENSIONING THE RETRACTING BELT
AND THE STRAP - RETRACTING MOTOR BRAKE 65
7.7.2 RESTARTING THE RETRACTING UNIT AFTER AN EMERGENCY
STOP 67
8 INITIATION 68
9 FURTHER OPERATION 70
9.1 DAILY START-UP 70
9.2 SWITCHING THE MACHINE ON / OFF 70
9.3 STARTING/ STOPPING THE MACHINE 70
9.4 PREPARATIONS FOR SPECIFIC TYPES OF OPERATION 71
9.4.1 MEASURES BEFORE A LONGER SHUT-DOWN PERIOD 71
9.4.2 START-UP AFTER A LONGER SHUT-DOWN PERIOD 71
9.5 INADMISSIBLE TYPES OF OPERATION 71
9.6 EMERGENCY SITUATION 72
9.7 RISKS / DANGERS 72
9.7.1 DANGERS DUE TO MECHANICAL COMPONENTS 72
9.7.2 DANGERS DUE TO ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS 73
9.7.3 DANGERS DUE TO UV LIGHT 73
9.7.4 DANGERS DUE TO LASER SENSOR 73
9.7.5 DANGERS SUCH AS STEAM, SMOKE AND DUST 73
9.7.6 DANGERS DUE TO THERMAL INFLUENCES 74
9.7.7 DANGERS DUE TO NON-PERFORMANCE OF HYGIENIC MEASURES 74
10 PRODUCTION PROCESSES 75
10.1 PRODUCTION OF STAMPED DOUGH PIECES 75
10.2 PRODUCTION OF FLAT PRESSED, UNSTAMPED DOUGH PIECES (E.G.
HAMBURGER BUNS) 77
10.3 PRODUCTION OF LONG-ROLLED, UNSTAMPED DOUGH PIECES 78
10.4 MANUFACTURE OF CROISSANTS 80
11 CLEANING / MAINTENANCE / LUBRICATION 82
11.1 CLEANING 82
11.1.1 DAILY CLEANING 83
11.1.2 WEEKLY / MONTHLY CLEANING 85
11.1.3 SIX-MONTHLY / ANNUAL CLEANING 86
11.2 INSPECTION / MAINTENANCE / LUBRICATION 87
11.2.1 DAILY / WEEKLY 87
11.2.2 MONTHLY 87
11.2.3 SIX-MONTHLY 89
11.2.4 GEAR MOTORS MANUFACTURED BY "WATT" 90

Tel.: +43 316.6901.0, Fax: +43 316.6901.115 Edition 05/2009
11.3 CLEANING AND MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE 92

12 COMBI-LINE STANDARD SETTINGS 95
12.1 STANDARD SETTING REX AUTOMAT 95
12.2 BASIC SETTINGS FOR THE PLANT COMPONENTS 95
12.2.1 ADJUSTING THE SWING POSITION 96
12.2.2 TENSIONING THE SWINGS CHAIN 96
12.2.3 SWING REMOVAL / INSERTION 97
12.2.4 STANDARD SETTING OF THE BELTS 97
12.2.5 DIRECTIONS OF ROTATION 98
12.2.6 TENSIONING THE STAMPING UNIT CHAIN 98
12.2.7 STANDARD SETTING OF THE STAMPING HEAD 98
12.2.8 ADJUSTING THE POSITION OF THE STAMPER CUPS 99
12.2.9 SYNCHRONISATION OF THE DISCHARGE BELT 100
12.2.10 READJUSTMENT OF THE STAMPING TOOL 100
12.2.10.1 FIXED (NON ROTATING) PISTONS: ST, SA, GB (FIG. 4 / POS. 2
AND 3) 100
12.2.10.2 STAMPING TOOL SL4 WITH ONE STAMPING EDGE (FIG. 4 / POS.
4) FOR STAMPED LONG ROLLS 101
12.2.10.3 ROTATING PISTON K5 (FIG. 4 / POS. 1) FOR KAISER ROLLS 101
13 MALFUNCTION AND TROUBLE-SHOOTING 102
14 OPTIONS 103
14.1 SEEDER 104
14.1.1 DAMPENING 105
14.1.1.1 REMOVAL OF DAMPENING ROLLER AND SCRAPER -
TENSIONING THE LOWER BELT 106
14.1.2 WIRE BELT AND TRANSFER ROLLER 107
14.1.2.1 REMOVAL / TENSIONING THE WIRE BELT 107
14.1.3 SEEDING UNIT 108
14.1.3.1 REMOVAL OF SEED BOX AND SEED ROLLER 109
14.1.4 MAINTENANCE AND CLEANING 110
14.1.4.1 DAILY / WEEKLY 110
14.1.4.2 MONTHLY 111
14.1.4.3 CLEANING AND MAINTENANCE INTERVALS 111
15 VISUAL DISPLAY OPERATION 112
16 SPECIFICATIONS 113
17 ELECTRICAL DOCUMENTATION 114
17.1 SUBDIVISION OF THE CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 114
17.2 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM DESIGNATIONS 115
17.3 COMPONENT DESIGNATION AND CROSS-REFERENCES 115
17.4 WIRING DIAGRAM, DESCRIPTION AND ELECTRICAL SPARE PARTS 116

Tel.: +43 316.6901.0, Fax: +43 316.6901.115 Edition 05/2009
1 GENERAL REMARKS
Foreword
These operating instructions are targeted at qualified operating personnel and technical ex-
perts (please refer to chapter 2.3.2).
These operating instructions include all information that is required for the installation, opera-
tion, cleaning and maintenance of the machine and the individual components of the ma-
chine.
Please take sufficient time in order to read the operating instructions carefully
and completely, before starting-up or operating the machine or individual com-
ponents thereof.
Observe and follow all of the information and safety instructions detailed in these operating
instructions in order to ensure safe, proper and economical operation of the equipment.
All of the safety instructions are based on the applicable safety, health and statutory regula-
tions valid at the time of going to press.
König Maschinen shall not be liable for any errors or misprints in the present documentation.
The liability of warranty of the company König Maschinen is only effective for defects occur-
ring in connection with following the assigned operating conditions - in particular regarding
the specified checks and maintenance. It is arranged clearly that the company König Maschi-
nen does not need to provide compensation of damage for personal injury or other damages
in case that König Maschinen is not charged with gross fault.
All rights, in particular the right of reproduction, distribution and translation, are reserved. No
part of this documentation may be reproduced in any form whatever (by photocopying, micro-
filming or any other process), duplicated or distributed without the prior written agreement of
the company KÖNIG MASCHINEN.

Tel.: +43 316.6901.0, Fax: +43 316.6901.115 Edition 05/2009
2 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS - EXPLANA-

TION OF SYMBOLS
2.1 SAFETY SYMBOLS
This operating and maintenance manual contains safety instructions with symbols indicating
potential dangers and/or instructing operating personnel to carry out certain tasks. The safety
instructions are also attached to the machine. These safety instructions and symbols are la-
belled with Danger:, Attention: or Note: indicating the following:
Danger: These safety instructions refer to an imminent risk to the health or

even life of persons!
Non-compliance with these instructions can seriously damage the health of
persons or cause life-threatening injury!
Attention: These safety instructions refer to potentially dangerous situa-

tions!
Non-compliance with these instructions can cause minor injury or damage to
property!
Danger: These safety instructions refer to potential hazards by electric power!

persons, cause life-threatening injury or damage to property!
Danger: At the infeed points, there is a risk of injury from crushing!

Danger: There is a risk of limbs or clothing being caught by drive elements,

couplings, motors, belt pulleys, etc.!

Tel.: +43 316.6901.0, Fax: +43 316.6901.115 Edition 05/2009
Danger: Risk of tripping over cables, transverse beams or objects lying on the
ground!
Attention: Machines / boxes must only be lifted by the eyelets provided!

Non-compliance with these instructions can cause injury or damage to prop-
erty!
Attention: This symbol indicates a light source.

Never look directly into the light source, as this could damage your eyes and/or
impair your vision!
Attention: This symbol indicates hot surfaces.

Never touch hot surfaces, as this could lead to serious injury from burns!
Danger: Ignition hazard if an explosion-prone atmosphere can be formed (due

to dust accumulation).
Note: This symbol is used to highlight important instructions that must be ad-
hered to for the safe operation of the machine!
Danger: This symbol indicates possible environmental hazards.
Failure to observe this information can lead to implications for the health as
well as environmental hazards!
Note: Below the symbol you will find information regarding proper handling of
the machine and machine components, as well as special care and handling of
the materials.
Failure to observe this information can lead to damage of machine components

and malfunctions on the machine!

Tel.: +43 316.6901.0, Fax: +43 316.6901.115 Edition 05/2009
Note: This symbol indicates that the machine operator must refer to the operat-
ing manual!
Note: This symbol indicates that the operator must wear safety footwear!
Attention: Smoking prohibited!
Attention: Use of open flames prohibited!

Tel.: +43 316.6901.0, Fax: +43 316.6901.115 Edition 05/2009
2.2 SYMBOLS USED FOR INSTRUCTIONS
The operating instructions make use of the following symbols for instructions and steps:
■ This symbol designates general lists
1) This symbol designates sequences of tasks with several steps, where the order of the
steps must be observed unconditionally.
► This symbol designates adjustments to the machine, e.g. the entry of values on a con-
trol station or adjustments with shift levers or handwheels.
These adjustments can be undertaken during active operation.
These adjustments may only be carried out by qualified personnel (refer to
chapters 2.3.1 and 2.3.2)!
This symbol designates working or operational steps which should or have to be un-
dertaken in the specified order.
These tasks may only be undertaken when the machine has been halted by means of
the stop button! The access area to the respective adjustment controls is protected by
means of a sliding window or doors equipped with safety switches, i.e. opening the
respective sliding windows / doors causes the safety switch to trigger and the ma-
chine is protected against sudden restarting.
These tasks may only be carried out by qualified personnel (refer to chapters
2.3.1 and 2.3.2)!
Â This symbol designates cleaning and maintenance instructions.

The machine must be isolated from the mains when these tasks are carried out, i.e.
switched off: switch off master switch (=OFF) and secure against unauthorised reacti-
vation.
These tasks may only be carried out by qualified personnel (refer to chapters
2.3.1 and 2.3.2)!
# Maintenance and adjustment work designated with this symbol may only be carried
out by technical experts (engineers from König Maschinen GmbH or specially trained
technical personnel) (refer to chapters 2.3.1 and 2.3.2)!
The manufacturer's guarantee is void in the event that this instruction is not heeded.
** This symbol designates foot notes

Tel.: +43 316.6901.0, Fax: +43 316.6901.115 Edition 05/2009
2.3 GENERAL SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
This operating manual has been devised according to the applicable EU regulations and con-
tains safety instructions. It is the responsibility of the machine owner to ensure that all operat-
ing staff have obtained a copy of the safety-relevant information and have read the operating
manual. Each person is responsible for compliance with the safety instructions.
2.3.1 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS FOR MACHINE OWNER
Note: Ensure that all persons who are to work on or with the machine have
read and fully understood the instructions in this operating manual. Make them
aware that all safety instructions in this operating manual and on signs attached
to the machine must be strictly adhered to.
It is your responsibility to ensure that only persons who have been prop-
erly trained and instructed are carrying out work with or on the machine.
Note: The operating personnel must regularly be instructed as regards safe

work practices and proper procedures! Always observe the applicable statutory
occupational safety regulations!
Danger: Please make sure that the signs attached to the machine on de-
livery, remain easily readable. Missing and damaged warning plates must
be replaced without delay!
Danger: Only qualified personnel who have a thorough knowledge of the rele-
vant information in this operating manual may transport, set up, fit and operate
the machine.
Danger: Use only original spare parts from KÖNIG Maschinen. Other spare
parts might affect your rights under warranty and product liability.
Danger: To clean the machine, you must use a vacuum cleaner suitable for
use in explosive atmospheres (dust). This means that the vacuum cleaner must
conform to minimum protection class IP6X according to EN 61241-14.

Tel.: +43 316.6901.0, Fax: +43 316.6901.115 Edition 05/2009
Danger: Subsequent additions of accessory devices produced by other manu-

facturers, or modifications affecting the machine's safety devices are inadmis-
sible, unless approved by König Maschinen Gesellschaft m.b.H. or the manu-
facturer of the accessory device.
2.3.2 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS FOR OPERATING STAFF
Qualified personnel:
The machine must only be operated by appropriately qualified personnel. The personnel
must be familiar with all the warning signs, as well as with the instructions given in this man-
ual regarding the transport, installation, operation, maintenance and cleaning of the machine.
Proper transport, installation, handling and maintenance of the machine are essential pre-
conditions for safe and economical machine operation.
The operating personnel must be qualified in relation to the task, e.g.:

■ training/instruction or authorisation to switch on and off, maintain and inspect machines
according to the applicable safety standards.
■ training/instruction according to the safety standards in the maintenance and use of ade-
quate safety equipment.
■ first aid training.
Technical experts:
Technical experts are considered to be König Maschinen GmbH engineers or specially

trained technical personnel who have been expressly authorised by König Maschinen GmbH
in order to undertake certain cleaning, maintenance and adjustment tasks.
# Cleaning, maintenance and adjustment work which may only be carried out by technical
experts is designated by the adjacent symbol!
Specialist electrician (industrial electrician):
All work on the control systems, the switching cabinet and on the electrical parts of the ma-
chine may only be undertaken by an authorised specialist electrician - e.g. an industrial elec-
trician - or a trained electrotechnical engineer! Such personnel must be authorised by the
person responsible for the safety of the plant to carry out the required tasks due to their
knowledge of the appropriate applicable standards, regulations, accident prevention regula-
tions as well as the corresponding service conditions.

Tel.: +43 316.6901.0, Fax: +43 316.6901.115 Edition 05/2009
Danger: The electrical equipment installed in the machine includes devices

that generate dangerous voltages and control rotating mechanical parts. Non-
compliance with the instructions in this operating manual can result in injuries
and material damage.
Danger: Frequency converters might retain an electrical charge for some time
after being switched off (observe manufacturer's information)!
See chapter 17 "Electrical documentation".
Danger: The machine must be isolated from the mains before undertaking
cleaning, inspection and maintenance work! The machine must also be brought
to a standstill and be currentless before undertaking cleaning, maintenance
and lubrication tasks.
Danger: It is prohibited to deactivate or remove any of the safety equip-

ment! The safety equipment is to be checked daily before starting-up the
machine.
Danger: Access to the EMERGENCY-STOP switches may not be blocked!

They must be accessible via the quickest and shortest route, as the EMER-
GENCY-STOP switches enable the machine to be stopped immediately.
Attention: Do not remove screwed covers for normal operation!

If the machine has to be opened up for maintenance purposes, this may only
be undertaken when the system is currentless!
Doors and safety panels with safety switches prevent operation of the
plant in the event of an open panel to a danger zone.
Attention: Except in the event of an emergency, the plant may not be switched
off by means of opening a safety panel which is secured by means of a key-
switch!
Attention: Pay particular attention to acoustic warning signals for alarm condi-
tions.

Tel.: +43 316.6901.0, Fax: +43 316.6901.115 Edition 05/2009
Attention: The fitted laser sensor(s) use(s) a Class 1 laser as its light source
(wavelength 685 nm).
In order to guarantee safety the laser sensor must neither be removed
nor dismantled since this may result in the emission of dangerous radia-
tion. Warning notices on the sensor draw attention to this hazard. Never
look directly into the laser beam!
Attention: The swings are not protected in the infeed area! Pay attention to the
warning notice!
Attention: Always strictly adhere to the cleaning instructions in this operating

manual.
Danger: The limit switches integrated into the machine are intended for your
safety and must not be bridged or disabled.
Danger: If the machine has been made ready for maintenance, lubrication or
repair (i.e. is opened) or if such work is in progress, place a warning sign (tri-
angular work safety sign) near the workplace!
Note: Keep this operating manual accessible to all operating personnel and
near the machine or hand out a copy to every machine operator!
Attention: For cleaning, maintenance and modification work on the machine, it

might be necessary to take user-specific safety measures (e.g. wearing of
safety footwear when handling heavy parts).

Tel.: +43 316.6901.0, Fax: +43 316.6901.115 Edition 05/2009
2.4 SAFETY DEVICES
Please consult the operating manual for the Rex Automat for a description of the safety de-
vices on the head machine.
The following additions also apply in combination with the Combi-Line prover plant:
2.4.1 SLIDING WINDOWS IN FRONT OF STAMPING STA-

TION AND SWINGS
These transparent sliding plastic windows (fig. 1 / pos. 1 and 5) protect the region around the
stamping station and prevent access to the swings.
The stamping station window (fig. 1 / pos. 1) is opened by means of sliding the two handles
(fig. 1 / pos. 3) upwards, until it engages (fig. 1 / pos. 4). To close the window, both handles
have to be pressed down simultaneously (fig. 1 / pos. 6)!
All of the sliding windows are equipped with limit switches (fig. 1 / pos. 2), so that when one
of the windows is opened, the associated limit switch causes the plant to come to an immedi-
ate standstill.
All protective grilles on the forming station are also equipped with limit switches. On the re-
tracting unit AB, a limit switch checks that the collecting drawers* are always inserted
(*option).
FIG. 1

Tel.: +43 316.6901.0, Fax: +43 316.6901.115 Edition 05/2009
2.4.2 WARNING NOTICES
A number of stickers with warnings are attached to the prover and its components (fig. 2),
depending on the type of plant. In order to guarantee the warning function, damaged signs
must be replaced immediately.
FIG. 2
Wording of the stickers:

1 – While retracting don't touch the moving belt neither from above nor from below!
2 – When re-starting the retracting process is continued immediately!
3 – Switch off the main switch before cleaning or servicing the machine!

Tel.: +43 316.6901.0, Fax: +43 316.6901.115 Edition 05/2009
3 MACHINE DATA SHEET
3.1 MANUFACTURER
Name: KÖNIG MASCHINEN Sütőipari Gépgyártó Kft.
Address: 9500 Celldömölk, Széchenyi u 54.
Phone no.: ++36-95/525-100*
Fax no.: ++36-95/525-124
3.2 CUSTOMER SERVICE
Name: MACADAMS INTERNATIONAL (PTY) LTD.
Address: Private Bag X7, Kuils River 7579, Range Road, Blackheath
ZA-7581 Cape Town, South Africa
Telephone: +27(21)9071000
Fax: +27(21)9071111
email: [email protected]
3.3 TYPE DESIGNATION / DATE OF PRODUCTION
Machine no.: See type plate.
K-Nr.: K 06.6.01/192/00
K-Nr. Description: See type plate.
Date of production: See type plate.

Tel.: +43 316.6901.0, Fax: +43 316.6901.115 Edition 05/2009
3.4 PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS
See type plate.
Noise emission at the workplace: no-load operation/workplace: 60 dB(A)

Operation/working place: 65 dB(A)
Other emissions: Flour dust emission is possible
Combi Line
R560-VG190/230–
x ST/K-K5-VO-SL4-RR600/1200-
MOC/ST600- AB600/1000
06.6.0274
2013
6 3 x 400 + N 13
50

Tel.: +43 316.6901.0, Fax: +43 316.6901.115 Edition 05/2009
4 TRANSPORT AND UNPACKING
Danger: The machine may only be transported and unpacked by technical ex-
perts, (refer to chapter 2.3.2) under maintenance of all safety regulations!
4.1 TRANSPORT
Note: Observe the following information when transporting the machine:
■ The machine must be transported only on the original transportation pallet.
■ The prover must be fastened to the pallet using suitable strap retainers and
secured against slipping.
■ Additional tools, such as stamping tools and other accessories, must be

placed in the storage compartment (fig. 21 / pos. 7) of the machine and se-
cured against slipping.
■ The entire plant must be protected with plastic sheet against possible soiling
during transportation and against the weather.
■ To avoid damage in transit, secure the box / pallet against slipping on the
floor of the transport vehicle.
Note: König Maschinen shall not bear any liability for transport damage caused
due to non-compliance with the above instructions.

Tel.: +43 316.6901.0, Fax: +43 316.6901.115 Edition 05/2009
4.2 UNPACKING
Note:
When unloading from a truck, care must be taken that the forks of the fork-lift
have a separation of at least 1 m and that these are inserted at the long side of
the machine. The load must also be taken up centrally.
Lifting from a pallet is performed in an analogous way to the above procedure
for a truck. Care must be taken that the machine is never subjected to sudden
shocks, e.g. through the pallet being allowed to fall to the ground!
The machine must be inspected immediately after delivery for possible damage
in transit. Any externally visible damage must be reported to the supplier/carrier
immediately, and in any case within 24 hours. Hidden defects must be reported
within one week. Reports at a later date will no longer be recognised by the
provider of transport insurance cover and must therefore be rejected. It is rec-
ommended that damage be documented by means of photographs.
Attention: When lifting and setting up the machine, it is to be ensured that per-
sonnel maintain adequate safety clearance.
Danger: Dispose of packaging materials in an environmentally compatible

manner (plastics to plastic waste, paper and cardboard to paper waste)!

Tel.: +43 316.6901.0, Fax: +43 316.6901.115 Edition 05/2009
5 INSTALLATION AND ASSEMBLY -

SHUT-DOWN - STORAGE AND DISPOSAL
Danger: The machine may only be installed and assembled by technical ex-
The transportation and erection of the machine is undertaken by König
Maschinen GmbH engineers or under their supervision!
5.1 SPACE REQUIREMENT FOR OPERATION AND

MAINTENANCE
A separation of at least 400 mm must be allowed between the machine and any walls or fol-
low-on machines in order to facilitate operation and maintenance.
5.2 ADMISSIBLE AMBIENT CONDITIONS
Temperature range: from +15 °C to +40 °C

Relative air humidity: from 20% to 75% non-condensing
The above information refers only to the permissible values for the electrical and mechanical
components.
Attention: The ambient climate plays an important role in the perfect function-
ing of the plant, e.g. prevention of dough pieces from adhering in the swings,
adequately relaxed dough pieces and proper transfer of the dough pieces to
the individual units.

Tel.: +43 316.6901.0, Fax: +43 316.6901.115 Edition 05/2009
5.3 INSTALLATION OF THE MACHINE
Note: Observe the following information when installing the machine:
■ The machine must be installed in a secure location which is also protected

from humidity, water splashes and dripping water. The supporting floor must
be level and strong enough to support the weight. Any water drains etc. in
the floor must be fitted with covers capable of supporting the weight of the
machine.
■ The machine must be installed in a vertical position.
■ Ensure that the machine is accessible for and operated by qualified person-
nel only.
■ The machine may be used only for the purpose intended by the manufac-
turer.
■ Fire, electric shock and injury can be caused through unauthorised modifica-
tions and the use of replacement parts and accessories not sold or recom-
mended by the manufacturer of the machine.
5.4 PUTTING THE MACHINE OUT OF OPERATION

AND DISASSEMBLY
■ If the plant is taken out of operation it should be thoroughly cleaned from adhering resi-
dues of flour and dough (see Chapter 11). It is recommended that the panelling of the
prover be removed for cleaning purposes.
Danger: Before panelling is removed from the machine, this must be

switched off at the main switch (fig. 6 / pos. 7) and the plug removed from
the mains power supply.
■ Impurities such as flour and residual dough must be vacuumed up with a vacuum cleaner
and not blown off with compressed air!
■ All chains must be freed of adhering residues of flour and dough and the dusters and col-
lecting drawers must be emptied.
■ If the machine will be out of operation for a longer period, it is advisable to lubricate the
Maltese cross (fig. 46 / pos. 1) and all the chains except the chain for the stamping unit
(fig. 17 / pos. 5) with resin-free oil.

Tel.: +43 316.6901.0, Fax: +43 316.6901.115 Edition 05/2009
Attention: It is essential that this cleaning procedure be carried out to avoid

the shut-down machine being rapidly invaded by pests, such as the flour moth,
which can in turn lead to colonisation by mice.
5.5 STORAGE CONDITIONS
If the machine is to be stored it must be placed in a dry room and the permissible ambient
conditions must be maintained (temperature range from +15°C to +40°C and relative humid-
ity from 20% to 75%). The machine must be protected against environmental influences
(dust, etc.) by covering it with a tarpaulin or plastic sheet.
5.6 DISPOSAL
Danger: The relevant statutory requirements in respect of materials separation

must be observed when disposing of the packaging, the entire machine, or in-
dividual components of the machine. If required, a parts list giving material
specifications for the individual machine parts can be obtained from the manu-
facturer.
Danger: Grease and oil collected during maintenance and repair operations as
well as cleaning fluids are to be disposed of in accordance with statutory regu-
lations.

Tel.: +43 316.6901.0, Fax: +43 316.6901.115 Edition 05/2009
6 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
6.1 INTENDED USE
The COMBI-LINE machine can be used to produce various products, e.g. rounded, indented,
flattened, wrapped or long rolls. Therefore, depending on the type of plant, the dough pieces
are transferred through the individual plant components:
■ Head machine Rex Automat:

The dough loaded into the head machine (fig. 3 / pos. 1) is preportioned, divided, floured and
- if required - rounded. The discharge belt of the head machine passes on the dough pieces
to the following pre-long roller.
■ Pre-long roller with displace unit* and centring rollers* (*accessory):

The rounded (or non rounded) dough pieces fall onto the lower belt of the long roller (fig. 3 /
pos. 2). A displace unit can be attached here for the purpose of row reduction as well as cen-
tring rollers (fig. 3 / pos. 3). A pressure board is positioned above the lower belt for the pro-
duction of long rolled dough pieces. The lower belt of this pre-long roller transfers the dough
pieces automatically into the prover swings.
■ Prover VG:
The swings, which are fastened to the swings chain, transfer the dough pieces through the
prover (fig. 3 / pos. 5) in which the proving process takes place. After the proving process is
complete, the semi-finished products fall out of the swings onto the discharge belt and are
transported to the subsequent plant components.
■ Combined stamping station (stamp) ST/K with cutting equipment* (*accessory):

The dough pieces are stamped with the required stamping tool in the combined stamping
station (fig. 3 / pos. 6). Depending on the intended product, the stamping station can also be
switched off, e.g. for the production of flat-pressed and non stamped or long-rolled products.
Cutting equipment can be installed here for the production of cut rolls (fig. 3 / pos. 7).
■ Convoluter* (*option):
The convoluter unit (fig. 3 / pos. 8) first flattens the dough pieces and then convolutes the
pieces with the help of a convoluting belt or drag belt. This enables croissants to be pro-
duced.
■ Forming station:
The lower belt (fig. 3 / pos. 9) conveys the dough pieces further. A pre-pressure roller serves
to press the dough pieces flat, the top belt enables the dough pieces to be rolled out. A
duster is fitted above the top belt in order to prevent sticking.

Tel.: +43 316.6901.0, Fax: +43 316.6901.115 Edition 05/2009
■ Seeder* (*accessory):
The seeder (fig. 3 / pos. 10) serves to dampen the dough pieces with water and to cover
them with seeding material (e.g. poppy seed, sesame seed). Excess seeding material falls
back into the collecting tray and is recycled.
■ Retracting unit AB:

Finally, a setting or retracting unit places the formed or stamped semi-finished products (fig. 3
/ pos. 11) onto baking sheets or trays. The separation of the individual rows of dough pieces
on the baking sheet can be adjusted according to the size of the particular product. The
loaded baking sheets are then pushed into the baking trolley and final proving, for example,
is then possible in a proving chamber.
■ Control panel:
In synchronous operation the hourly capacity of the plant can be continuously adjusted at the
control panel of the prover between approx. 3000 and 9000 pieces per hour (depending on
product, see table on this page) (fig. 3 / pos. 4).
6.2 POSSIBLE USES / DIMENSIONS
The plant dimensions vary depending on the design.

fig. 3 depicts the various plant components and the following tables detail the various product
options and dimensions.
Plant designs Dimen- Dimen- Dimen-

(see fig. 3) Integrated components sion A sion L sion L1
Width 600 Width 800 (mm) (mm) (mm)
KCL 1 KCL 11 1+2+4+5+6+11+7* 400 7453 7553

KCL 2 KCL 12 1+2+4+5+6+10+11+7* 400 8173 8273
KCL 3 KCL 13 1+2+4+5+9+11 2783 9150 9250
KCL 4 KCL 14 1+2+4+5+9+10+11 2783 9870 9970
KCL 5 KCL 15 1+2+4+5+8+9+11+3* 2857 9222 9322
KCL 6 KCL 16 1+2+4+5+8+9+10+11+3* 2857 9942 10042
KCL 7 KCL 17 1+2+4+5+6+9+11+7* 2787 9840 9940
KCL 8 KCL 18 1+2+4+5+6+9+10+11+7* 2787 10560 10660
KCL 9 KCL 19 1+2+4+5+6+8+9+11+3*+7* 2857 9910 10010
KCL 10 KCL 20 1+2+4+5+6+8+9+10+11+3*+7* 2857 10630 10730
* Accessories

Tel.: +43 316.6901.0, Fax: +43 316.6901.115 Edition 05/2009
FIG. 3
* Width dimension for Combi-Line 800 ca. = approximately

1A... Dough dividing and kneading machine 12… Connections for climate* prover (*option):
Basic Rex or Classic Rex Water: inlet 3/4", 2 bar, 15l/h
1B... Dough dividing and kneading machine outlet 1"
Classic Rex Futura 13… Electrical supply
2... Pre-long roller, with lower belt and pressure board
14… Connections for seeder:
3… Displace unit* (*accessory) Water: Inlet 1/2", 2 bar, 40l/h
4... Operating panel outlet d=75mm
5... Prover 15… Outlet 1/2"
6... Combined stamping station (stamp)
16… Connection for cutting device* (*accessory):
7… Cutting device* on stamping station (*accessory) Compressed air: 6 bar, oil-free, 30l/min
8… Convoluter* (*option)
17… Connection for displace unit* (*accessory):
9... Forming station Compressed air: 6 bar, oil-free, 20l/min
(long rolling unit)
10… Seeder* (*accessory)
11... Depositing unit AB

Tel.: +43 316.6901.0, Fax: +43 316.6901.115 Edition 05/2009
max. max. dough

Products COMBI-LINE 600 pcs./h weight (g)
Required design
Possible for all designs (KCL 1 to
Divided and rounded (moulded) 7500 110 KCL 10)
Wrapped goods 4500 110 KCL 5, KCL 6, KCL 9, KCL 10
Hamburger buns KCL 3, KCL 4, KCL 5, KCL 6,

7500 90
up to diam. ∅100 mm KCL 7, KCL 8, KCL 9, KCL 10
6000 110
Long-rolled products Possible for all designs (KCL 1 to
6000 110 KCL 10)
up to 120 mm
Long-rolled products KCL 3, KCL 4, KCL 5, KCL 6,
4500 125 KCL 7, KCL 8, KCL 9, KCL 10
up to 170 mm
4500 125
Round, stamped products KCL 1, KCL 2, KCL 7, KCL 8,
7500 110 KCL 9, KCL 10
(e.g. kaiser rolls)
Option: Round, stamped products KCL 1, KCL 2, KCL 7, KCL 8,
7500 110 KCL 9, KCL 10
(e.g. star rolls)
KCL 1, KCL 2, KCL 7, KCL 8,
Long, stamped products 6000 110 KCL 9, KCL 10
KCL 1, KCL 2, KCL 7, KCL 8,
Accessory: cut rolls 6000 110 KCL 9, KCL 10
Accessory: Displace unit
3000 145 KCL 5, KCL 6, KCL 9, KCL 10
USV 4/2 up to 260 mm
max. max. dough
Products COMBI-LINE 800 pcs./h weight (g)
Required design
Divided and rounded (moulded) 9000 110 KCL 20)
Wrapped goods 4800 110 KCL 15, KCL 16, KCL 19, KCL 20
9000 90
7500 110
Long rolled products up to 130 mm 7500 110 KCL 20)
KCL 13, KCL 14, KCL 15, KCL 16,
Long rolled products up to 170 mm 6000 125 KCL 17, KCL 18, KCL 19, KCL 20
6000 125
Round, stamped products KCL 11, KCL 12, KCL 17, KCL 18,
9000 110 KCL 19, KCL 20
(e.g. kaiser rolls)
Option round, stamped products KCL 11, KCL 12, KCL 17, KCL 18,
9000 110 KCL 19, KCL 20
(e.g. crossed buns)
KCL 11, KCL 12, KCL 17, KCL 18,
Long, stamped rolls 7500 110 KCL 19, KCL 20
KCL 11, KCL 12, KCL 17, KCL 18,
Accessory: Cut rolls 7500 110 KCL 19, KCL 20
Accessory: Displace unit
4500 145 KCL 15, KCL 16, KCL 19, KCL 20
USV 6/3 up to 220mm

Tel.: +43 316.6901.0, Fax: +43 316.6901.115 Edition 05/2009
6.3 ACCESSORIES AND ADDITIONAL EQUIPMENT
6.3.1 ACCESSORIES SUPPLIED AS STANDARD
Depending on the type of plant:
■ 1 pc. stamping tool Type K (for kaiser rolls) (fig. 4 / pos. 1)

■ 1pc. stamping tool Type SL (for long, stamped rolls) (fig. 4 / pos. 4)
■ 1 pc. mounted pre-presser VO (round and continuous) (fig. 4 / pos. 5)
■ 10 pcs. swings (fig. 4 / pos. 6)
■ 1 pc. plate sieve for duster with round apertures (fig. 4 / pos. 7)
■ 1 pc. plate sieve for duster with longitudinal apertures (fig. 4 / pos. 8)
6.3.2 OPTIONS TO ORDER

■ Displace unit (see also chapter 7.3)
■ Stamping tool Type GB (fig. 4 / pos. 2)
■ Stamping tool Type ST (fig. 4 / pos. 3)
■ Cutting device (see also chapter 7.5.4)
■ Convoluting station (see also chapter 7.6.1)
■ Drag belts (chain belts) (see also chapter 7.6.4)
■ Pressure board with wedges (see also chapter 7.6.5)
■ Guides (see also chapter 7.6.6)
■ Seeder (see also Chapter 14.1 "Options - Seeder")
FIG. 4

Tel.: +43 316.6901.0, Fax: +43 316.6901.115 Edition 05/2009
7 DESCRIPTION OF THE PLANT COM-

PONENTS
7.1 PLANT CONTROL AND OPERATING MODES
7.1.1 REX AUTOMAT CONTROL PANEL

FIG. 5
This includes the following operating elements:
Pos. 1: EMERGENCY OFF switch.

Pressing this button stops the entire plant immediately regardless of the operating mode
(synchronous or asynchronous). Use only in an emergency! The button must be pulled out
again before the machine can be restarted.
Pos. 2: Red stop button

The effect of pressing this button depends on the operating mode. In asynchronous mode
only the Rex Automat head machine stops; in synchronous mode the entire plant stops. See
also chapter 7.1.3 "Operating modes".
During operation the plant can be switched over to asynchronous operation and the Rex then
stopped with the Stop button, e.g. at the end of production if there is no more dough in the
hopper of the head machine but the dough pieces still have to run through the prover.
Pos. 3: Green start button

Start button for starting the Rex Automat (or the entire plant in synchronous operation).
If the plant was switched to synchronous operation (see also Chapter 7.1.3 "Operating
modes"), both components of the plant can be started or stopped together by pressing one of
the two Start/Stop buttons (on the control panel of the head machine or on the control panel
of the prover). The transfer of the dough pieces from the spreading finger belt of the Rex to
the lower belt of the pre-long roller or into the prover swings (i.e. the time of transfer) can be
adjusted on the control panel of the prover (screen).
If the plant was switched to asynchronous operation at the control panel, either component of
the plant can be stopped and restarted individually.

Tel.: +43 316.6901.0, Fax: +43 316.6901.115 Edition 05/2009
7.1.2 CONTROL PANEL ON THE PROVER
Pos. 1: Red EMERGENCY OFF switch FIG. 6

Pressing this button immediately stops all running com-
ponents (prover and Rex Automat) regardless of the
operating mode (synchronous or asynchronous). Only
to be used in an emergency!
The button must be pulled out again before the machine
can be restarted.
Pos. 2: Red STOP BUTTON

If head machine and prover are switched to asynchro-
nous operating mode (see also chapter 7.1.3 "Operating
modes"), pressing this button only stops the prover. If
head machine and prover are switched to synchronous
operating mode, pressing this button starts head ma-
chine and prover simultaneously.
Pos. 3: Green START BUTTON

If head machine and prover are switched to asynchro-
nous operating mode (see also chapter 7.1.3 "Operating
modes"), pressing this button only starts the prover
which then runs independently from the head machine.
If head machine and prover are switched to synchro-
nous mode, pressing this button starts both head ma-
chine and prover simultaneously in synchronous mode.
Pos. 4: Blue button "RESET"

Switch unit at AS retracting unit
After the machine has been switched off using the main
switch or the EMERGENCY OFF button the control
voltage must be switched on again with this button on
resuming operation.
Pos. 5: Audible indicator "FAULT"

Emits an audible signal if a fault occurs during opera-
tion. Switch unit at the stamping station
If the dough pieces were set onto the baking sheet the
signal sounds three times.
Pos. 6: Control panel

On the control panel display the individual components
of the Combi-Line plant are activated and synchronized,
product data are recorded, and all faults and errors are

Tel.: +43 316.6901.0, Fax: +43 316.6901.115 Edition 05/2009
superimposed. Further details are given in Chapter 15 "Visual display operation".
Pos. 7: Main switch

This rotary switch must be switched off for cleaning and maintenance.
Turn clockwise, to position "0" (OFF). This position is to be secured against re-starting.
Pos. 8: Rotary switch "TRAY CONTROL ON/OFF"

On retracting unit, see chapter 7.7. Default: switch in position "0"!
Tray control active: Switch in position "0"
The retracting process starts only if a baking sheet/tray is inserted.
The sensor for tray control detects the baking tray inserted. If the laser sensor is activated
and no tray has been inserted, the plant stops and a fault message is indicated.
Tray control passive: Switch in position "1"

Retracting unit operates without tray control, i.e. retracting starts even if no tray has been in-
serted (tray control sensor is deactivated).
7.1.2.1 CONTROL OF THE INDIVIDUAL COMPONENTS
■ Each individual component is assigned an adjusting parameter on the screen (fig. 6 / pos.
6). Menu-driven storing and recalling of settings and products on the display.
■ Optic and acoustic indication of faults.
■ Important functions, for example synchronizing the plant with the head machine, are
switched on and off at the screen.
Note: Before starting the machine read chapter 15 "Visual display operation"
and make yourself familiar with the several functions and adjusting parameters.
Each individual component (e.g. Rex Automat main drive, Rex duster, etc.) is assigned an
adjusting parameter on the screen. The individual parameters (e.g. moment of transfer) can
be adjusted by entering values. These setting values are automatically stored together with
the product and are available again when recalling the respective product.
It is possible to program and store parameters for 50 different products.

Tel.: +43 316.6901.0, Fax: +43 316.6901.115 Edition 05/2009
Safety functions:
The opening of covers, sliding windows and doors, and the tripping or failure of other safety
devices, is displayed on the screen (both involving the Rex Automat and the prover) and the
plant is stopped.
Warning functions:
The following incidents are displayed, audibly signalled and the corresponding component or
the plant is stopped:
■ Stamping tool does not fit to the stamper cups
■ No baking sheet / tray has been inserted in the setting unit
■ No dough in the Rex Automat head machine
■ The first dough pieces reach the laser sensor in front of the stamping station
■ Other operating faults
7.1.3 OPERATING MODES
7.1.3.1 ASYNCHRONOUS OPERATION
The operating mode is set by switching on the

function on the control panel. FIG. 7
When the function is switched on, the head

machine (REX) operates independently of the 5 : Kaisersemmel
prover (VGS) in accordance with the parameters Gew. 60 g Pos. 60,6
entered (stroke number, rounding speed, etc.) Stück: 83365
Head machine and prover are switched on or off 4 : Sesambrötchen

separately with the respective buttons: Start but- Klima: 35 °C 70 %rH
Stück: 81655
ton (fig. 6 / pos. 3) and Stop button (fig. 6 / pos.
2) on the prover control panel for starting / stop- Klima: 35 °C 70 %rH
ping the prover and Start / Stop button on the
Rex control panel for starting / stopping the Rex
Automat.
Malfunctions stop only the plant component af-

fected.
The two EMERGENCY OFF switches (prover

and Rex Automat) switch off the entire plant.

Tel.: +43 316.6901.0, Fax: +43 316.6901.115 Edition 05/2009
7.1.3.2 SYNCHRONOUS OPERATION
The operating mode is set by switching on the function on the control panel.
When function is switched on, the stroke number of the Rex Automat is determined by
the prover. The synchronisation is controlled by the PLC system.
In this operating mode pressing the Start or Stop buttons (control panel of the Rex Automat
or prover) starts or stops the entire plant.
A malfunction stops the entire plant.
7.2 DOUGH DIVIDING AND ROUNDING MACHINE REX

AUTOMAT
The functioning, adjustment, operation, cleaning, maintenance, etc. for the head machine are
described in the corresponding chapters of the operating manual for the Rex Automat.
The Rex Automat is designed as standard for 5 rows for Combi-Line 600 and for 6 rows for
Combi-Line 800. The machine can be adapted for a wide range of different products by
switching off one or two of the rows. e.g.:
■ by switching off two rows (3- or 4-row operation) it is possible to produce long-rolled prod-
ucts up to a length of 170 mm, hot-dogs, or crescent rolls (horns);
■ by switching off one row (4- or 5-row operation) it is possible to produce hamburgers up to
a diameter of ∅120 (∅130) mm, long-rolled products up to a length of 120 (130) mm, long
rolls and cut rolls.
■ without switching off any rows (5- or 6-row operation) it is possible to produce divided and
rounded products, divided but non rounded products, hamburgers up to diameter
∅100 mm, kaiser rolls and star rolls in the Combi-Line prover plant.
The procedure for switching off rows is described in the chapter "Options - Row changeover"
of the Rex Automat operating manual.

Tel.: +43 316.6901.0, Fax: +43 316.6901.115 Edition 05/2009
7.3 PRE-LONG ROLLER WITH DISPLACE UNIT*

(*ACCESSORY)
The dough pieces arriving from the spreading finger belt (fig. 8 / pos. 6) of the head machine
are accepted by the lower belt (fig. 8 / pos. 2) and then transferred automatically into the
prover swings.
The felt coated pressure board (fig. 8 / pos. 3) serves to roll the dough pieces long.
► The height of the pressure board is adjusted using the cam lever (fig. 8 / pos. 4) and se-
cured with the locking lever (fig. 8 / pos. 5).
The displace unit* (fig. 8 / pos. 8) (*accessory) serves for row reduction.
► For operation with displace unit, the "infeed swings" ('REX main drive' pictured) have to
be set to "1:2", so that the Rex Automat only discharges a row of dough pieces on every
second stroke.
The displace unit then moves one piece of dough into the available space and thereby re-
duces the number of rows from 4 to 2 rows (on USV4/2) or from 6 to 3 rows (on USV6/3).
Operation with the displace unit* thereby halves the hourly capacity!
Â If the displace unit* is not required, it can be deactivated. In order to do so, pull the latch
knob (fig. 8 / pos. 7) and lift the unit upwards by means of the handle (fig. 8 / pos. 8) (fig.
8 / pos. 9). When it is needed again, pull the latch knob (fig. 8 / pos. 10) and lower the
unit back into place.
The lower belt has its own drive (fig. 8 / pos. 1).
► The displace unit is pneumatically actuated. The start moment can be modified by means
of the control panel.
FIG. 8
Attention: The displace unit* (fig. 8 / pos. 8) (*accessory) must always be held
firmly when folding it up and down! Note it is heavy!

Tel.: +43 316.6901.0, Fax: +43 316.6901.115 Edition 05/2009
7.3.1 CENTRING ROLLERS* (*ACCESSORIES)

The centring rollers* (fig. 9 / pos. 1) are used to correct the division between the pieces of
dough on the lower belt (fig. 9 / pos. 7), before the dough pieces are long-rolled under the
pressure board (fig. 9 / pos. 8).
Â Installation of centring rollers*: Hook the fixing rod (fig. 9 / pos. 6) on which the centring
rollers are mounted into holding device on the operator's side and drive side (fig. 9 / pos.
2).
Note: If there is a change in the number of rows then other centring rollers
must be installed accordingly (in two or three rows)!
Â If the centring rollers* are not required, hook the retaining rod on the operator's side and
the drive side into the holding device (fig. 9/ pos. 5).
# The separation between the centring rollers is set by moving the adjustment rings (fig. 9 /
pos. 3). The separation in the longitudinal direction is set at the eyebolts (fig. 9 / pos. 4).
FIG. 9
Attention: Observe the weight of the centring rollers when installing/removing!
Note: To clean the centring roller, do not use any sharp or hard objects! This
could destroy the synthetic material!

Tel.: +43 316.6901.0, Fax: +43 316.6901.115 Edition 05/2009
7.3.2 REMOVAL OF THE PRESSURE BOARD

Â The pressure board can be removed for cleaning. In order to do so, hold the pressure
board by the handle (fig. 10 / pos. 1) and pull it outwards (fig. 10 / pos. 2). When re-
installing, it is to be ensured that the pressure board is pushed back in fully.
Attention: When removing / replacing the pressure board, note that it is heavy!
FIG. 10
7.3.3 ADJUSTING TENSION AND RUN OF THE LOWER

BELT
Dirty deflection rollers or drive rollers or a dirty belt can negatively affect the belt run. There-
fore the belt run and / or belt tension should only be adjusted when the equipment is clean.
All of the shafts and axles must be aligned in parallel to each other in order to ensure correct
belt run. The shafts and deflection rollers may not be allowed to run at an angle.
Â Adjustments to the run and tension of the lower belt are made by repositioning the driving
roller (fig. 10 / pos. 14) by means of tensioning screws (fig. 10 / pos. 6) and counternuts
(fig. 10 / pos. 7).
Beforehand, the screws of the bearing housing of the driving roller (fig. 10 / pos. 8) must
be loosened on the operator side and the drive side. After the adjustment has been
made, retighten these screws.
If the belt runs off in one direction, the screw (fig. 10 / pos. 6) must always be tightened in the
direction towards which the belt runs off. If the belt is too tight, the opposite side must be
slackened. To tension the belt, the tensioning screws on the operating and drive sides must
be tensioned by the same amount.

Tel.: +43 316.6901.0, Fax: +43 316.6901.115 Edition 05/2009
7.4 PROVER WITH SWINGS
The prover is constructed of stainless steel, partly welded and partly screwed. Adjustable feet
(fig. 11 / pos. 15) enable the height of the prover to be adapted to the height of the Rex
Automat.
The dough pieces arriving from the lower belt of the pre-long roller are laid in the swings (fig.
11 / pos. 11). Usually the dough pieces are set into the swings with the seam facing down-
wards. The swings convey the dough pieces through the prover, in which the proving process
takes place.
► The duration of the proving process depends on the number of strokes pre-set.
The prover is fitted with a total of approx. 230 swings of which 190 can be loaded. Thus, the
proving time is approx. 11 minutes at 17 strokes per minute. The maximum permissible
speed is 25 strokes/min.
The hollow-shaped plastic swings (fig. 11 / pos. 11) can be loaded both with rounded and
with long-rolled semi-finished products. The area of the swing coming into contact with the
dough is lined with linen material to prevent the dough from sticking. The underside of the
swing is also formed as a grid, which means that the dough is also aired from below, through
the linen. Moreover, this enables the empty swings to dry more quickly.
FIG. 11

Tel.: +43 316.6901.0, Fax: +43 316.6901.115 Edition 05/2009
In order that the dough pieces can be observed while they are travelling through the prover
and also while being transferred to the downstream plant components, the operator side of
the prover is fitted with transparent windows (fig. 11 / pos. 14) which are protected by limit
switches (see also chapter 2.4.1).
The drive side of the prover is also closed with sliding windows.
On the floor of the prover is a removable collecting drawer (fig. 50 / pos. 1), which facilitates
the disposal of flour dust and small residues of dough.
The upper section of the prover is separated from the lower section by a panel (fig. 11 / pos.
12), which is located below the returning swings. The upper section of the
prover is fitted with a fan unit for drying the empty swings (see chapter 7.4.2 "Swings drying").
There is also an integrated sterilization unit for cleaning the swings (see chapter 7.4.3
"Sterilization").
When designing the prover, emphasis was placed on saving as much space as possible. The
prover consists of the following components:
■ Swings chain with swings (fig. 11 / pos. 10 and 11)

■ Sprocket shaft for taking up the swings (fig. 11 / pos. 13)
■ Vertical (and horizontal) chain guides (fig. 11 / pos. 9)
■ Main drive (fig. 11 / pos. 1)
■ Discharge belt with swing tipping mechanism (fig. 11 / pos. 3)
■ Drive sprocket (fig. 11 / pos. 2)
■ Chain tensioner for swings chain (fig. 11 / pos. 16)
The swings are moved on by the main drive (fig. 11 / pos. 1) driven by an infinitely-variable-
speed motor, thereby enabling synchronization with the head machine.
The vertical arrangement of the swings chain and the integrated flywheel (fig. 53 / pos. 22)
ensure that the swings move silently and provide quiet, safe and energy-saving operation.

Tel.: +43 316.6901.0, Fax: +43 316.6901.115 Edition 05/2009
7.4.1 OPTION: PROVER CLIMATE

To generate the prover climate ventilators (fig. 12 / pos. 5) suck air from the prover chamber.
The heating element (fig. 12 / pos. 2) warms the air and mixes the moist air of the evaporator
(fig. 12 / pos. 3) with this air stream. The warm, moist air then flows into the prover.
The water tank of the evaporator has a water connector (fig. 12 / pos. 6) and an overflow (fig.
12 / pos. 7) for surplus water.
If there is too little water in the water tank (fig. 12 / pos. 3), the evaporator heating may over-
heat. Then the safety thermostat releases and switches off the evaporator heating, as a re-
sult the evaporator reset button (fig. 12 / pos. 8) jumps out.
# After repairing the malfunction (refill water, check water inlet) the evaporator heating is
switched on again by pressing the evaporator reset button (Note: Press the button firmly
until it switches audibly!).
# If the safety thermostat for the heater (fig. 12 / pos. 2) releases, the heating is switched
on again after repairing the malfunction by pressing the heater reset button. This is lo-
cated inside the switch cabinet (fig. 12 / pos. 9) (Note: Press the button firmly until it
switches audibly!).
► Temperature and humidity can be set on the control panel and are controlled by a com-
bined temperature/humidity sensor.
If the preset value (set on the control panel) is exceeded by more than 3 %, fresh air is fed in
by the ventilator (fig. 12 / pos. 4), which is mounted outside on the narrow side of the evapo-
rator housing.
Version 1 FIG. 12 Version 2

Tel.: +43 316.6901.0, Fax: +43 316.6901.115 Edition 05/2009
7.4.2 SWINGS DRYING
The empty swings are dried with a fan (fig. 13 / pos. 2) and heater* (*option) in the upper sec-
tion of the prover (fig. 13 / pos. 1).
FIG. 13
7.4.3 STERILIZATION
The empty swings (fig. 14 / pos. 3) are sterilized by means of a sterilization unit with UV cold-
cathode tubes (fig. 14 / pos. 1) before being refilled. The sterilization process is activated
when the plant is started up and ends approx. 30 seconds after switching off.
Â For cleaning the UV cold-cathode tubes remove the unit with the handles (fig. 14 / pos.
2).
Attention: Don't look into the UV-light!
FIG. 14

Tel.: +43 316.6901.0, Fax: +43 316.6901.115 Edition 05/2009
7.4.4 DISCHARGE BELT

After travelling through the prover the dough pieces are tipped out of the swings (fig. 15 / pos.
6) onto the discharge belt (fig. 15 / pos. 1). The discharge belt then transfers the dough
pieces to the downstream plant components.
► The transfer height and therefore the distance the dough pieces fall from the discharge
belt onto the next belt (or into the stamper cups) can be set with the adjusting lever (fig.
15 / pos. 4). The position set is secured by means of a locking lever (fig. 15 / pos. 5).
The driving roller (fig. 11 / pos. 6) of the discharge belt (fig. 11 / pos. 3) is chain driven (fig. 11
/ pos. 5) by the main drive (fig. 11 / pos. 1).
FIG. 15
7.4.4.1 ADJUSTING BELT TENSION AND RUN

The run of a belt can be impaired by soiled deflection or drive rollers or if the belt itself is
dirty. For this reason, the belt run and belt tension should only be adjusted when the equip-
ment is clean. All of the shafts and axles must be aligned in parallel to each other in order to
ensure correct belt run. The shafts and deflection rollers may not be allowed to run at an an-
gle.
Â The adjustment of belt run and belt tension is performed by means of tensioning screws
(fig. 15 / pos. 7) and counternuts on the operating and drive side. The tensioning screws
are located behind the laser sensor (fig. 15 / pos. 3).
If the belt runs off in one direction, the screw must always be tightened in the direction to-
wards which the belt runs off. If the belt is too tight, the opposite side must be slackened. In
order to do so, the screws should only be turned in small steps of approximately a quarter
turn.
To tension the belt, the tensioning screws on the operating and drive sides must be ten-
sioned by the same amount.

Tel.: +43 316.6901.0, Fax: +43 316.6901.115 Edition 05/2009
7.5 COMBINED STAMPING STATION (STAMP)
The function of the stamping station is to imprint the corresponding pattern for the required
product into the prepared dough piece, or to cut the dough pieces by mounting a cutting tool
(see also 7.5.4).
The stamper cups (fig. 16 / pos. 2) accept the dough pieces from the discharge belt (fig. 16 /
pos. 1), the dough pieces are floured in the swings by the stamping station duster fig. 16 /
pos. 4) and after processing by the stamping head (fig. 16 / pos. 5) are tipped onto the dis-
charge belt (see chapter 7.5.5).
Spring-loaded pre-pressers (fig. 16 / pos. 7) may be mounted in front of the actual stamping
tool. Depending on the product required, different stamping tools (fig. 16 / pos. 5) can be
used with different pistons (fig. 16 / pos. 6) or the stamping tool can be replaced with a cut-
ting tool for the production of cut rolls.
Attention: If products should not be stamped, the stamping tool (fig. 16 / pos.
5) and the pre-presser (fig. 16 / pos. 7) must be removed.
To enable the dough pieces to be observed during discharge and transfer and during flouring
and the stamping procedure, transparent windows are used (fig. 1 / pos. 1) which are se-
cured by means of limit switches (see also chapter 2.4.1). There are permanently fixed,
transparent windows on the discharge side (fig. 16 / pos. 8). In this way the stamping or cut-
ting process can be kept under continuous observation and the result monitored, thus ena-
bling tools to be changed and parameters to be adjusted as appropriate.
FIG. 16

Tel.: +43 316.6901.0, Fax: +43 316.6901.115 Edition 05/2009
7.5.1 STAMPER CUPS
The dough pieces are stamped or cut in the stamper cups (fig. 17 / pos. 1). Before the stamp-
ing station (fig. 17 / pos. 3) the dough pieces can be fixed in the stamper cups by the pre-
presser (fig. 17 / pos. 2).
There are a total of 11 stamper cups (fig. 17 / pos. 1) in the stamping station, which are fas-
tened to a chain belt (the so-called stamping unit chain, fig. 17 / pos. 5).
The stamper cups can be turned over: on one side there are round hollows (fig. 17 / pos. 1A)
for accepting rounded dough pieces; on the other side are continuous, elongated hollows (fig.
17 / pos. 1B) for long-rolled dough pieces. Both sides are coated with a special felt on areas
coming into contact with dough.
During operation the stamper cups are turned by means of the changeover knob (fig. 18 /
pos. 3).
Attention: The stamper cups must correspond with the inserted tool, i.e.:
round cups (fig. 17 / pos. 1A) with stamping tools (fig. 17 / pos. 3) for round
products (stamped products) or elongated cups (fig. 17 / pos. 1B) with stamp-
ing tools (fig. 17 / pos. 4) for long rolls (cut rolls).
FIG. 17

Tel.: +43 316.6901.0, Fax: +43 316.6901.115 Edition 05/2009
Turning the stamper cups:
1. Setting for round cups (fig. 18 / pos. 1):

Lift knob, push in as far as the stop, release (fig. 18 / pos. 3): The side with the round hol-
lows can now be used.
2. Setting for elongated cups (fig. 18 / pos. 2):

Lift knob, pull out as far as the stop, release (fig. 18 / pos. 4): The side with the continuous
hollows can now be used.
After operation of the changeover knob the stamping cups are used automatically in order.
FIG. 18
Setting for round cups Setting for elongated cups
Proximity switches detect the position of the stamping cups (round or elongated hollows).
Moreover, the stamping tool is also monitored by two proximity switches (fig. 53 / pos. 11).
These proximity switches ensure that the plant only runs if the stamping cups correspond to
the respective stamping tool. This excludes the possibility of tool breakage or damage to the
machine.

Tel.: +43 316.6901.0, Fax: +43 316.6901.115 Edition 05/2009
7.5.2 DUSTER
During the production of stamped products, both the stamper cups (fig. 19 / pos. 2) and the
dough pieces themselves must be floured before stamping in order to prevent the dough from
adhering to the stamping tool (fig. 19 / pos. 6) or to the stamper cups. This function is fulfilled
by the duster (fig. 19 / pos. 1).
The laser sensor (fig. 15 / pos. 3) detects the dough pieces on the discharge belt and con-
trols the flouring accordingly, i.e. the duster switches off when no dough pieces are being
conveyed. The rotating duster brush (fig. 19 / pos. 3) presses the flour through the curved
plate sieve (fig. 19 / pos. 4). As a result the dough pieces are sprinkled with fine flour dust.
The brush is driven by the main drive over an electric coupling (fig. 53 / pos. 9).
The quantity of flour should be adjusted so that during stamping the dough pieces do not ad-
here to the tool (fig. 19 / pos. 6) or to the scraper plate (fig. 19 / pos. 7).
► The flour quantity is regulated through the speed of rotation of the brush and can be
changed by entering a value at the screen (input value 0 - 100; if 0 is entered the duster is
switched off).
Note: Use only clean, fresh and dry flour, free of contaminants, to avoid impair-
ing the quality of flour distribution.
Recommended flour quality: wheat flour grade BL 700
In order to achieve satisfactory dusting, different sieves are available corresponding to differ-
ent stamping tools and stamper cups (fig. 19 / pos. 4), for example:
■ Sieve with rounded openings for round pieces FIG. 19

of dough, for use with stamping tools ST, SA,
GB and K (see fig. 4 / pos. 7).
■ Sieve with narrow, oval-shaped openings for
long rolled pieces of dough, for use with
stamping tool SL (see fig. 4 / pos. 8).
Â The flour sieve is pushed in by the handle (fig.

19 / pos. 4) along the guide rail.
When changing or cleaning the sieve, first
push in the collecting drawer (fig. 19 / pos.
5) beneath the sieve and only then pull out
the sieve.
After the sieve has been changed, return the
flour from the collecting drawer into the flour
container (fig. 19 / pos. 1). The collecting
drawer (fig. 19 / pos. 5) must also be pushed
in for cleaning the flour container and the ro- The stamping station duster
tating brush (fig. 19 / pos. 3). must always be operating while dough
pieces are being stamped!

Tel.: +43 316.6901.0, Fax: +43 316.6901.115 Edition 05/2009
7.5.3 STAMPING HEAD

The stamping tools detailed in chapter 6.3.1 are supplied with the Combi-Line machine.
Other types can also be supplied if required: see Chapter 6.3.2.
The stamping head seat (fig. 20 / pos. 9) mounted on the two vertical guide rods (fig. 20 /
pos. 8) was designed to allow the different stamping tools (fig. 20 / pos. 1) to be changed
easily. The stamping tool is locked in place by the spring-loaded locking pin (fig. 20 / pos. 5).
The piston (fig. 20 / pos. 3) presses the dough piece into the required shape. The spring-
loaded scraper plate (fig. 20 / pos. 4) scrapes the dough piece from the piston as the stamp-
ing head is being raised.
FIG. 20
7.5.3.1 INSTALLATION OF THE STAMPING TOOL / TOOL

CHANGING
Lift the locking pin (fig. 20 / pos. 10) and push the stamping tool (fig. 20 / pos. 1) into the
stamping head seat (fig. 20 / pos. 9) until the locking pin engages (fig. 20 / pos. 5).
On the side of the stamping tool opposite the grip a hole has been drilled (fig. 20 / pos. 6,
diam. ∅15 mm) for distinguishing between the different stamping tools. For 5-row tools
(e.g. K5, SA5, ST5, GB5) the hole is on the duster side; in the case of the tool for elon-
gated stamper cups (SL4) it is located on the other side.
To change the tool, raise the spring-loaded locking pin (fig. 20 / pos. 5) take hold of the
stamping tool grip (fig. 20 / pos. 1) and pull the tool out towards the front ( please be
aware that the tool is heavy!). Insertion of the other stamping tool as described in Point 1.

Tel.: +43 316.6901.0, Fax: +43 316.6901.115 Edition 05/2009
Attention: Before every start-up, a check must be carried out as to whether the
stamping or cutting tool is locked.
Note: When changing tools and storing them, care must be taken not to dam-
age the stamping tools, especially the parts made of plastic.
If the plant is set up properly the stamping head must always come to rest in the upper
position when the plant is stopped. Only then is it possible to change the tool.
Attention: Tool replacement is not permissible after an EMERGENCY OFF

stoppage because the stamping head is in an undefined position. The machine
must be stopped using the Stop button in order that the stamping head moves
to the upper position.
Depending on the product and the properties of the dough, a spring-loaded pre-presser
(fig. 21 / pos. 4) can be additionally installed in front of the actual stamping tool. The unit,
mounted in guide rails, is pushed into the stamping head seat (fig. 21 / pos. 2) after rais-
ing the spring-loaded locking pin (fig. 21 / pos. 1) and secured again with the locking pin
(fig. 21 / pos. 3). If pre-pressing before stamping is not required for specific products, the
unit can simply be removed again after raising the locking pin (fig. 21 / pos. 3).
The collecting drawer (fig. 21 / pos. 5) below the stamping station collects flour dust and resi-
dues of dough falling from above. The storage compartment beneath it (fig. 21 / pos. 7) is
used for keeping those stamping heads, pre-pressers and plate sieves that are not needed
during the production run currently in progress.
FIG. 21

Tel.: +43 316.6901.0, Fax: +43 316.6901.115 Edition 05/2009
Attention: For dough pieces that are processed further in the forming station
(e.g. long-rolled products) the stamping tool (fig. 20 / pos. 1) and the pre-
presser (fig. 21 / pos. 4) must be removed.
The stamping tools are properly adjusted before they leave the works. Any repairs or
adjustments to the settings must be performed by properly qualified persons. This ap-
plies in particular to the rotating piston of type "KAISER" (see also Chapter 12.2.10
"Readjustment of the Stamping Tool").
7.5.4 CUTTING UNIT* (*ACCESSORY)

The stamping tool can be replaced by a cutting unit. Please observe the information given in
chapter 7.5.3.1!
Two knives (fig. 22 / pos. 11) are mounted on the swivelling knife holder (fig. 22 / pos. 2).
During a stroke the knife holder travels over the dough pieces with the first knife; in the return
position the knives are switched. During the following stroke the knife holder travels back
again over the next row of dough pieces with the second knife; the knives are switched again,
etc. During the cutting process the dough pieces are fixed in the stamper cups by a holding-
down device (fig. 22 / pos. 3).
The height of which can be adapted to the size of the dough pieces by means of an ad-
justing lever (fig. 22 / pos. 4). The depth of the cut is set using the adjusting screw (fig. 22
/ pos. 7).
► The cutting unit can be switched on and off at the control panel.
The cutting process only starts if dough pieces are being conveyed and interrupt the laser
sensor (fig. 15 / pos. 3) at the discharge belt.
FIG. 22

Tel.: +43 316.6901.0, Fax: +43 316.6901.115 Edition 05/2009
Danger: Handle the cutting unit very carefully since the knives can cause seri-
ous injury.
7.5.4.1 FITTING / REMOVING THE KNIVES
Â Pull out the cutting unit using the grip (fig. 22 / pos. 1). Proceed as described in Chapter
7.5.4.2!
Â Push the knife holder (fig. 22 / pos. 2) by hand into the position where the knife fixing
screws are accessible (fig. 22 / pos. 12).
Â Carefully take hold of the knife (fig. 22 / pos. 11) loosen the fixing screw (fig. 22 / pos. 12)
and replace the knife. Repeat this procedure for the second knife.
Â Using the grip, push the cutting unit back in until the locking pin engages.
7.5.4.2 REMOVING THE CUTTING UNIT
Â Detach the pneumatic connection (fig. 22 / pos. 8).
Â Pull stop knob (fig. 22 / pos. 4) and use the adjusting lever to engage the holding-down
device in the lowest position. This is the only position in which the cutting unit can be re-
moved.
Â Raise the spring-loaded locking pin (fig. 22 / pos. 9) and use the grip (1) to pull the cut-
ting unit out forwards (fig. 22 / pos. 1).
Attention: Please be aware when removing and installing that the cutting unit
is heavy!
Attention: To avoid injury, do not grasp the cutting tool underneath near the
knives.
Attention: When the cutting unit has been removed, always leave the adjust-
ing lever (fig. 22 / pos. 14) in the lowest position since this is the only position
where the knives are retract!

Tel.: +43 316.6901.0, Fax: +43 316.6901.115 Edition 05/2009
7.5.4.3 FITTING THE CUTTING TOOL
Â Check that the knives are screwed firmly in place (see Chapter 7.5.4.1). Make sure that
the adjusting lever is in the lowest position (fig. 22 / pos. 4)!
Â Raise the locking pin (fig. 22 / pos. 9) and push the cutting tool into the stamping head
seat until the locking pin engages.
Â Pull the stop knob (fig. 22 / pos. 4) and use the adjusting lever to set the required height
of the holding-down device. Set the required cutting depth using the adjusting screw (fig.
22 / pos. 7).
Â Connect compressed air line (fig. 22 / pos. 8).
Attention: When operating the cutting unit the stamping station must be fitted
with the elongated stamper cups (fig. 22 / pos. 6)!
Attention: Check before every start-up that the cutting tool is locked in position
(fig. 22 / pos. 9) and the compressed air lines are connected to the pneumatic
unit!

Tel.: +43 316.6901.0, Fax: +43 316.6901.115 Edition 05/2009
7.5.5 DISCHARGE BELT STAMPING STATION
After processing by the stamps, the pieces of dough fall out of the stamper cups and onto the
discharge belt (fig. 23 / pos. 1).
The drive roller (fig. 23 / pos. 5) on the discharge belt is driven by means of a chain from the
main drive (fig. 53 / pos. 2).
FIG. 23
7.5.5.1 ADJUSTING BELT TENSION AND RUN

dirty. For this reason, adjustment of the belt run and / or belt tension should only be under-
taken when the equipment is clean.
Â Adjustment of the belt run and belt tension is undertaken by means of shifting the tension-
ing roller (fig. 23 / pos. 2) via the tensioning screws (fig. 23 / pos. 3) on the operating and
drive sides.
wards which the belt runs off. If the belt is too tight, the opposite side must be slackened. In
doing so, the screws should only be moved in small steps of approximately a quarter turn.
To tension the belt, the tensioning screws on the operating and drive sides must be ten-
sioned by the same amount.

Tel.: +43 316.6901.0, Fax: +43 316.6901.115 Edition 05/2009
7.5.6 TRANSFER FLAP
After processing by the stamps, the pieces of dough fall out of the stamper cups (fig. 24 /
pos. 1) and onto the discharge belt (fig. 24 / pos. 6). A transfer flap is fitted (fig. 24 / pos. 2) in
order to ensure an even transfer of the dough. The transfer flap is Teflon coated.
► In order to enable various products to be placed precisely onto the discharge belt, the
transfer flap can be moved vertically by means of the handwheel (fig. 24 / pos. 3).
► The spacing of the dough pieces can be adapted to the size of the pieces of dough and
adjusted by means of the handwheel (fig. 24 / pos. 4).
The attachable scraper ledge (fig. 24 / pos. 5) serves to facilitate determination of the final
position (whether the piece of dough is to be turned or not). It is attached or removed de-
pending on the product, depending on whether the piece of dough is to be placed face up or
face down on the discharge belt.
FIG. 24
Attention: The transfer flap (fig. 24 / pos. 2) must always be mounted during
operation! The machine may not be started up without the transfer flap!
Note: No sharp or hard tools may be used in order to clean the transfer flap
(fig. 24 / pos. 2)! This could cause the dough resistant coating to be damaged!

Tel.: +43 316.6901.0, Fax: +43 316.6901.115 Edition 05/2009
7.5.6.1 INSTALLING / REMOVING THE TRANSFER FLAP AND

SCRAPER LEDGE
► Switch off the machine (fig. 6 / pos. 2).
► Open the sliding windows at the stamping station and in front of the swings.
Lift out the entire unit (fig. 25 / pos. 1).
Attention: When installing / removing the transfer flap, please note that it
is heavy!
If the scraper ledge is not required: Pull out both of the latch knobs (fig. 25 / pos. 4) on
the under side and pull out the scraper ledge (fig. 25 / pos. 3) in the direction of the ar-
rows.
When the scraper ledge is needed again: insert the scraper ledge until it engages into the
latch knobs (fig. 25 / pos. 4).
Hook the transfer flap back in (fig. 25 / pos. 2).
FIG. 25
Note: The scraper ledge (fig. 25 / pos. 3) has a plastic surface and is to be pro-
tected against damage by unsuitable tools!

Tel.: +43 316.6901.0, Fax: +43 316.6901.115 Edition 05/2009
7.6 FORMING STATION

7.6.1 CONVOLUTING STATION* (*OPTION)
The pre-pressure roller (fig. 26 / pos. 2) accepts the pieces of dough from the discharge belt
(fig. 26 / pos. 1) and presses them flat. The sheeter roller (fig. 26 / pos. 3) presses the pieces
of dough flat and passes them on to the bottom belt (fig. 26 / pos. 6) (see chapter 7.6.2).
A scraper (fig. 26 / pos. 4) serves to continuously remove any sticking flour and dough resi-
dues from the upper roller while scraper (fig. 26 / pos. 7) cleans the lower roller.
The flat pressed pieces of dough are then convoluted with the help of a convoluting belt* (fig.
26 / pos. 5) (*accessory). Convoluting plates* (fig. 26 / pos. 11) or chain belts* can be option-
ally attached (see chapters 7.6.1.3 and 7.6.4).
In the event that there are no dough pieces to be convoluted, then the convoluting belt can
be removed (see chapter 7.6.1.2).
► The height of the pre-pressure roller is adjusted by means of the handwheel (fig. 26 / pos.
8).
► The gap width between the upper and lower rollers can be adjusted by means of the
handwheel (fig. 26 / pos. 9).
► The convoluting gap of the belt (fig. 26 / pos. 5) can be adjusted by means of an adjusting
lever (fig. 26 / pos. 10).
► If the pieces of dough should be prevented from turning too often under the convoluting
plates, then the convoluting plates can be lifted up by means of a lever (fig. 26 / pos. 14).
FIG. 26

Tel.: +43 316.6901.0, Fax: +43 316.6901.115 Edition 05/2009
7.6.1.1 REMOVAL OF THE LOWER ROLLER SCRAPER
Â The scraper is automatically tensioned by means of a spring. Press the fastening device
for the scraper upwards by the handle (fig. 27 / pos. 14) thereby causing it to be re-
leased.
Â Pull the scraper out by the handle (fig. 27 / pos. 7) to the front (see arrow), check for
damage and clean.
Â When re-installing the scraper, ensure that the spring is pretensioned with the handle (fig.
27 / pos. 14), i.e. press the handle up (!), otherwise the scraper cannot be reinserted.
Make sure that the scraper is seated properly.
FIG. 27
7.6.1.2 TENSIONING AND REMOVING THE CONVOLUTING

BELT*
Â The convoluting belt (fig. 27 / pos. 5) is tensioned by means of a tensioning roller. In the
event that the belt tension decreases, the tensioning roller (fig. 27 / pos. 13) can be ad-
justed by means of the adjusting screw (fig. 27/ pos. 15) and counternuts (fig. 27/ pos.
16) (on both operator's and drive sides).
The belt must always be tensioned by the same amount on the operator and drive side!
Attention: The power plug (fig. 27 / pos. 1) is to be disconnected before

removing the convoluting belt (fig. 27 / pos. 5) and to be plugged in the
dummy plug at its location (fig. 27 / pos. 2)!
Â In order to remove the convoluting belt, open the locking mechanism (fig. 28 / pos. 17).
Then the convoluting belt can be lifted from the retaining bar.
When hooking it back in, ensure that the locking mechanism is closed again (fig. 28 /
pos. 18)!

Tel.: +43 316.6901.0, Fax: +43 316.6901.115 Edition 05/2009
FIG. 28
Attention: When installing / removing the convoluting belt* or convoluting

plates* (*accessories) please note that they are heavy!
7.6.1.3 INSTALLING / REMOVING CONVOLUTING PLATES*

(*ACCESSORY) - EXCHANGING THE CONVOLUTING CLOTH
► Switch the machine off (fig. 6 / pos. 2). Tilt up the protective guard on the forming station.
When hooking in the convoluting plates (fig. 29 / pos. 11) ensure that the edge of the fas-
tening rod (fig. 29 / pos. 1) engages, then turn the lever upwards (fig. 29 / pos. 12).
In the event that no pieces of dough are to be convoluted, the convoluting plates can be
removed. In order to unhook the convoluting plates, turn the lever downwards (fig. 29 /
pos. 13) and remove the convoluting plate by means of the handle (fig. 29 / pos. 11).
Â If the cloth (fig. 29 / pos. 2) is severely soiled or worn, then it must be exchanged. In or-
der to do so, release the screws (fig. 29 / pos. 17) and remove the cloth from the holder
(fig. 29 / pos. 16, 17). Pull out the cloth and guide wedge (fig. 29 / pos. 15) and slide the
guide wedge back in with a new cloth. Reattach the cloth on both sides.
FIG. 29

Tel.: +43 316.6901.0, Fax: +43 316.6901.115 Edition 05/2009
7.6.2 LOWER BELT, UPPER BELT AND INTERMEDIATE

BELT
The lower belt (fig. 30 / pos. 1) transports the dough pieces beneath the upper belt (fig. 30 /
pos. 2) through to the intermediate belt (fig. 30 / pos. 5) and on to downstream plant compo-
nents.
A pre-pressure roller* (fig. 30 / pos. 9) serves to press the dough pieces flat (*option: A pre-
press roller is only fitted if there is no convoluting station!). A scraper continuously removes
residual flour and dough from the pre-pressure roller.
The upper belt (fig. 30 / pos. 2) serves for the production of long-rolled dough pieces. De-
pending on the respective product, the separation between the upper and lower belts on the
delivery side can be the same as or different to the separation on the discharge side.
► The height of the pre-press roller is adjusted by means of the handwheel (fig. 30 / pos.
10).
► The vertical adjustment of the upper belt is carried out on the infeed side by means of a
handwheel (fig. 30 / pos. 3), and on the outfeed side by a further handwheel (fig. 30 /
pos. 4).
► The speed of the pre-pressure roller* as well as the upper and lower belts can be modi-
fied by means of entering values on the screen. In addition, the direction of rotation can
be changed for the upper belt.
► The height of the intermediate belt can be adjusted depending on the product and size of
the pieces of dough (fig. 30 / pos. 5) - thereby adjusting the drop height to the next belt.
The height is set using the adjusting lever (fig. 30 / pos. 6). For example, long-rolled
products need a lower dropping height, flat pressed products need a larger dropping
height.
► In addition, the intermediate belt can also be moved horizontally with the handwheel (fig.
30 / pos. 12) (gap adjustment to lower belt).
► In addition, there is also a transfer roller fitted (fig. 30 / pos. 7), the vertical adjustment of
which is undertaken by means of the handwheel (fig. 30 / pos. 8).
FIG. 30

Tel.: +43 316.6901.0, Fax: +43 316.6901.115 Edition 05/2009
The drive roller of the lower belt is driven via a chain by a motor. The upper belt is driven by a
separate variable-speed motor. The intermediate belt is driven by a chain from the lower belt;
the transfer roller is driven at the same time by round belts (fig. 30 / pos. 11).
The pre-pressure roller is driven by means of its own drum motor.
7.6.2.1 BELT RUN ADJUSTMENT / BELT TENSION
dirty. The belt run and belt tension should therefore only be adjusted in a clean condition.
wards which the belt runs off. In doing so, the screws should only be moved in small steps of
approximately a quarter turn. Re-tighten counternuts afterwards.
When tensioning the belt the tensioning screws on the operator and the drive side must al-
ways be adjusted by the same amount.
Â The belt tension of the lower belt (fig. 31 / pos. 1) is adjusted by moving the tensioning
roller (fig. 31 / pos. 9) by means of tensioning screws (fig. 31/ pos. 10), thrust pieces and
counternuts (fig. 31 / fig. 11).
Â The run and/or tension of the upper belt (fig. 31 / pos. 2) are adjusted by repositioning the
deflection roller (fig. 31 / pos. 13) by means of tensioning screws (fig. 31 / pos. 14), thrust
pieces and counternuts (fig. 31 / pos. 15).
Â The belt run and/or belt tension of the intermediate belt (fig. 31 / fig. 5) are adjusted by
moving the front deflection roller by means of tensioning screws (fig. 31 / fig. 12), thrust
pieces and counternuts.
FIG. 31

Tel.: +43 316.6901.0, Fax: +43 316.6901.115 Edition 05/2009
7.6.2.2 REMOVAL OF THE PRE-PRESSURE ROLLER SCRAPER*

(*OPTION)
The scraper for the pre-pressure roller can be removed for purposes of cleaning.
Â The locking bar (fig. 32 / pos. 3) of the scraper is tensioned by springs. Slide the locking
bar into the lower bore hole (fig. 32 / pos. 5) (on operating and drive side!)
Â Now the scraper (fig. 32 / pos. 2) can be pulled out of the retaining pins (fig. 32 / pos. 6)
and removed from underneath.
Â When reinstalling the scraper, ensure that it engages into all of the retaining pins (fig. 32 /
pos. 6)! Only then can the locking bar be slid back into the upper bore hole (fig. 32 / pos.
4) and the scraper can be fastened again.
FIG. 32
Note: Do not use sharp or hard tools in order to clean the pre-pressure roller
(fig. 32 / pos. 1) and the scraper (fig. 32 / pos. 2)! Doing so could cause the
plastic dough-resistant coating to be damaged!

Tel.: +43 316.6901.0, Fax: +43 316.6901.115 Edition 05/2009
7.6.3 DUSTER ABOVE UPPER BELT
When using strongly sticking, soft doughs the upper belt of the forming station (fig. 33 / pos.
2) can be additionally dusted with an automatic duster (fig. 33 / pos. 1) positioned above the
upper belt.
The duster can be shifted to the right if required so that the lower belt (fig. 33 / pos. 7) (or
the dough pieces) are dusted. To do so, turn the lever (fig. 33 / pos. 8) to the right: the
duster then is positioned above the lower belt. Turn the lever to the left: the duster is po-
sitioned above the upper belt.
The rotating duster brush (fig. 33 / pos. 3) presses the flour through the curved plate sieve
(fig. 33 / pos. 4). The brush is driven by a separate motor (fig. 33 / pos. 6). In order to achieve
satisfactory dusting, different sieves are available (fig. 33 / pos. 4).
► The duster is switched on and off by means of the control panel on the prover. The flour
quantity is regulated through the speed of rotation of the brush and can be changed by
entering a value at the screen (input value 0 - 100; if 0 is entered the duster is switched
off).
Â The flour sieve is pushed in by the handle (fig. 33 / pos. 4) along the guide rail.
When changing or cleaning the sieve, first push in the collecting drawer (fig. 33 / pos. 5)
beneath the sieve and only then pull out the sieve. After the sieve has been changed, re-
turn the flour from the collecting drawer into the flour container (fig. 33 / pos. 1).
The collecting drawer (fig. 33 / pos. 5) must also be pushed in for cleaning the flour con-
tainer and the rotating brush (fig. 33 / pos. 3).
FIG. 33
Note: Use only clean, fresh and

dry flour, free of contaminants, to avoid
impairing the quality of flour distribu-
tion.
Recommended flour quality:
wheat flour grade BL 700

Tel.: +43 316.6901.0, Fax: +43 316.6901.115 Edition 05/2009
7.6.4 DRAG BELTS* (CHAIN BELTS*) (*ACCESSORY)
The flat pressed dough pieces from the pre-pressure roller or sheeter roller can be convo-
luted with the help of chain belts (fig. 34 / pos. 3 und 7).
If required, hook the chain belts (fig. 34 / pos. 3) into the holding device on the side shield
behind the sheeter roller (fig. 34 / pos. 4) on the convoluter.
If required, hook the chain belts into the holding device (fig. 34 / pos. 8) behind the pre-
pressure roller.
If the chain belts are no longer required, simply remove them again by using the handle
(fig. 34 / pos. 5).
FIG. 34
Chain belts behind the pre-pressure roller
Chain belts behind the sheeter roller on the convoluter on the forming station

Tel.: +43 316.6901.0, Fax: +43 316.6901.115 Edition 05/2009
7.6.5 PRESSURE BOARD* WITH WEDGES

(*ACCSESSORY)
A "pressure board with wedges" can be fitted to the upper belt in order to be able to achieve
special forming when pressing the dough flat in the forming station.
FIG. 35
7.6.5.1 INSTALLATION / REMOVAL OF THE PRESSURE BOARD
Place the upper belt in the upper-most position by means of the handwheels.
Slide the pressure board into the gap between the lower belt and the upper belt.
Attention: Ensure that the wedges (fig. 35 / pos. 1) are on the underside
(facing the lower belt)!
Now slowly lower the upper belt. Attention: The pins on the upper belt on which the pres-
sure board is fixed must fit exactly into the apertures of the pressure board (fig. 35 / Pos.
4).
Slide the pressure board approx. 3 cm to the left (arrow).
Turn the two levers (fig. 35 / pos. 2 and 3) upwards and thereby fix the pressure board to
the upper belt.
Adjust the gap width between pressure board and lower belt with the handwheels, de-
pending on the product.
Removal of the pressure board is carried out in reverse order.

Tel.: +43 316.6901.0, Fax: +43 316.6901.115 Edition 05/2009
7.6.6 GUIDES* (*ACCESSORIES)
So called "guides" (fig. 36 / pos. 2) can be inserted into the forming station in order to pro-
duce cylindrical long-rolled pieces of dough.
Place the top belt (fig. 36 / pos. 1) in the uppermost position, then from the operator's
side, slide the frames with the guides (fig. 36 / pos. 3) into the holding device.
Attention: When inserting or removing the guides, please always bear in mind
that they are heavy!
Note: No sharp or hard tools may be used in order to clean the guides (fig. 36 /
pos. 2)! This could cause the dough resistant coating to be damaged!
FIG. 36
7.6.7 TIMED ROLLER AND TRANSFER ROLLER
The timed roller fig. 37/ pos. 1) serves for row correction of the long-rolled or convoluted
products. The transfer roller (fig. 37 / pos. 4) serves for row correction of the round and flat-
pressed products.
During the production of round or flat-pressed dough pieces the timed roller must be raised
and switched off and the transfer roller must be fitted. For long-rolled or convoluted dough
pieces the transfer roller must be removed and the timed roller switched on (at the control
panel).
► The height of the timed roller is adjusted by means of the handwheel (fig. 37 / pos. 2).
► The moment when the timed roller starts during lowering is adjusted at the control panel.

Tel.: +43 316.6901.0, Fax: +43 316.6901.115 Edition 05/2009
A safety cover (fig. 37 / pos. 5) serves to prevent injuries when the transfer roller is removed.
Attention: When the transfer roller (fig. 37 / pos. 4) is removed, the safety
cover (fig. 37 / pos. 5) must be closed at all times! Danger of injury!
The highest and lowest positions of the timed roller are detected by limit switches (fig. 37 /
pos. 9 and 10).
The transfer roller (fig. 37 / pos. 4) is driven via the drive unit of the lower belt. The timed
roller (fig. 37 / pos. 1) is driven via a round belt (fig. 37 / pos. 11). The high/low movement of
the timed roller is produced by the motor (fig. 37 / pos. 8).
FIG. 37
7.6.7.1 FITTING / REMOVING THE TRANSFER ROLLER
Tilt up the protective guard on the forming station. The safety-cover (fig. 37 / pos. 5) now
exposes the transfer roller area.
In order to remove the transfer roller, press the locking mechanism (fig. 37 / pos. 7) to the
right and pull the roller (fig. 37 / pos. 4) towards the front.
Attention: Be aware that the transfer roller is heavy!
When fitting the transfer roller (fig. 37 / pos. 4) care must be taken that it is pushed in
completely until the drive-side bearing unit engages and the transfer roller is locked in
position (fig. 37 / pos. 7).

Tel.: +43 316.6901.0, Fax: +43 316.6901.115 Edition 05/2009
7.7 RETRACTING UNIT AB

FIG. 38
Rows of dough pieces reach the laser sensor (6) at the end
of the retracting belt (8). The retracting process is triggered
by the retracting motor (9) pulling back the retracting belt (8)
so that the dough pieces fall onto the baked goods trays
inserted in the retracting drawer (25, 25A).
■ Tray control active:
The retracting process starts only if a baking sheet/tray is
inserted. The tray control sensor (10) senses the baking
sheet / tray in the retracting drawer (25). For the option
with retractable drawer (25A) the sensor (10A) senses the
inserted drawer.
If there is no sheet inserted in the retracting drawer (25)
(or the retracting drawer (25A) is not inserted) and the la-
ser sensor (6) is actuated, then the plant will stop and a
fault message is displayed on the control panel.
■ Tray control passive: FIG. 39
The retracting unit operates without tray control, i.e. the
retracting starts even if no tray has been inserted (tray
control sensor is deactivated).
If the two protective flaps (7, 26) are actuated, the retracting
process is halted via the switch (5, 13)! Restart is under-
taken by means of pressing one of the green start buttons
and is only possible when the protecting flaps (7, 26) are
back in their initial position.
The two flour collecting trays* (31, *option) must always be
inserted during operation! This is checked by
means of a limit switch (32). FIG. 40
Â Baking tray support height adjustment (27):

The setting is made by means of the rotary tog-
gle knob (28) and can be read off of the scale
(29).
Â Triggering position:
The triggering position for retracting can be ad-
justed by moving the laser sensor (6) after re-
leasing and re-tightening the thumb nuts (30).
► Step on:
Setting of the time for the retracting belt inter- Option with retractable tray:
mediate step (speed of the retracting belt) by
entering values on the screen.

Tel.: +43 316.6901.0, Fax: +43 316.6901.115 Edition 05/2009
► Setting the retracting length:

The retracting length can be entered on screen according to the respective product. A toothed disk
supplies the required impulses by means of a proximity switch.
In addition, various setting arrangements can be achieved with the retracting belt (blocks):
1 3 5
Input data: Example:
⊗⊗⊗ ⊗⊗⊗ ⊗⊗⊗ ⊗⊗⊗ ⊗⊗⊗ ⊗⊗⊗ ⊗⊗⊗ ⊗⊗⊗ 1...Basic separation x ← 30
⊗⊗⊗ ⊗⊗⊗ ⊗⊗⊗ ⊗⊗⊗ ⊗⊗⊗ ⊗⊗⊗ ⊗⊗⊗ ⊗⊗⊗ 2...Pieces / block 3
⊗⊗⊗ ⊗⊗⊗ ⊗⊗⊗ ⊗⊗⊗ ⊗⊗⊗ ⊗⊗⊗ ⊗⊗⊗ ⊗⊗⊗ 3...Intermed. separation 80
2 4...Number of blocks 4
4
5...Control separation 120
If the retraction takes place during the intermediate step, it is necessary to correct the value for the
control division as otherwise the dough pieces will be pushed together differently on retraction.

⊗⊗⊗⊗⊗⊗⊗ Basic separation 80
⊗⊗⊗⊗⊗⊗⊗ Pieces / block 7
⊗⊗⊗⊗⊗⊗⊗ Intermed. separation 80
Number of blocks 1
Control separation 80
7.7.1 BELT RUN ADJUSTMENT / TENSIONING THE RE-

TRACTING BELT AND THE STRAP - RETRACTING
MOTOR BRAKE
Â The strap is tensioned by shifting the tensioning roller (16) with the tensioning screw (17), thrust
piece and counternut (18). It is driven by the retracting motor (fig. 40 / pos. 9).
The strap must always be tensioned in the same way on both the operator and drive side! In doing
so, the tensioning screws should only be moved in small steps of approximately a quarter turn. Re-
tighten counternuts afterwards.
FIG. 41
Â The retracting belt is driven by the drum motor in the driving drum. In order to adjust the belt run,
the deflection roller (22) is to be shifted by means of the tensioning screw (23), thrust piece and
counternut (24). Re-tighten counternuts afterwards.

Tel.: +43 316.6901.0, Fax: +43 316.6901.115 Edition 05/2009
If the belt runs off in one direction, the screw must always be tightened in the direction towards which
the belt runs off.
Â The retracting belt is tensioned by shifting the tensioning roller (fig. 41 / pos. 19) by means of the
tensioning screw (fig. 41 / pos. 20), thrust piece and counternuts (fig. 41 / pos. 21).
The belt must always be tensioned in the same way on both the operator and drive side! In doing so,
the tensioning screws should only be moved in small steps of approximately a quarter turn. Re-tighten
counternuts afterwards.
Note: The run of a belt can be impaired by soiled deflection or drive rollers or if the
belt itself is dirty. For this reason, these settings should only be undertaken when the
equipment is clean.
All of the shafts and axles must be aligned in parallel to each other in order to ensure
correct belt run. The table may not be allowed to run at an angle.
Additional information: FIG. 42

The retracting motor (fig. 40 / pos. 9) is a
three phase motor which is equipped with a
brake. The motor is equipped with a
separate ventilator.
Â Approximately every 3,000 operating
hours, the brake of the retracting motor
must be checked and the air gap ad-
justed to 0.35 mm.
Due to wear of the friction linings (35) the
air gap between coil holder (12) and
armature (25) will be extended. It is
12 - Coil holder with coil
necessary to check and readjust the air gap 13 - Fixing screws (3 pcs.) with washers
"a" in certain intervals resp. to replace the 25 - Armature disc
rotor (35). 26 - Sleeve screws
35 - Brake-disc (rotor) with friction linings
Adjustment of the brake air gap:
First of all the three fixing screws (13) must
be unscrewed a half turn. Now the sleeve
screws (26) can be screwed into the
magnet case (12) by turning counter-
clockwise.
By turning the three fixing screws (13)
clockwise, the magnet case (12) can be
moved in direction to the armature disc
(25), as long until the nominal air gap is
obtained. Now the three sleeve screws
should be unscrewed clockwise from the
magnet case (12) and the fixing screws (13)
re-tightened.
Please check the air gap with a feeler
gauge, if it is symmetrical and readjust it if
necessary.

Tel.: +43 316.6901.0, Fax: +43 316.6901.115 Edition 05/2009
7.7.2 RESTARTING THE RETRACTING UNIT AFTER AN

EMERGENCY STOP
Danger: Ensure that nobody is staying in the retracting area of the retracting unit.
Danger of injury.
■ Pull out EMERGENCY OFF switch.
■ Switch on the control voltage on the plant control panel.
■ Use the Start button to turn on the machine.
Danger: The interrupted retracting process is immediately continued upon restarting

the retracting unit after an emergency stop. Therefore, it is strictly forbidden to stay in
the area marked with the sign illustrated below. Several warning signs serve to warn of
the injury risks associated with this area!
FIG. 43

Tel.: +43 316.6901.0, Fax: +43 316.6901.115 Edition 05/2009
8 INITIATION
Danger: The machine may only be installed and assembled by technical ex-
The transportation and erection as well as commissioning of the machine is
undertaken by König Maschinen GmbH engineers or under their supervision!
Danger: All work on the control systems, the switching cabinet and on the elec-
trical parts of the machine may only be undertaken by an authorised specialist
electrician - e.g. an industrial electrician - or a trained electrotechnical engineer
(refer to chapter 2.3.2)!
1) Make sure that the floor is level (see Chapter 5.3 "Installation of the machine").
2) Check that the head machine (Rex Automat) has been set up and mounted properly and
that the accessories have been assembled correctly and completely.
3) Clean the machine from any soiling which has occurred in transit. See chapter 11.1.
4) Check whether or not your mains supply corresponds to the values indicated on the type
plate (chapter 3.4) in terms of the voltage and frequency.
See Chapter 17 "Electrical documentation" for instructions on connecting the machine to
the Rex Automat and to the local power supply.
5) Check that the electrical connection of the head machine to the prover complies with the
specifications in Chapter 17 (Circuit diagram).
After connecting the machine to the main electrical supply, ensure that:
6) Before the prover is started for the first time, a visual check should be made that the
swings chain has not sprung from the guide rails during transport and that none of the
swings has fallen out of the chain.
7) Make certain that no parts have been left on the belts.
8) The adjustments to be made of the individual plant components for the respective prod-
uct are described in Chapter 10 "Production processes".
9) The motor fuses and motor protecting switches must be switched to position "I" (ON).
10) All frequency converters must be ready for operation.

Tel.: +43 316.6901.0, Fax: +43 316.6901.115 Edition 05/2009
Procedure to start operation:
11) Switch on the prover at the main switch (fig. 6 / pos. 7).
12) Slide baking sheet (baking tray) into the designated drawer of the retracting unit. See
also Chapter 7.7.
13) It must be ensured that no persons remain within the designated danger zones of the
plant.
14) All protective covers, sliding windows and doors must be closed.
15) All EMERGENCY OFF switches must be in the pulled-out position.
16) Switch the plant to asynchronous operation by means of the control panel on the prover.
See also Chapter 7.1 "Plant Control and Operating Modes".
It is advisable to make absolutely certain that head machine and prover are set to
"asynchronous operation" for the initial tests.
17) Switch on the control voltage (fig. 6 / pos. 4).
18) When no error messages appear on the control panel the prover can be switched on with
the Start button (fig. 6 / pos. 3).
19) Once the plant is running, the head machine initial start-up can be undertaken according
to the “initial start-up” chapter of the operating instructions for the Rex machine.
Note: Before starting the machine read chapter 15 "Visual display operation"
and make yourself familiar with the several functions and adjusting parameters.

Tel.: +43 316.6901.0, Fax: +43 316.6901.115 Edition 05/2009
9 FURTHER OPERATION
9.1 DAILY START-UP
■ Proceed as described in Chapter 8, point 11) to 18)!
■ During regular machine operation make sure the duster (fig. 19, fig. 33) is re-filled and ob-
serve the control panel for malfunctions.
■ Comply with the daily cleaning instructions. (See chapter 11.1 "Cleaning", as well as chap-
ter "Cleaning" in the operating manual for the Rex Automat).
■ Check the run of the transport belts (discharge belts, convoluting belt, bottom belt,
top belt, intermediate belt). If necessary, tension the belts and remove any soiling from
the drive and deflection rollers.
Attention: The safety functions must be checked every day!
9.2 SWITCHING THE MACHINE ON / OFF
The machine is switched on and off by means of the master switch.
When the master switch is positioned to "0" (= OFF) = the machine is separated from the
mains.
When the master switch is positioned to "I" (= ON) = the machine is operational.
9.3 STARTING/ STOPPING THE MACHINE
Normal switching on / off by means of one of the green Start buttons "I" (e.g. fig. 6 / pos. 3)
and one of the red Stop buttons "O" (e.g. fig. 6 / pos. 2). This results in the stamping station
coming to a stop in a defined position (see Chapter 7.5.3 "Tool changing").
Danger: The red EMERGENCY OFF switch (fig. 6 / pos. 1) is to be used only
in cases of emergency and stops the entire plant.

Tel.: +43 316.6901.0, Fax: +43 316.6901.115 Edition 05/2009
9.4 PREPARATIONS FOR SPECIFIC TYPES OF OP-

ERATION
9.4.1 MEASURES BEFORE A LONGER SHUT-DOWN PE-

RIOD
■ Isolate the machine from the mains power supply (pull the plug).
■ Clean machine completely (as described in Chapter 11.1 "Cleaning")
■ Lubricate the machine (see Chapter 11.2 "Inspection / Maintenance / Lubrication")
■ Protect the machine from environmental influences.
9.4.2 START-UP AFTER A LONGER SHUT-DOWN PE-

RIOD
■ Clean machine (as described in Chapter 11.1 "Cleaning")
■ Oil sliding parts.
■ Check the transport belts
■ Connect machine to mains power supply.
■ Check the direction of rotation (see Chapter 12.2.5 "Directions of Rotation")
■ Test safety functions.
9.5 INADMISSIBLE TYPES OF OPERATION
The plant is intended exclusively for the kind of use described in Chapter 6.1, i.e. the proc-
essing of food doughs.
Danger:
■ It is forbidden to touch moving or rotating parts!

■ The plant must be operated only on a level, horizontal floor (danger of tip-
ping)!
■ To ensure your safety use only spare parts manufactured by KÖNIG.
■ The machine must not be used to process doughs that contain objects such
as pieces of metal, stones and other hard objects.

Tel.: +43 316.6901.0, Fax: +43 316.6901.115 Edition 05/2009
■ The plant is not suitable for processing dangerous substances, which are
designated as impurities.
■ The prover plant may only be operated if all doors, caps and sliding windows
are shut and all protective panels and covers are fitted!
■ For your own safety it is strictly forbidden to remove or switch off safety de-
vices!
■ The number of strokes per hour must not be modified.
Danger: In the event of defect or faulty safety devices, the machine must be
immediately disconnected from the mains supply and must not be put back into
operation before the respective faults or defects have been eliminated and a
safety check has been performed.
9.6 EMERGENCY SITUATION
In an emergency the plant must be stopped immediately by pressing the EMERGENCY OFF
switch on the control panel of the head machine (fig. 6 / pos. 1) or the control panel of the
prover (fig. 5 / pos. 1).
Danger: Therefore it must be ensured that all EMERGENCY-OFF buttons are

as easily and quickly accessible as possible.
9.7 RISKS / DANGERS
9.7.1 DANGERS DUE TO MECHANICAL COMPONENTS
Attention: In the course of machine modification and maintenance work,

heavy components may cause injuries of the feet when dropped. The same
applies for stamping tools if these are removed improperly. Therefore, the op-
erating personnel must be instructed of the applicable provisions in terms of
labour safety and accident prevention and compelled, if required, to wear ade-
quate protective gear (e.g. safety shoes).

Tel.: +43 316.6901.0, Fax: +43 316.6901.115 Edition 05/2009
9.7.2 DANGERS DUE TO ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
Danger: In machines with frequency converters, these converters may carry

current even some time after switching off. This applies both for the prover and
for the Rex Automat.
Please refer to the corresponding manufacturer's documentation (chapter
17 "Electrical documentation")!
9.7.3 DANGERS DUE TO UV LIGHT
Danger: Looking straight at the UV cold cathode tubes may cause eye injuries.
For this reason, never look directly into the UV light (see chapter 7.4.3
"Sterilization")!
9.7.4 DANGERS DUE TO LASER SENSOR
Attention: The fitted laser sensor(s) use(s) a Class 1 laser as its (their) light
source (wavelength 685 nm).
For reasons of safety the laser sensor must never be removed or dismantled
since this could result in the emission of dangerous radiation. Warning notices
on the sensor draw attention to this hazard. The laser sensor must not be used
in connection with optical instruments since this would increase the risk of eye
injuries. Never look directly into the laser beam!
9.7.5 DANGERS SUCH AS STEAM, SMOKE AND DUST
Danger: Due to the requirements arising in connection with the processing of

dough, it may be necessary to use flour dusters. Therefore, airborne flour dust
must be expected in the vicinity of the machine.
However, this flour dust is to be kept as low as possible! You will find detailed
information in chapter 11.1 "Cleaning".

Tel.: +43 316.6901.0, Fax: +43 316.6901.115 Edition 05/2009
9.7.6 DANGERS DUE TO THERMAL INFLUENCES
Danger: These risks exist on all of the motors.

Therefore never touch the motors!
Danger: Option prover climate: see Chapter 7.4.1

Such dangers may arise in the area of the water tank (fig. 12 / pos. 3) of the
evaporator*.
Therefore, never touch the water tank before it has cooled down, the same ap-
plies to the heating elements* (fig. 13 / pos. 2) and the heater* of the swings
drying (fig. 12) (*option)!
Danger: The following applies in order to comply with the required level of ex-
plosion prevention:
■ Baking sheets and carriages must be kept free of dust!
■ Sources of ignition are to be avoided!
9.7.7 DANGERS DUE TO NON-PERFORMANCE OF HY-

GIENIC MEASURES
Such dangers can only arise if the cleaning procedures described in Chapter 11.1 "Cleaning"
are not carried out.
Always keep in mind the damage that may be caused in the food processing industry by mi-
cro-organisms due to insufficient hygienic conditions.

Tel.: +43 316.6901.0, Fax: +43 316.6901.115 Edition 05/2009
10 PRODUCTION PROCESSES
10.1 PRODUCTION OF STAMPED DOUGH PIECES
Only possible with plant version including stamping station (KCL 1, KCL 2, KCL 7, KCL 8,
KCL 9, KCL 10, KCL 11, KCL 12, KCL 17, KCL 18, KCL 19, KCL 20).
Head machine Rex Automat:

■ Depending on the type of product, switch off rows as necessary at the Rex Automat head
machine (3, 4, 5 or 6 row operation) and adjust the spreading finger belt.
Pre-long roller and forming station (or convoluting station):

■ For round products, set the pressure board of the pre-long roller as well as the pre-
pressure roller, sheeter roller and upper belt rollers on the forming station to the uppermost
position, in order that the pieces of dough can be transported through underneath. Switch
off the upper belt.
■ For the production of long-rolled products (indented long rolls) the pressure board of the
pre-long roller must be lowered into the required position.
Place the pre-pressure roller, sheeter roller and upper belt of the forming station to the up-
permost position, in order that the pieces of dough can be transported through underneath.
Switch off the upper belt.
■ During the production of round dough pieces, the timed roller must be raised and switched
off and the transfer roller must be fitted. For long-rolled or convoluted dough pieces the
transfer roller must be removed and the timed roller lowered and switched on (at the con-
trol panel).
Stamping station:
■ Insert stamping tool and, if required, pre-presser (see also Chapter 7.5.3 "Stamping head -
tool changing"). Select corresponding stamper cup.
The stamper cups must correspond with the inserted tool, i.e.: Round cups with
stamping tool for round products (stamped products) or elongated cups with
stamping tools for long rolls (cut rolls).
Attention: Before every start-up, a check must be carried out as to whether

the stamping or cutting tool is locked.
■ Insert the sieve corresponding to the stamping tool used into the duster; check the quantity
of flour.

Tel.: +43 316.6901.0, Fax: +43 316.6901.115 Edition 05/2009
Plant:
■ Make any necessary adjustments - e.g. weight, rounding speed, stroke number, quantity of
flour, setting parameters, etc. - at the head machine and at the control panel of the prover.
■ Switch the plant to asynchronous operation. At this point (and not before), the dough can
be thrown into the hopper of the head machine. Then switch on the Rex Automat.
When the first dough pieces arrive (it may be necessary to take the first few rows from the
belt by hand and throw them back into the hopper), check whether they have the required
weight and other values. If not, the settings must be altered accordingly.
Make sure that up to now all dough pieces have been taken by hand from the spreading
finger belt of the Rex Automat and have not fallen onto the lower belt of the pre-long roller!
■ At the control panel, switch to synchronous operation and start the plant.
Check that the dough pieces are placed exactly in the middle of the swings with the seam
downwards.
The speed of the plant can be adjusted by altering the number of strokes on the control
panel of the prover.
■ Remain at the plant and refill it with dough at regular intervals.
■ When the first pieces of dough reach the stamping station, the laser sensor on the dis-
charge belt automatically switches the duster on. Observe the stamping process. Correct
the quantity of flour if necessary.
Retracting unit:
■ Observe the transfer of the dough pieces onto the setting or retracting unit. Set an even
dough transfer by adjusting the depositing parameters (on the control panel).

Tel.: +43 316.6901.0, Fax: +43 316.6901.115 Edition 05/2009
10.2 PRODUCTION OF FLAT PRESSED, UNSTAMPED

DOUGH PIECES (E.G. HAMBURGER BUNS)
Only possible with plant version including forming station (KCL 3 to KCL 10 and KCL 13 to
20).

■ For the production of large hamburgers (up to diam. 150 mm), two rows must be switched
off at the head machine (3 or 4-row operation) and the spreading finger belt must be ad-
justed accordingly.
Pre-long roller:
■ Raise the pressure board of the pre-long roller so that the dough pieces can be conveyed
beneath it.
Stamping station:
■ Remove stamping tool (see also Chapter 7.5.3 "Stamping Head - Tool Replacement"). Set
the stamper cups for continuous cup operation.
■ Insert the corresponding sieve into the duster. If production continues for a long time it
may be necessary to switch on the duster so that the dough pieces are floured slightly be-
fore they run through the forming station; set the quantity of flour very low.
Forming station (or convoluting station):

■ Lower the pre-pressure roller, sheeter roller and upper belt and move to the desired posi-
tion: According to the desired height of the dough pieces.
The pressure roller should not be set too flat, otherwise dough pieces may adhere to the
roller!
■ At the control panel, match the speed and running direction of the upper belt with the
speed of the lower belt.
■ During the production of round dough pieces, the timed roller must be raised and switched
off and the transfer roller must be fitted.
Plant:

Tel.: +43 316.6901.0, Fax: +43 316.6901.115 Edition 05/2009
downwards.
■ Observe the dough pieces after they have run through the forming station to see if they are
distorted; adjust the speed or height of the upper belt if necessary.
Retracting unit:
10.3 PRODUCTION OF LONG-ROLLED, UNSTAMPED

DOUGH PIECES
Only possible with plant version including forming station (KCL 3 to KCL 10 and KCL 13 to
20).

■ Depending on the type of product, switch off rows as necessary at the Rex Automat head
machine (3, 4, or 5-row operation) and adjust the spreading finger belt.
Pre-long roller:
■ Lower the pressure board of the pre-long roller to the desired position and fix in place.
Stamping station:
■ Remove stamping tool and pre-presser (see also Chapter 7.5.3 "Stamping head - tool
changing"). Set the stamper cups for continuous cup operation.
■ Insert the corresponding sieve into the duster, check flour quantity.

Tel.: +43 316.6901.0, Fax: +43 316.6901.115 Edition 05/2009
Forming station:
tion: according to the desired length of the dough pieces.
■ Set the speed of the upper belt to a high level at the control panel.
■ Insert the corresponding sieve into the duster, check flour quantity.
■ For long-rolled dough pieces, the transfer roller must be removed and the timed roller low-
ered and switched on (at the control panel).
Plant:
downwards.
■ Observe the dough pieces coming from the forming station. Correct the settings if neces-
sary.
Retracting unit:

Tel.: +43 316.6901.0, Fax: +43 316.6901.115 Edition 05/2009
10.4 MANUFACTURE OF CROISSANTS
Only possible with plant version including convoluting station (KCL 5, KCL 6, KCL 9, KCL 10,
KCL 15, KCL 16, KCL 19, KCL 20).

■ Switch off the two outside rows of the Rex Automat (3 or 4-row operation).
Pre-long roller:
■ Raise the pressure board of the pre-long roller so that the dough pieces can be conveyed
beneath it.
Stamping station:
■ Remove stamping tool (see also Chapter 7.5.3 "Stamping Head - Tool Replacement"). Set
the stamper cups for continuous cup operation.
■ Push the sieve with round openings into the duster. Check the quantity of flour.
Convoluting Unit:
tion: According to the desired height of the dough pieces.
The pressure roller should not be set too flat, otherwise dough pieces may adhere to the
roller!
■ Hook in the convoluting belt, convoluting boards or chain belts and adjust according to the
dough height.
■ At the control panel, match the speed and running direction of the upper belt with the
speed of the lower belt.
■ For long-rolled dough pieces, the transfer roller must be removed and the timed roller low-
ered and switched on (at the control panel).
Plant:

Tel.: +43 316.6901.0, Fax: +43 316.6901.115 Edition 05/2009
downwards.
■ Observe the dough pieces coming from the forming station. Correct the settings if neces-
sary.
Retracting unit:

Tel.: +43 316.6901.0, Fax: +43 316.6901.115 Edition 05/2009
11 CLEANING / MAINTENANCE /
LUBRICATION
Danger: The machine may only be cleaned, inspected, maintained and lubri-
cated by qualified personnel, (refer to chapter 2.3.2) under maintenance of all
safety regulations.
Danger: Cleaning, inspection, maintenance and lubrication of the machine

must be undertaken when the machine is disconnected from the mains supply.
This means the machine is to be isolated from the mains by pulling out the
mains plug.
Danger: The machine must not be reconnected to the power supply until all
protective panels and covers have been refitted.
11.1 CLEANING
The cleaning procedure for the Rex Automat is described in the chapter "Cleaning" in the op-
erating manual for the head machine.
Danger: The use of compressed air for cleaning and drying is prohibited!
Accumulations of flour are to be avoided and must be vacuumed up IMMEDI-
ATELY!
Danger: The use of high-pressure cleaning equipment is prohibited.
Note: Do not use water for cleaning belts! Exception: synthetic belts!
Do not use pointed or hard implements for cleaning!
Only warm water with cleaning agent must be used. Damp, dirty belts can lead
to the formation of bacteria and mould!
Please also refer to chapter 11.3 "Cleaning and maintenance schedule".

Tel.: +43 316.6901.0, Fax: +43 316.6901.115 Edition 05/2009
Recommended or allowed cleaners:

— Commercially available washing-up liquid
— Cleaning agents containing vinegar
— Glass cleaner
Follow the manufacturer’s instructions on the cleaning agent packaging.
11.1.1 DAILY CLEANING

■ Empty all flour collecting trays (e.g. fig. 50 / pos. 1) as well as the collecting drawers under
the forming station and under the stamping station (fig. 21 / pos. 5) and clean with a damp
disposable cloth soaked in cleaning agent.
Open the sliding windows at the stamping station and in front of the swings in order for the
swings to dry more quickly.
■ Vacuum off impurities and flour deposits from the belts (fig. 8 / pos. 2, fig. 15 / pos. 1, fig.
23 / pos. 1). Never use a metal scraper! Also free the belt drive rollers and the tensioning
rollers from residues of flour and dough.
■ Vacuum off the pressure board (fig. 8 / pos. 3) on the pre-long roller. Inspect the felt belt of
the pressure board for wear and replace if necessary.
■ Vacuum off the transfer device* (*accessory) (fig. 8 / pos. 8) and centring rollers*
(*accessories) (fig. 9 / pos. 1), clean with a damp cloth and wipe dry.
Note: To clean the displace unit and the centring rollers do not use any
sharp or hard objects! This could result in destruction of the synthetic mate-
rial or of the dough-repellent coating!
■ Use a brush to remove residues of dough from the hollows of the swings (fig. 11 / pos. 11)
and stamper cups (fig. 17 / pos. 1).
■ Clean the laser sensor (fig. 15 / pos. 3) above the discharge belt.
■ Check the duster (fig. 19, fig. 33 / pos. 1): If there are impurities, e.g. residues of dough
(even very small pieces) the flour must be renewed. Refill the dusters with new, clean flour
(no left-over flour).
■ Remove used stamping tools and clean with a damp cloth. See also Chapter 7.5.3.1.
■ Clean the knives of the cutting unit (*accessory) (fig. 22) after every use.
Attention: Handle the cutting unit very carefully since the knives can cause
serious injury.

Tel.: +43 316.6901.0, Fax: +43 316.6901.115 Edition 05/2009
■ Remove the transfer flap from the stamping station (fig. 24 / pos. 2), clean with a damp
cloth and wipe dry. Note the transfer flap is heavy! Clean the scraper ledge, check for
damage and replace if necessary, see chap. 7.5.6.1 "Installing / removing the transfer flap
and scraper ledge".
Note: No sharp or hard tools may be used in order to clean the transfer flap!
This could cause the dough resistant coating to be damaged!
■ Vacuum off impurities and flour deposits from the pre-pressure roller on the convoluting
station* (*option) (fig. 26 / pos. 2). Perfect function is possible only with clean double roll-
ers and clean, undamaged scrapers.
Carefully free sheeter rollers (fig. 26 / pos. 3) from residues of flour and dough using a
brush or plastic scraper. Wipe with a clean, damp cloth and rub dry. Never use a metal
scraper!
Free scrapers (fig. 26 / pos. 4 and 7) from any adhering residues of dough, inspect for
damage and replace if necessary; see also Chapter 7.6.1.1.
■ Check convoluting belt* (*accessory) (fig. 26 / pos. 5) for wear and replace if necessary,
see also chapter 7.6.1.2.
Residues of dough can be scraped off using a plastic spatula. Cleaning with pointed or
sharp objects may result in damage to the felt belt!
■ Vacuum off the convoluting plate* (*accessory) (fig. 29) after every use. Check the cloth
for wear and exchange if necessary, see also chapter 7.6.1.3.
■ Unhook and clean chain belts* (*accessory) (fig. 34 / pos. 3) after every use.
■ Clean the pre-pressure roller on the forming station* (*option) (fig. 30 / pos. 9) with a damp
cloth and wipe dry.
Remove the scraper from the pre-pressure roller* (*option) (fig. 32 / pos. 2), clean with a
damp cloth and wipe dry, see chapter 7.6.2.2.
Note: Do not use sharp or hard tools in order to clean the pre-pressure roller
and the scraper! Doing so could cause the plastic dough-resistant coating to
be damaged!
■ Vacuum off impurities and flour deposits from the upper and lower belts (fig. 30 / pos. 1
and 2). Never use a metal scraper!
Also free the belt drive rollers and the tensioning rollers from residues of flour and dough.
■ Remove and vacuum off the pressure board* (*accessory) (fig. 35), check for wear, see
chapter 7.6.5.1.
■ Remove used "guides"* (*accessory) (fig. 36), clean with a damp cloth and wipe dry.
Note the weight of the guide!

Tel.: +43 316.6901.0, Fax: +43 316.6901.115 Edition 05/2009
Note: No sharp or hard tools may be used in order to clean the guides! This
could cause the dough resistant coating to be damaged!
■ Vacuum off the timed roller (fig. 37 / pos. 1) and transfer roller (fig. 30 / pos. 7). Remove
transfer roller (fig. 37 / pos. 4), clean with a damp cloth and rub dry; see Chapter 7.6.7.1.
■ Carefully remove soiling and flour deposits from the intermediate belt (fig. 30 / pos. 5) us-
ing a plastic scraper. Never use a metal scraper! Clean belt with a damp cloth and wipe
dry.
■ Carefully clean the laser sensor (fig. 38 / pos. 6) of the retracting belt with a soft cloth.
Clean sensor for tray control (fig. 39 / pos. 10).
■ Carefully remove soiling and flour deposits from the retracting belt (fig. 38) using a plastic
scraper. Never use a metal scraper! Clean belt with a damp cloth and wipe dry.
■ Free baking tray supports and retracting drawers (fig. 39 / pos. 27, fig. 40 / pos. 25) from
residual flour and dough, clean with a damp cloth and wipe dry.
11.1.2 WEEKLY / MONTHLY CLEANING
■ Clean the plant as described in Chapter 11.1.1 "Daily Cleaning".
■ Use a vacuum cleaner to remove the flour that has collected around the stamping station
near the duster.
■ Option prover climate:

Clean the fans (fig. 12 / pos. 4 and 5) and heating elements (fig. 12 / pos. 2) with a vac-
uum cleaner on a weekly basis. Danger of burning!
Remove the water tank of the evaporator (fig. 12 / pos. 3) monthly, empty it and check for
calcification. Therefore the butterfly nuts must be loosened!
Attention: Do not remove the water tank before it has cooled down!
■ Clean the swing drying fans (fig. 13) with a vacuum cleaner on a weekly basis. Atten-
tion: risk of burning on heating element!
■ Dust off the UV cold-cathode tubes in the sterilisation unit (fig. 14) on a monthly basis. Re-
place the UV cold cathode tubes at the latest after 10,000 operating hours (order number
E628.20473).

Tel.: +43 316.6901.0, Fax: +43 316.6901.115 Edition 05/2009
■ Clean the outside panelling of the entire plant using a moist cloth soaked in cleaning
agent. Use cleaning agent containing vinegar for persistent spots. Take special care not to
use abrasive or aggressive materials to clean the plastic windows.
After cleaning, these surfaces, and the belts, rollers, swings, stamper cups and collecting
drawers must be sprayed with disinfectant. The machine must then not be used again
for a period of 24 hours.
Recommended disinfectants:
∗ BROMOSEPT: Dilution 1:0.025

∗ DOMESTOS: Dilution 1:0.05.
11.1.3 SIX-MONTHLY / ANNUAL CLEANING
PLEASE KEEP IN MIND: Regular cleaning of the machine will facilitate your work, ensure
faultless functioning and increase the service life of your machine!!
■ Patches of mould in the felt or linen coatings of the stamper cups and swings should be
cleaned using a cleaning agent approved specifically for this (e.g. RENOSAN or bleach
obtainable in a pharmacy).
Before any major use of such an agent, test it first on a single swing/stamper cup.
Make sure that this cleaning agent only comes into contact with the felt or linen coating
and immediately wipe with a damp disposable cloth any surfaces unintentionally coming
into contact with the cleaning agent. During regular cleaning, rubbing into the swings and
the stamper cups with a paint brush is generally sufficient and can be done while the
swings are in place.
In order to avoid the dough pieces adhering to the damp swings/stamper cups, the plant
may not be used again with dough until all the swings/stamper cups are completely dry.
Observe the necessary drying times.
Take careful note of the "Instructions for Use" and "Product Information" for the cleaning
agents used.
■ The entire inside of the prover must be thoroughly cleaned.

First switch off the plant at the main switch (fig. 6 / pos. 7) and pull out the plug. Residues
of flour can be removed from the plant using a vacuum cleaner. Do not use compressed
air.

Tel.: +43 316.6901.0, Fax: +43 316.6901.115 Edition 05/2009
11.2 INSPECTION / MAINTENANCE / LUBRICATION
Danger: The machine may only be inspected, maintained and lubricated by

qualified personnel, (refer to chapter 2.3.2) under maintenance of all safety
regulations.
Danger: The protective devices must be checked every day before commenc-
ing production. Alterations to the protective devices may not be carried
out without the manufacturer's agreement.
Note: All motors and gears are to be maintained in accordance with the manu-
facturer's specifications!
Please also refer to chapter 11.3 "Cleaning and maintenance schedule".
11.2.1 DAILY / WEEKLY
■ Daily check belt tension and belt run, if necessary, readjust.
■ Empty and clean the dusters weekly.
11.2.2 MONTHLY
■ Replace the round belts driving the timed roller and the transfer roller (fig. 30, fig. 37
/ pos.11 ):
Inspect the round belts for wear and replace if necessary.
When fitting the new round belts be sure to insert them correctly, otherwise the rollers may
rotate in the wrong direction!
■ Check the tension of all the chains and tighten if necessary. If the chain tensioners have
reached the limit of their range the chains must be replaced.
Note that the swings chain and the chain for the stamper unit may only be tightened at
the chain tensioners intended specifically for them (see Chapter 12.2.6 and 12.2.2).

Tel.: +43 316.6901.0, Fax: +43 316.6901.115 Edition 05/2009
Cam tensioner (fig. 44) for drive chains: loosen the fastening screw and turn the journal of
the shaft to achieve the required tension. Then retighten the screw.
FIG. 44
■ All chains, especially the swings chain (fig. 11 / pos. 10), must be freed of adhering resi-
dues of flour.
Recommended cleaners: AQATEX 2:1 - solution or

spot remover containing petroleum
spirit
Danger: Gloves must be worn during cleaning.
Subsequently, the swings chain and the drive chains are to be relubricated with a lightly
oiled rag.
Note: Use only food grade, resin free oil.
Finally, wipe off surplus oil with a cloth.
Note: The chain of the stamping unit is maintenance free - please do

not lubricate!
■ Lubricate the guides on the retracting table and deflection roller.
■ Check the retracting belt and strap for wear on a monthly basis and check the belt tension
and strap tension, see chapter 7.7.1.
■ Every 3,000 operating hours, the brake of the retracting motor must be checked and the
air gap adjusted to 0.35 mm. Observe the information in chapter 7.7.1.

Tel.: +43 316.6901.0, Fax: +43 316.6901.115 Edition 05/2009
■ Compressed air maintenance unit*: (*accessory)
(* is only mounted when a displace unit or cutting equipment is fitted!)

Check compressed air connection (1, 8).
The pressure regulator (2, 9) must be set to 3-6 bar (see manometer (3, 10)).
Check the filter element (4, 11) on the pressure regulator and exchange if soiled. Do the
same for the filter elements (6).
The moisture trap is to be emptied by means of the screw (5, 7, 12) at the latest when the
maximum marking has been reached.
FIG. 45
Compressed air maintenance unit Compressed air maintenance unit
for displace unit* (*accessory) for cutting equipment* (*accessory)
■ Lubricating the gearing:
Note: observe manufacturer's information,

see chapter 11.2.4 "Gear motors manufactured by "WATT"".
11.2.3 SIX-MONTHLY
■ Perform monthly maintenance as described in Chapter 11.2.2.

Tel.: +43 316.6901.0, Fax: +43 316.6901.115 Edition 05/2009
■ The Maltese cross (fig. 46 / pos. 1) and the cam roller must be lubricated at the grease
nipple (fig. 46 / pos. 2) using commercially available roller bearing grease (Lubricant:
Roller or plain bearing grease in NLGI 3 (lithium saponified) e.g. Shell Alvania Grease
RL3).
FIG. 46
11.2.4 GEAR MOTORS MANUFACTURED BY "WATT"
The following checks must be carried out on these motors:

■ Every month check the gears for any changes to the noise.
■ Remove dust deposits. Check the temperature of the casing (max. 90°C).
■ Make a visual check of the seals for leaks; if necessary replace the shaft rings.
■ In normal operation the lubricant must be changed after every 10,000 hours of operation,
and by the latest after 5 years. In extreme operating conditions and in high air humidity,
this should be done after 5,000 hours of operation.
The precise quantities of oil are stated on the type plates on the drives.
In no circumstances may different types of lubricant be mixed!
■ A general overhaul must take place every 10 years.
FIG. 47
Spur-gear motor Worm gear motor

Tel.: +43 316.6901.0, Fax: +43 316.6901.115 Edition 05/2009
■ Spur-gear motors:
Gear units (with adapter or input drive shaft – closed design) and gear motors (fig. 47) are
supplied ready for operation and filled with mineral oil at the correct quantity of lubricant for
the its type; this can be seen on the table below.
Filled as standard with gear oil (lubricant oil type identification as per DIN51502 CLP220,
Viscosity class as per ISO VG 220 according to DIN51519) for ambient temperature of -
10°C (14°F) to +40°C (104°F).
■ Worm gear motors:

Gear units (with adapter or input shaft – closed design) and gear motors (fig. 47) are sup-
plied ready for operation, filled with the amount of synthetic lubricant that is correct for the
type, which can be taken from the table below.
Each gear is provided with a type plate, which shows the oil specification.
Synthetic lubricant for helical worm gears at an ambient temperature of -20°C to +60°C
(4°F to 140°F):

Tel.: +43 316.6901.0, Fax: +43 316.6901.115 Edition 05/2009
11.3 CLEANING AND MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
Please refer to the detailed information in chapter 11 "Cleaning / maintenance / lubrication".

Daily Weekly Monthly Annually
INTERVAL (every 10 h*) (every 50 h*) (every 250 h*) (every 3000 h*)
PRE-LONG ROLLER
Lower belt clean, disinfect
check belt run
and belt tension
Pressure board clean, disinfect
check for wear
Accessory displace unit clean disinfect
Centring rollers accessories
Accessory compressed air supply check
Filter element pressure regulator check replace
PROVER AND DISCHARGE BELT
Swings remove residue, disinfect clean
vacuum off
Laser sensor at discharge belt clean
Discharge belt clean, disinfect
check belt run
and belt tension
Prover outside surfaces clean disinfect
Prover frame clean disinfect
Plastic windows, clean disinfect
sliding windows
Swings chain clean,
Drive chains check tension,
lubricate
Swing drying fan clean
UV cold-cathode tubes, clean replace after
sterilization unit 10,000 oper-
ating hours
Option prover climate: clean
Heating element, ventilators
Option prover climate: clean
Water tank, evaporator
STAMPING STATION
Duster empty clean

Tel.: +43 316.6901.0, Fax: +43 316.6901.115 Edition 05/2009

Stamping tools clean disinfect check setting

Pre-presser clean disinfect check
Stamper cups remove residue, disinfect clean,
vacuum off check setting
Discharge belt clean, disinfect
check belt run
and belt tension
Transfer flap clean disinfect
Scraper ledge for transfer flap clean, disinfect replace
check for wear
Stamping station chain clean,
DO NOT LUBRICATE ! check tension
Maltese cross lubricate
Cam roller stamping station lubricate
Drive chains clean,
check tension,
lubricate
Accessory cutting equipment clean cutter disinfect
Accessory compressed air supply check
Filter element pressure regulator check replace
CONVOLUTING UNIT
Prepressure roller clean disinfect
Sheeter roller clean disinfect
Scraper for double rollers clean disinfect replace
Accessory convoluting belt clean, check belt disinfect replace
run and belt ten-
sion,
inspect for wear
Accessory convoluting plate clean, disinfect
check for wear
Accessory chain belt clean disinfect
FORMING STATION
Pre-pressure roller* (*option) clean disinfect
Scraper for pre-pressure roller* remove, clean disinfect replace
(*option)
Accessory chain belt clean disinfect

Tel.: +43 316.6901.0, Fax: +43 316.6901.115 Edition 05/2009

Upper and lower belts, clean, disinfect

intermediate belt check belt run
and belt tension
Accessory guides clean disinfect
Accessory pressure board clean, disinfect
check for wear
Timed roller, transfer roller clean disinfect check round
belts
Transfer roller remove, clean disinfect
Drive chains clean,
check tension,
lubricate
RETRACTING UNIT AB
Flour collecting trays* (*option) empty, clean disinfect
Laser sensor clean disinfect
Retracting belt clean, disinfect check belt ten-
check belt run sion,
check for wear
Baked goods trays and retracting clean disinfect
drawers
Retracting straps check strap
tension,
check for wear
Tray control sensor clean
Brake for retracting motor check
Air gap at brake adjust
Guides lubricate
GENERAL
All flour collecting trays empty clean,
disinfect
All control panels, clean check condition
Adjusting levers of the braces
Rollers on round belt drives check
All spur gear motors and all worm vacuum, check For oil
gear motors manufactured by for change in change, see
"Watt" noise and for section
emerging oil 11.2.4
*h = plant operating hours

Tel.: +43 316.6901.0, Fax: +43 316.6901.115 Edition 05/2009
12 COMBI-LINE STANDARD SETTINGS
Danger: These adjustments to be performed by qualified personnel and / or

technical experts only, (refer to chapter 2.3.2) under maintenance of all safety
regulations!
12.1 STANDARD SETTING REX AUTOMAT
The basic set-up of the Rex Automat head machine is described in the chapter "Standard
Settings" of the separate operating manual.
12.2 BASIC SETTINGS FOR THE PLANT COMPONENTS
DURING ADJUSTMENT WORK AND BEFORE THE TEST RUN, ALWAYS CHECK TO
MAKE SURE THAT NO TOOLS OR OTHER OBJECTS ARE LYING ON THE BELTS.
# For adjustment tasks the drive chain and the swings chain can be moved with the hand
crank (fig. 48 / pos. 6), which is inserted at the transmission shaft (fig. 21 / pos. 1) on the
operator side.
Always turn the hand crank clockwise since otherwise the swings may jam.
FIG. 48

Tel.: +43 316.6901.0, Fax: +43 316.6901.115 Edition 05/2009
12.2.1 ADJUSTING THE SWING POSITION

# When the stamping head is at top dead centre (fig. 49 / pos. 20), the bolt of the swing
(fig. 49 / pos. 1) must be exactly visible through the hole in the side panel (fig. 53 / pos.
2). The setting can be altered by re-hanging the chain (fig. 53 / pos. 23).
FIG. 49
12.2.2 TENSIONING THE SWINGS CHAIN

Â Tensioning the swings chain if it is slack is done by readjusting the chain tensioner (fig.
50 / pos. 4) by means of tensioning screws (fig. 50 / pos. 3), thrust pieces and counter-
nuts. When doing this, the tensioning screws on the drive side and the operator side
must always be adjusted by the same distance! The counternuts must then be retight-
ened.
If a chain tensioner is at its position of maximum adjustment the chain can be shortened. (If
so, note the distribution of the swings - 2 links.)
FIG. 50

Tel.: +43 316.6901.0, Fax: +43 316.6901.115 Edition 05/2009
12.2.3 SWING REMOVAL / INSERTION
After opening the sliding window on the operator side of the prover the swings (fig. 51 /
pos. 1) can be removed or hung in. When doing this pull the swings chain (fig. 51 / pos.
2) gently outwards.
During removal, it is essential that some of the original swings remain installed in the plant.
This will make it easy to hang the swings back in the second next hole of the swings chain
(fig. 51 / pos. 2). Otherwise look for the stop bolt of the chain, the first swing must then be
inserted into the first next hole of the bolt. Insert the other swings then into the 2nd next hole
each.
When hanging in, make sure that the side of the swing with the guide nose (fig. 51 / pos. 3)
always faces towards the front of the machine (operator side).
FIG. 51
Attention: Swings must never

be removed or installed while the
plant is running!
12.2.4 STANDARD SETTING OF THE BELTS
Â The belts are adjusted as described in Chapters 7.3.3, 7.4.4.1 and 7.5.5.1, 7.6.1.2,
7.6.2.1 and 7.7.1 "Belt run adjustment / belt tension". Before adjusting, always make sure
that the belts and the drive and tensioning rollers are clean.

Tel.: +43 316.6901.0, Fax: +43 316.6901.115 Edition 05/2009
12.2.5 DIRECTIONS OF ROTATION

The main drive is rotating in the right direction if the stamper cups (fig. 17 / pos. 1) move to-
wards the retracting and the lower belt itself runs in the direction such that the dough pieces
are conveyed away from the stamping station / prover.
# The lower belt of the pre-long roller (fig. 8 / pos. 2) must run towards the prover. If neces-
sary the correct direction of rotation can be achieved by switching phases.
Depending on the product, the upper belt of the forming station can run in two directions: with
or opposed to the lower belt. The setting is made by selecting the direction of rotation of the
drive motor at the control panel.
12.2.6 TENSIONING THE STAMPING UNIT CHAIN

Â The stamping unit chain (fig. 52 / pos. 1) is tightened by repositioning the tensioning roll-
ers (fig. 52 / pos. 2) using tensioning screws (fig. 52 / pos. 4) and counternuts (fig. 52 /
pos. 3). When doing this, the tensioning screws on the drive side and the operator side
must always be adjusted by the same distance! The counternuts must then be retight-
ened.
FIG. 52
12.2.7 STANDARD SETTING OF THE STAMPING HEAD

# The standard setting of the stamping unit, i.e. the upper position of the stamping head
(fig. 53 / pos. 6), is adjusted at the drive sprocket (fig. 53 / pos. 1) and at the transmission
shaft (fig. 53 / pos. 2).
# In order to make certain that next time the plant stops the stamping head comes to rest in
the highest position, an Allen screw (fig. 53 / pos. 3) must be screwed into one of the 20
threaded holes in the drive sprocket (fig. 53 / pos. 1) in order to actuate the proximity
switch (fig. 53 / pos. 4). The position of the screw is detected by the proximity switch.
Tighten the screw in this position and test for proper functioning.

Tel.: +43 316.6901.0, Fax: +43 316.6901.115 Edition 05/2009
12.2.8 ADJUSTING THE POSITION OF THE STAMPER

CUPS
FIG. 53
1) The centre of the stamper cups (fig. 53 / pos. B) must lie on the vertical centre line of the
stamping head (fig. 53 / pos. A).
# In order to centre the stamper cups proceed as follows:

■ Set the stamper cup side with round hollows (see Chapter 7.5.1)
■ Remove the drive chain (fig. 53 / pos. 7).
■ Position the journal (fig. 53 / pos. 20) at bottom dead centre, i.e. turn through 180° (fig.
53 shows top dead centre).
■ Loosen the 5 adjusting screws (fig. 53 / pos. 15) in the slots of the Maltese cross (fig.
53 / pos. 14). By turning the adjusting screw (fig. 53 / pos. 21) – behind the Maltese
cross (push the swings away!) – in a clockwise direction the stamper cups are
moved in the direction of the stamping head centre line (arrow, fig. 53).
2) After the standard setting of the stamping head (Chapter 12.2.7) the correct position of
the stamper cups must always be checked with a rotating kaiser piston.
# To do this, slightly grease the ends of the impact pins in the middle of the stamp and
perform a stamping cycle (without dough).

Tel.: +43 316.6901.0, Fax: +43 316.6901.115 Edition 05/2009
Make sure beforehand that no tools or other objects are lying near the piston.
If the adjustment has been made correctly the grease marks from the impact pins will be
in the middle of the swing hollows. Carry out the test for several swings. If there are major
deviations - greater than +/- 1 mm - further fine adjustment and tests are necessary.
12.2.9 SYNCHRONISATION OF THE DISCHARGE BELT
# The transfer of dough pieces from the discharge belt to the stamper cups can be syn-
chronised by relocating a few chain links at the drive sprocket (fig. 53 / pos. 1): remove
the cam chain tensioner (fig. 53 / pos. 5), move the chain (fig. 53 / pos. 7) on the drive
sprocket in the required direction, refit the chain tensioner, adjust the chain and secure.
# Check the upper standard position of the stamping head (Chapter 12.2.7).
12.2.10 READJUSTMENT OF THE STAMPING TOOL
The pistons needed for the different stamping patterns are mounted on a common base
plate. By means of a grip, the entire unit can be pushed into or pulled out of the stamping
head seat. If during the test runs with dough the imprint depth of the piston (piston depth) is
not large enough, the stamping tool must be removed from the seat in order to correct the
setting.
It is advisable to adjust only one of the 5 different tools to start with.
12.2.10.1 FIXED (NON ROTATING) PISTONS: ST, SA, GB (FIG. 4 /

POS. 2 AND 3)
# Loosen the counternut on the threaded shaft using an open-ended spanner (22 mm).
# Turn the piston: one half-turn produces a height difference of approximately 1 millimetre.
Tighten the nut slightly and check whether the piston is at the centre of the scraper, i.e.
the gap around the stamping edges must be even and parallel to the scraper. In this posi-
tion, tighten the counternut.
Please note that after every piston adjustment and before fitting in the machine, it must
be tested by hand whether the scraper with the spring-loaded common retaining plate
can still be pushed over the piston. Ignoring this instruction can lead to damage to the
piston and the scraper.

Tel.: +43 316.6901.0, Fax: +43 316.6901.115 Edition 05/2009
# Push the stamping tool into the seat, secure it with the locking pin and carry out a stamp-
ing test with a single dough piece. If the required stamping depth has not been reached,
repeat the procedure.
# If the stamping depth is correct, all 5 tools can be set to this value: proceed as described
above. After completing the adjustments, check the stamping depth once again by run-
ning tests.
12.2.10.2 STAMPING TOOL SL4 WITH ONE STAMPING EDGE

(FIG. 4 / POS. 4) FOR STAMPED LONG ROLLS
The bracket for the plastic stamping edge is mounted on spring-loaded pins so that operation
of the stamping edge at bottom dead centre of the stamping head is also spring-loaded. In
order to avoid warping, the pins are fixed to the bracket through joints. This stamping tool can
not be readjusted.
12.2.10.3 ROTATING PISTON K5 (FIG. 4 / POS. 1) FOR KAISER

ROLLS
This stamping tool operates spring-loaded and is adjusted in the works.

Tel.: +43 316.6901.0, Fax: +43 316.6901.115 Edition 05/2009
13 MALFUNCTION AND TROUBLE-

SHOOTING
Danger: Trouble-shooting to be performed by qualified personnel and / or

technical experts only, (refer to chapter 2.3.2) under maintenance of all safety
regulations!
Danger: All work on the control systems, the switching cabinet and on the elec-
trical parts of the machine may only be undertaken by an authorised specialist
electrician - e.g. an industrial electrician - or a trained electrotechnical engineer
(refer to chapter 2.3.2)!
Faults are indicated on the control panel display.

Tel.: +43 316.6901.0, Fax: +43 316.6901.115 Edition 05/2009
14 OPTIONS

Tel.: +43 316.6901.0, Fax: +43 316.6901.115 Edition 05/2009
14.1 SEEDER
The dough pieces arriving from the forming station are conveyed to the lower belt (1) of the seeder.
The dough piece must lie on the lower belt (1) with the dampened side facing upwards. The water is
transported to the drop nozzles (51).
The drop nozzles release water onto the roller (52). The dampening roller (2) transfers water to the
dough piece. The extracting pipe (3) sucks off the surplus water by means of a fan (14). The extracted
water is led away via container (11) and siphon (13). Any remaining excess water is collected in the
drawer beneath the lower belt and runs off through outlet (15).
A height-adjustable transfer roller (4) transfers the dampened dough pieces to the wire belt (5). A
second transfer roller (7) transfers the dough pieces, e.g., to an attached retracting belt.
A seed box (6) positioned above the wire belt distributes a specific, adjustable quantity of seeding
material onto the dough pieces. The dampening and the seeder start only when the laser sensor (16)
is interrupted by arriving dough pieces, and corresponding quantities of water and seeding material
were pre-selected. Excess seeding material falls through the wire belt into a collecting drawer (9) and
is conveyed back into the seed box by means of a rotating brush and a fan (10).
The customer must provide a shut-off valve for the water connection. The outlet (13) is not
pressurized.
The siphon (13) must always be filled with water before start-up. To do this, remove the fan (14)
and fill the container (11) with water. The fan (14) must be switched on once before the initial
start-up. Subsequently, control is automatic.
FIG. 54
Note: The dampening roller (2) and the transfer rollers (4 and 7) have a plastic surface
and can easily suffer damage if unsuitable tools are used on them.

Tel.: +43 316.6901.0, Fax: +43 316.6901.115 Edition 05/2009
FIG. 55
14.1.1 DAMPENING
The water travels via the water connection (27), pressure
regulator (28) with manometer (29), solenoid valve (30)
and reducing valve (31) to the drop nozzles (51).
The drop nozzles release water onto the roller (52). The
roller (52) serves to distribute the water evenly over the
dampening roller (2) and to regulate the amount of water
applied to the dough piece. Excess water is led away via
the extracting pipe (3) by means of an extracting fan (fig.
54 / pos. 14).
► Dampening can be switched on and off at the control
panel: dampening roller (2) and extracting fan are
switched jointly with the water valve. After switching off,
the extracting fan runs on for approximately 60 seconds.
A scraper (25) continually removes any residues of flour
and dough adhering to the lower belt (1).
The lower belt (1) is driven by means of a chain (fig. 61 /
pos. 34) by the seeder drive. The dampening roller is
driven by a chain (fig. 61 / pos. 35). The lifting motor (fig.
61 / pos. 36) performs the function of raising the dampen-
ing roller from the dough piece if the plant stops, and low-
ering it when the plant starts. A limit switch (21) switches
the motor off again when the upper position is reached.
A limit switch (19) checks whether the dampening roller is
installed; only then is the water valve opened.
Adjustment notes:
Â Setting the water quantity:

With knurled screw (22).
► Dampening roller height adjustment (2):

The height of the dampening roller can be adapted to
the size of the dough pieces by entering a value at the
control panel.
► Transfer roller height adjustment (4):

With adjusting lever (16); fix in position with locking
lever (17).
Attention: The transfer roller (4) must not be used

for pressing dough pieces flat since this would press the
dough into the wire belt.

Tel.: +43 316.6901.0, Fax: +43 316.6901.115 Edition 05/2009
14.1.1.1 REMOVAL OF DAMPENING ROLLER AND SCRAPER -

TENSIONING THE LOWER BELT
The dampening roller (2) and the scraper (25) of the lower belt (1) can be removed for clean-
ing. To do this proceed as follows:
Â Push in the operator side bearing unit (23) of the dampening roller (2) (see arrow) and
carefully lift out the roller. The roller can now be cleaned; please follow the relevant in-
structions in Chapter 14.1.4!
Attention: The dampening roller is heavy!
Â Push in the operator side bearing unit (23) of the dampening roller (2) (see arrow) and
refit the roller.
Attention: When reinstalling the dampening roller make sure that it en-
gages in the drive coupling.
Â Use the grip (25) to pull the scraper out forwards (see arrow), inspect it for damage and
clean it.
Â The scraper is automatically tensioned by means of a spring. When refitting the scraper,
make sure that the spring is pre-tensioned with the lever (26), i.e. turn the lever upwards
(!) to enable the scraper to be pushed back in.
Â The lower belt is tensioned by means of a tensioning roller (24). If the belt becomes slack
the tensioning roller can be adjusted: Release screw (37) and use the grip (24) to push
the tensioning roller downwards (see arrow) until the required tension has been
achieved; then retighten screw (37).
FIG. 56

Tel.: +43 316.6901.0, Fax: +43 316.6901.115 Edition 05/2009
14.1.2 WIRE BELT AND TRANSFER ROLLER

The dough pieces on the wire belt (5) are
seeded from above. The transfer roller (7) FIG. 57
serves to ensure proper transfer of the
dough pieces, e.g. onto an attached re-
tracting unit.
The wire belt is driven by the seeder drive
by means of a chain (fig. 61 / pos. 33).
► The transfer height of the wire belt can
be adjusted by means of a lever (39).
The transfer height determines which
way up the dough piece lands on the
following belt. The two possibilities are
“drop transfer”: dough pieces are
turned, and “level transfer”: dough
pieces are not turned.
► The height of the transfer roller is ad- Attention: Ensure that no foreign bodies get onto
justed to the size of the dough pieces the wire belt (danger of damage to the belt).
by means of lever (38).
FIG. 58
14.1.2.1 REMOVAL / TEN-
SIONING THE WIRE
BELT
The wire belt (5) can be removed for cleaning.
Â To do this raise the locking mechanism (42) (see

arrow) and pull out the wire belt. Attention:
The wire belt is heavy!
Attention: When refitting the wire belt make

certain that it is pushed in completely until it en-
gages in the drive coupling and that it is locked
again (43).
The wire belt is tensioned by means of a tensioning

FIG. 59
roller (40).
Â If the belt becomes slack the tensioning roller can

be adjusted: release screws (41) on the operator
and drive side (!) and push tensioning roller the
same distance on each side until the required
tension has been reached. Then retighten screws
(41).

Tel.: +43 316.6901.0, Fax: +43 316.6901.115 Edition 05/2009
14.1.3 SEEDING UNIT FIG. 60
A seed box (6) positioned above the wire belt (5)

dispenses a specific, adjustable quantity of seed-
ing material onto the row of dough pieces.
► The seeder starts when the laser sensor (fig.

54 / pos. 16) reports the arrival of dough
pieces and a corresponding quantity of seed-
ing material (i.e. speed) is pre-selected at the
control panel.
Excess seeding material falls through the wire

belt into a collecting drawer (9) and is conveyed
back (10) into the seed box by means of a rotat-
ing brush (48) and a fan (50). The box (6) can
also be refilled directly with seeding material (see
arrow, fig. 60).
The seed box (6) and the corrugated roller (45)

can be removed for cleaning or when using very
different seeding material, see Chapter 14.1.3.1.
The collecting drawer (9) and the dirt collecting

drawer can be removed for cleaning.
Attention: When pushing in the collecting

drawer (9) make sure that it is pushed in com-
pletely until the brush (48) engages in the drive
coupling (49).
FIG. 61
The seeder drive is a three-phase motor
(32) whose speed is controlled by a fre-
quency converter.
► The "Start time" of the seeder and the

"Run time" can be modified by enter-
ing values at the control panel.
The return brush (49) is driven by the
seeder drive.

Tel.: +43 316.6901.0, Fax: +43 316.6901.115 Edition 05/2009
14.1.3.1 REMOVAL OF SEED BOX AND SEED ROLLER
Different corrugated rollers may be necessary in order to cope with widely differing seeding
material. For this reason the rollers (45) are exchangeable. The corrugated roller must also
be removed for cleaning, as must the seed box (6).
To do this proceed as follows:
Â Grasp the seed box (6) by the grip using both hands, press the locking mechanism (46)
downwards (see arrow) and pull out the seed box.
Attention: The seed box is heavy!
Â Press down the corrugated roller locking mechanism (47) (see arrow) and pull the corru-
gated roller (45) out of its drive side bearing unit.
Â Push seed box back in again and install new corrugated roller.
Attention: When pushing in the corrugated roller and the seed box make
certain that the claw coupling engages in the drive coupling (turn corru-
gated roller if necessary).
FIG. 62
Attention: The corrugated roller (45) must be held firmly during removal and
must under no circumstances be allowed to fall onto the wire belt (risk of dam-
aging the belt).

Tel.: +43 316.6901.0, Fax: +43 316.6901.115 Edition 05/2009
14.1.4 MAINTENANCE AND CLEANING
14.1.4.1 DAILY / WEEKLY
■ Empty collecting drawers for excess seeding material and water (fig. 54 / pos. 9 and 15),
clean with a damp cloth and wipe dry.
■ Remove dampening roller (see Chapter 14.1.1.1). The dampening roller (fig. 54 / pos. 2) is
manufactured from a porous, sintered synthetic material and requires special care:
The surface must be kept as clean as possible! Otherwise it cannot be guaranteed that
water will not be emitted unevenly, which would lead to unequal dampening of the dough
pieces.
The roller can be cleaned using washing-up liquid but must be thoroughly rinsed after-
wards with clean water. For this purpose a water hose can be connected to the drive side
bearing unit of the dampening roller and the roller flushed through with water from the in-
side.
■ Carefully free extracting pipe (fig. 54 / pos. 3) and transfer rollers (fig. 54 / pos. 4 and 7)
from residues of flour and dough using a plastic scraper, wipe with a clean, damp cloth
and rub dry. Be very careful with the plastic surfaces of the rollers! Never use a metal
scraper!
■ Empty and clean water tank (fig. 54 / pos. 11).
■ Every week, vacuum clean the extracting fan (fig. 54 / pos. 14) and the fan for returning
the seeding material (underneath the wire belt).
■ Carefully remove soiling and flour deposits from the lower belt (fig. 56 / pos. 1) using a
plastic scraper. Never use a metal scraper! Clean belt with a damp cloth and wipe dry.
Free scraper (fig. 56 / pos. 25) of the lower belt from any adhering residues of dough,
check for damage and replace if necessary; see Chapter 14.1.1.1.
■ Remove wire belt (fig. 58 / pos. 5) (see Chapter 0) and clean with a jet of steam. After
cleaning, dry the wire belt. When pulling out the wire belt be aware that it is heavy!
■ Withdraw the seed box by means of the grip (fig. 62 / pos. 46) and clean it. The box is
heavy! Remove and clean corrugated roller (fig. 62 / pos. 45), see Chapter 14.1.3.1.
■ Clean the reclaiming brush (fig. 60 / pos. 48) of dough residues, check for signs of wear
and tear and exchange if necessary.
Check the lower and wire belts for correct tension and running and readjust if neces-
sary (see Chapter 14.1.1.1 and 0)!

Tel.: +43 316.6901.0, Fax: +43 316.6901.115 Edition 05/2009
14.1.4.2 MONTHLY
■ Clean the water feed filter at the pressure regulator (fig. 55 / pos. 28) every month.
■ Replacing round belts of the transfer rollers: Inspect the round belts for wear and re-
place if necessary. When fitting the new round belts be sure to insert them correctly, oth-
erwise the rollers may rotate in the wrong direction!
14.1.4.3 CLEANING AND MAINTENANCE INTERVALS

SEEDER
Collecting drawers empty clean, disinfect
Laser sensor clean
Dampening roller, extractor clean disinfect
pipe, water tank
Lower belt clean, disinfect
check belt run
and belt tension
Scraper, lower belt clean check for wear replace
Transfer rollers clean disinfect check round belts
Wire belt clean, disinfect replace
check belt run
and belt tension
Seed box, corrugated roller empty clean, disinfect
Return brush clean check for wear replace
Filter, pressure regulator clean
(water)
*h = plant operating hours

Tel.: +43 316.6901.0, Fax: +43 316.6901.115 Edition 05/2009
15 VISUAL DISPLAY OPERATION

Tel.: +43 316.6901.0, Fax: +43 316.6901.115 Edition 05/2009
VISUAL DISPLAY OPERATION PAGE 1
REX AUTOMAT / PROVER PLANT
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER PAGE
1 PRODUCT DEFINITION 2
1.1 GENERAL 2
2 MAIN DISPLAY 2
2.1 MENU DISPLAYS 4
2.2 COMPONENT DISPLAYS 4
2.2.1 INPUT OF VALUES AT CONTROL PANEL 5
2.2.2 TYPES OF INPUT FIELDS 5
2.2.2.1 NUMBER OF STROKES 5
2.2.2.2 SPEEDS 5
2.2.2.3 MOMENTS OF TRANSFER 5
2.2.2.4 START MOMENTS 6
2.2.2.5 RUNNING TIMES 6
2.2.2.6 INTERVALS 6
2.2.2.7 RUNNING DIRECTIONS 6
2.2.2.8 ON / OFF FUNCTIONS 6
2.2.2.9 POSITION OF SERVO DRIVES OR MANUAL ADJUSTMENTS 6
2.2.2.10 CLIMATE VALUES 6
2.2.2.11 SETTING PROGRAM 7
2.2.2.12 OTHERS 7
2.3 PRODUCT DATA MANAGEMENT 7
2.3.1 LOAD PRODUCT DATA 8
2.3.1.1 LOAD PLANT COMPONENT 8
2.3.1.2 LOAD ENTIRE PLANT 8
2.3.1.3 TRANSFER OF PRODUCT SETTINGS 9
2.3.2 SAVE PRODUCT DATA 9
2.3.2.1 SAVE PLANT COMPONENT 10
2.3.2.2 SAVE ENTIRE PLANT 10
2.3.2.3 ENTER / ALTER A PRODUCT NAME 10
2.4 PIECE COUNTER 11
2.4.1 PIECE COUNTER WITHOUT STOP FUNCTION 11
2.4.2 PIECE COUNTER WITH STOP FUNCTION 11
2.4.3 PIECES PER HOUR 11
2.5 SERVICE DISPLAY 12
2.5.1 PLANT – / SYNCHRONOUS POSITION 13
2.5.2 BASIC SETTINGS TIME POINTS (MOMENTS) 13
2.5.3 PASSWORD PROCESSING 14
2.5.4 PARAMETERISATION SERVO ADJUSTMENTS 14
3 FAULT DISPLAY AND INFORMATION 15

3.1 EMERGENCY-OFF 15
3.2 CONTROL VOLTAGE 16
3.3 MOTOR FAULTS 16
3.4 CLEANING DOORS AND PROTECTIVE WINDOWS 17
3.5 BUFFER BATTERY IN THE CONTROL SYSTEM 17
3.6 NUMBER OF PIECES ATTAINED 17
KÖNIG-Maschinen Gesellschaft m.b.H.

Phone: ++43/316/69 01-0, Fax: ++43/316/69 01-115 01 / 2006
1 PRODUCT DEFINITION
1.1 GENERAL
Plant settings are principally effected by means of mechanical and electrical adjustments on the plant
itself or in the respective plant displays at the control panel.
∗ Adjustments at the plant are constructed as mechanical levers or switch units with +/- switches.
∗ Component Displays are called up from the Main Display through Menu Displays at the control
panel.
After adjustments have been completed the values can be saved as a Product under a freely selectable
Product Name.
⇒ see chapter 2.3 "Product data management"
2 MAIN DISPLAY
The Main Display is the starting point for every operation of the plant:
01: Kaiser rolls

Weight: 100 g Pos. 60
Pieces: 50000
01: Kaiser rolls

Climate: 45 °C 55 %
Pieces: 50000
Pieces/hr: 50000
01: Kaiser rolls

Climate: 45 °C 55 %
Pieces/hr: 50000

Phone: ++43/316/69 01-0, Fax: ++43/316/69 01-115 01 / 2006
It contains:
A header available in every display:
Fault Display / Fault key: Indicates that a fault is queued. Pressing this key
displays the Fault Alarm Display ⇒ see chapter 3 "Fault display and informa-
tion".
With this key you can return to the Main Display from each display
Key for loading product data ⇒ see chapter 2.3.1 "Load product data"
A schematic diagram of the plant available in every Plant Display:
REX VGS NGS Keys for Menu Displays of the individual plant components
⇒ see chapter 2.1 "Menu Displays"
Keys for synchronous operation of the individual plant components
A display of the most important settings:
01: Kaiser rolls Display of the respective products set
Weight: 100 g Pos. 60 Weight and setting position of the current product
Climate: 45 °C 55 % Climate values in the respective plant component
Pieces: 50000 Current number of pieces in the respective plant component
An area with function keys:
Key for saving product data ⇒ see chapter 2.3.2 "Save product data"
The Service Display is called with this key ⇒ see chapter 2.5 "Service Display"
Key for language selection* (*Option)

Phone: ++43/316/69 01-0, Fax: ++43/316/69 01-115 01 / 2006
2.1 MENU DISPLAYS
MAIN HOPPER / MAIN MAIN

DRIVE OILING DRIVE CLIMATE DRIVE CLIMATE
STAMPING LONG ROL- STERILI-

ROUNDING / SEEDER
DUSTER STATION LING UNIT ZATION
WEIGHT
FORMING RETRACTING TRANFER TO
SEEDER STATION UNIT OVEN
RETRACTING
PIECE COUNT UNIT PIECE COUNT PIECE COUNT
The displays shown above can slightly differ from the actual Plant Displays.
MAIN The component on which a setting should be performed can be

DRIVE selected in the Menu Displays of the respective plant component
... ⇒ see chapter 2.2 "Component Displays".
In addition, there is a key for the piece counter available ⇒ see

PIECE COUNT chapter 2.4 "Piece counter".
2.2 COMPONENT DISPLAYS
REX MAIN DRIVE VGS MAIN DRIVE NGS MAIN DRIVE

Strokes Strokes Stiffening Strokes Heater
REX 25
Heater
drying VGS 25 fan NGS 25 drying
Transfer
Transfer
REX-VGS 12 Cleaning
Tranfer
REX-VGS 12 Swings
drying VGS-NGS 12 Cleaning
brush
Discharge Curve With
Infeed
swings 1:1 belt 80 belt 80 oven
Start mom. Discharge Duster Cutting
With stop Spr. finger b. 8 Convoluter Start mom. 75 NGS
Duster Cutting
Running time
Spr. finger b. 70 Running time 30 Start 50
The displays shown above can slightly differ from the actual Plant Displays

Phone: ++43/316/69 01-0, Fax: ++43/316/69 01-115 01 / 2006
2.2.1 INPUT OF VALUES AT CONTROL PANEL

When touching an input field the following input display appears:
Key ESC: Return to Component Display without altering the old value
Key BSP: Delete the last digit of the input value
Key +/–: Input of negative values
Keys Å Æ: Cursor keys for altering single digits of the input value
Key ↵: Confirm the new value and return to the Component Display
2.2.2 TYPES OF INPUT FIELDS
2.2.2.1 NUMBER OF STROKES

Strokes Strokes
REX 25 VGS 25 Enter the number of strokes of the respective plant component.
In synchronous operation the number of strokes of the plant cor-
responds to the number of strokes set for the preprover.
2.2.2.2 SPEEDS
Rounding Bottom
speed 75 belt 85 Enter the speed in percent of the maximum speed. Some drives
(e.g. upper belt) are stopped by entering "0".
2.2.2.3 MOMENTS OF TRANSFER

Transfer Transfer
REX-VGS 25 VGS-NGS 56 Enter the moment of transfer in percent of one stroke. A smaller
value means that the dough piece will reach the swing to be oc-
cupied earlier.

Phone: ++43/316/69 01-0, Fax: ++43/316/69 01-115 01 / 2006
2.2.2.4 START MOMENTS

Strewer Intermediate
Start moment 95 Step on 65 Enter the start moment in percent of one stroke. A smaller value
means that the respective drive will start earlier.
2.2.2.5 RUNNING TIMES

Strewer Stam. st. dust.
Running time 35 running time 45 Enter the running time in percent of one stroke. A smaller value
means a shorter running time and thus a smaller seeding/dusting
quantity.
2.2.2.6 INTERVALS
Oiler Replenisher
Divider 80 Interval 12 Enter the interval in strokes. The respective drive is started
automatically after the strokes entered.
2.2.2.7 RUNNING DIRECTIONS

Top Convol. Enter the running direction. By touching the arrow symbol the
belt 60 belt 80 running direction of the respective drive is reversed.
2.2.2.8 ON / OFF FUNCTIONS

Cutting Duster Various functions or drives can be switched on and off with the
unit top belt individual keys.
2.2.2.9 POSITION OF SERVO DRIVES OR MANUAL ADJUSTMENTS

Weight Rounding
Pos. 60,6 pressure 85 Enter the desired position of the servo drive. The drive moves to
the adjusted value after confirmation of the desired position. The
set position of manual adjustments can also be recorded here.
2.2.2.10 CLIMATE VALUES
Temperature Humidity Enter the temperature (in °C) and the percent of relative humidity.
Actual 35 °C 45 %rH
Preselect. 35 °C 55 %rH

Phone: ++43/316/69 01-0, Fax: ++43/316/69 01-115 01 / 2006
2.2.2.11 SETTING PROGRAM
Basic Enter the separation (division) in millimetres. Various patterns

seperation 50 Pieces
/block 3 (blocks) can be set.
Intermed.
seperation 100 Number of
blocks 4
Basic separation: Distance between two dough pieces of one
block
Control
separation 150 Retracting
length
Intermediate separation: Distance of the dough pieces between
two blocks
Intermed. Retracting
step on 75 start 25 Control separation: Distance of the dough pieces between two
baking trays
1 3 5
⊗⊗⊗ ⊗⊗⊗ ⊗⊗⊗ ⊗⊗⊗ ⊗⊗⊗ ⊗⊗⊗ ⊗⊗⊗ ⊗⊗⊗ 1…Basic separation 50
⊗⊗⊗ ⊗⊗⊗ ⊗⊗⊗ ⊗⊗⊗ ⊗⊗⊗ ⊗⊗⊗ ⊗⊗⊗ ⊗⊗⊗ 2…Pieces / Block 3
⊗⊗⊗ ⊗⊗⊗ ⊗⊗⊗ ⊗⊗⊗ ⊗⊗⊗ ⊗⊗⊗ ⊗⊗⊗ ⊗⊗⊗ 3…Intermediate separation 100
⊗⊗⊗ ⊗⊗⊗ ⊗⊗⊗ ⊗⊗⊗ ⊗⊗⊗ ⊗⊗⊗ ⊗⊗⊗ ⊗⊗⊗ 4…Number of blocks 4
⊗⊗⊗ ⊗⊗⊗ ⊗⊗⊗ ⊗⊗⊗ ⊗⊗⊗ ⊗⊗⊗ ⊗⊗⊗ ⊗⊗⊗ 5…Control separation 150
2
4
If the retraction takes place during the intermediate step, it is necessary to correct the value for the con-
trol division as otherwise the dough pieces will be pushed together differently on retraction.
2.2.2.12 OTHERS
Weight
grams 55 Desired Weight: To be checked by the operating personnel
Infeed
swings 1:1 Occupancy of swings: Occupancy of the preprover swings (each swing, every
second swing, etc.)
2.3 PRODUCT DATA MANAGEMENT
The product data can be organised
1. For a single plant component (REX / VGS (preprover) / NGS (final prover))
2. For the entire plant (REX + VGS + NGS)

Phone: ++43/316/69 01-0, Fax: ++43/316/69 01-115 01 / 2006
2.3.1 LOAD PRODUCT DATA
The Load (Recall) function can be called up from every display.
Long rolls 2
Kaiser rolls
Poppy rolls
Sesame rolls
Sesame rolls
01 Kaiser rolls
Long rolls 1
Kaiser rolls
Poppy rolls 2
Sesame rolls 3
2.3.1.1 LOAD PLANT COMPONENT
Select the desired product with the arrow keys or by entering the program
number 01 .
REX
Kaiser rolls Pressing the key next to the respective plant component, the product data
of this plant component are called up. After the desired program has been
VGS
Sesame rolls
called up the previous display appears again.
NGS
Kaiser rolls
2.3.1.2 LOAD ENTIRE PLANT
Select the desired product with the arrow keys or by entering the program
number 01 .
Pressing the key next to the symbol for the entire plant, the product data
REX+VGS+NGS
of the entire plant are called up. After the desired program has been called up
the previous display appears again.

Phone: ++43/316/69 01-0, Fax: ++43/316/69 01-115 01 / 2006
2.3.1.3 TRANSFER OF PRODUCT SETTINGS

REX It is possible to "transfer" a product from the previous plant component to the
Kaiser rolls subsequent plant component by pressing the key between the respec-
tive plant components. If e.g. the product xKaiser rollsx has been called up for the
VGS REX, the product xKaiser rollsx is also called up for the preprover. The same ap-
Sesame rolls plies for the transfer from the preprover to the final prover. After the required
program has been called up the previous display will appear again.
NGS
Kaiser rolls
2.3.2 SAVE PRODUCT DATA
The Save (Store) function can be called up from the Main Display.
In order to prevent inadvertent saving or overwriting of a product that has already been stored, the save
procedure is protected through a password.
After entering the password (⇒ see also chapter 2.5.3 "Password processing") the Save Display will
appear.
Long rolls 2
Kaiser rolls
Poppy rolls
Sesame rolls
8888 01 Kaiser rolls
Long rolls 1
Sesame rolls
Kaiser rolls
Poppy rolls 2
Sesame rolls 3

Phone: ++43/316/69 01-0, Fax: ++43/316/69 01-115 01 / 2006
2.3.2.1 SAVE PLANT COMPONENT
Select the desired program with the arrow keys or by entering the program
number 01 .
xKaiser rollsx A new product name can also be entered.
REX
Kaiser rolls The product data of this plant component are stored by pressing the key
VGS next to the respective plant component. After the program has been stored
Sesame rolls the Main Display will appear again.
NGS
Kaiser rolls
2.3.2.2 SAVE ENTIRE PLANT
number 01 .
xKaiser rollsx A new product name can also be entered.
REX+VGS+NGS The product data of the entire plant are stored by pressing the key next
to the symbol for the entire plant. After the program has been stored the Main
Display will appear again.
2.3.2.3 ENTER / ALTER A PRODUCT NAME
number 01 .
xKaiser rollsx The product name can be modified or re-entered even if no product date are
stored.
After a new product name has been entered the Main Display will appear
again by pressing this key.

Phone: ++43/316/69 01-0, Fax: ++43/316/69 01-115 01 / 2006
2.4 PIECE COUNTER
REX PIECE COUNT VGS PIECE COUNT NGS PIECE COUNT

Current number of pieces Current number of pieces Current number of pieces
1234 1234 1234
Preselection number of pieces Preselection number of pieces Preselection number of pieces
50000 50000 50000
Rows Pieces / hour Rows Pieces / hour Rows Pieces / hour
REX 5 15000
VGS 5 15000
NGS 6 15000
RESET NO. OF PIECES RESET NO. OF PIECES RESET NO. OF PIECES
2.4.1 PIECE COUNTER WITHOUT STOP FUNCTION

Preselection = "0"
Rows The respective piece counter increases its "current value" after every stroke according
VGS 5 the parameter "Rows...".
RESET NO. OF PIECES With this key the counter is reset to "0".
2.4.2 PIECE COUNTER WITH STOP FUNCTION

Preselection = "1" up to "2147483647"
Rows The respective piece counter increases its "current value" after every stroke according
VGS 5 the parameter "Rows...". When the preselected count is reached, the piece counter
stops the respective plant component and the fault message "Pieces complete" ap-
pears.
RESET NO. OF PIECES With this key the counter is reset to "0".
2.4.3 PIECES PER HOUR

Pieces / hour The hourly capacity is calculated from the number of strokes entered and the respec-
15230 tive number of rows. In synchronous operation the hourly capacity is calculated from
the number of strokes of the preprover.

Phone: ++43/316/69 01-0, Fax: ++43/316/69 01-115 01 / 2006
2.5 SERVICE DISPLAY

The settings and displays in the Service Display serve for the basic setting of the plant and for trouble-
shooting by the after-sales service or the customer service.
The Service Display is called up from the Main Display. The Service Display 1 appears.
Press the key; the Service Display 2 will appear. In order to prevent inadvertent overwriting of ba-
sic settings, this procedure is protected through a password.
Basic settings
REX cleaning SYNCHR Act / Sum / Dif
position (%) 5 REX 50 99 -2
Time eccentric VGS 41 99 -1
10
6901
adjustment STZ +1
NGS 49 99 -5
Rex automatic
Stop (strokes) 35
Save Fault Extraction unit

messages Manual
Enter the password 6901 ; the Service Display 2 will appear.
Passwort&Speicher Servoverstellungen REX Password&Saving Servo adjustments REX

Passw. Service 6901 Gewicht Wirkdruck Password Service 6901 Weight Mould.press.
Passw. Speichern 8888 Password Saving 8888
Vorwahl 50 80 Preselection 50 80
Anz.Progr.Speicher 50 Soll Position 200 200 No. of saved progr. 50 Nom. position 200 200
Ist Position 200 200 Act. position 200 200
Untergr. Pos. 500 500 Lower limit pos. 500 500
Untergr. Anz. 44,0 40,0 Lower limit displ. 44,0 40,0
Obergr. Pos. 1000 1000 Upper limit pos. 1000 1000
Ober-/Untergrenzen Obergr. Anz. 52,0 45,0 Upper / Lower limit Upper limit displ. 52,0 45,0
Toleranz [%] 1 1 Tolerance [%] 1 1
Untergr. eingeben 1 Positionieren 0 0 Enter lower limit 1 Positioning 0 0
Obergr. eingeben 1 Lageregelung 0 0 Enter upper limit 1 Position control 0 0
The contents of this display depend on the plant configuration and can thus be different from the values
shown above.

Phone: ++43/316/69 01-0, Fax: ++43/316/69 01-115 01 / 2006
For large plants the settings can be split into several Service
Displays. The keys for switching between the individual Ser-
vice Displays are located in the header.
Return to the Main Display with this key.
2.5.1 PLANT – / SYNCHRONOUS POSITION
The Service Display always contains an area which indicates the synchronisation of the individual plant
components:
SYNCHR Ist /Sum /Abw Indication of the current positions Ist ( Act ) of the individual plant compo-
REX 80 97 +2 nents:
VGS 49 99 -1
STZ +1 The value must alter from 0 to approx. 100 once a stroke. If the value doesn't
NGS 50 99 +5 change when the plant is running this means that both counting inputs have failed
or the angular momentum transmitter doesn't turn.
If the value only changes up to 50, this means that one of the counting inputs has
failed.
If the value exceeds 100, this means the reference pulse is missing.
SYNCHR Act /Sum /Dif Indication of the sum Sum of counting pulses of the individual plant com-
REX 80 97 +2 ponents:
VGS 49 99 -1
STZ +1 The sum must amount to approx. 100.
NGS 50 99 +5
If the sum is approx. 50, this means that one of the counting inputs has failed.
Variance Abw ( Dif ) of the positions between the individual plant compo-
nents in synchronous operation:
The variance during production should be between –5 and +5. If the variance
does not lie in this range it is necessary to adjust the maximum frequency at the
converter accordingly.
2.5.2 BASIC SETTINGS TIME POINTS (MOMENTS)
Rex automatic stop (strokes) 52 Basic settings that do not refer to the product can be modified in the
Service Display, e.g. "Rex automatic stop (strokes)".

Phone: ++43/316/69 01-0, Fax: ++43/316/69 01-115 01 / 2006
2.5.3 PASSWORD PROCESSING
Passw. Speichern: 8888 The password for the saving procedure can be changed in the Service
Password Saving: 8888 Display ⇒ see also chapter 2.3.2 "Save product data".
2.5.4 PARAMETERISATION SERVO ADJUSTMENTS
Servo adjustments at the plant are initialised in the Service Display.
∗ Enter the tolerance Toleranz ( Tolerance ) for positioning in percent of the adjustment path
∗ Indication of the current positions Ist Position ( Act. position ) of the servo drive (analogue input or
count)
∗ Enter the lower mechanical end position Untergr. Pos. ( Lower limit pos. ) of the servo drive
Procedure: Move manually (press contactor) to the lowest position (just before the mechanical stop
or to the desired lowest position which should be reached during operation) and enter the current
position Ist Position ( Act. position ) in Lower Limit Position Untergr. Pos. ( Lower limit pos.x).
∗ Enter the indicated value Untergr. Anz. ( Lower limit displ. ) which corresponds to the position
Untergr. Pos.x (xLower limit pos. ) set above
e.g.: Weight adjustment: A position of 2800 corresponds to an indicated value of 25,0 g in the
Component Displays ⇒ see also chapter 2.2.2.9 "Position of servo drives or manual adjustments".
∗ Enter the upper mechanical end position Obergr. Pos. ( Upper limit pos. ) of the servo drive
Procedure: Move manually (press contactor) to the top position (just before the mechanical stop or
to the desired top position which should be reached during operation) and enter the current position
Ist Position ( Act. position ) in Upper Limit Position Obergr. Pos. ( Upper limit pos. ).
∗ Enter the indicated value Obergr. Anz. ( Upper limit displ. ) which corresponds to the position
Obergr. Pos.x (xUpper limit pos. ) set above
e.g..: Rounding pressure adjustment: A position of 20400 corresponds to an indicated value of
100,0 % in the Component Displays ⇒ see also chapter 2.2.2.9 "Position of servo drives or manual
adjustments".

Phone: ++43/316/69 01-0, Fax: ++43/316/69 01-115 01 / 2006
3 FAULT DISPLAY AND INFORMATION
∗ Fault alarms are indicated in a separate Fault Alarm Display which appears when a fault message
occurs.
∗ Detailed text display with cross-reference to the circuit diagram
1: EMERGENCY OFF
Key S731-S734 contactor K734
2: CONTROL VOLTAGE
Key S736, contactor K735
9: REX MAIN DRIVE

Converter E31, thermal contact S171
17: REX REAR DOOR

Safety switch S191
36: REX PIECES COMPLETE

Delete piece counter, increase preselection
The Fault Alarm Display can be switched off with this key in order to guaran-
tee undisturbed control panel operation.
With this key the Fault Alarm Display can be shown again.
3.1 EMERGENCY-OFF
1: EMERGENCY OFF Cause: "EMERGENCY-OFF" pressed

Key S731-S734 contactor K734
Remedy: Pull out the "EMERGENCY OFF" switches

Phone: ++43/316/69 01-0, Fax: ++43/316/69 01-115 01 / 2006
3.2 CONTROL VOLTAGE
2: CONTROL VOLTAGE Cause: Actuation of an "EMERGENCY OFF" switch or

Key S736, contactor K735 the main switch is "Off"
Remedy: Press the "RESET" key
(Control voltage on)
When "EMERGENCY-OFF" or "CONTROL VOLTAGE" is displayed no further failure is indicated.
3.3 MOTOR FAULTS
Drive motors are protected against overloading through motor protecting switches, converters and/or
thermal contacts. If one of these protective devices trips through overloading (current consumption too
high or interruption of a phase) the respective plant component, or the entire plant, is stopped. After
inspection and correction of the faults the plant is operationally ready again.
9: REX MAIN DRIVE

Converter E31, thermal contact S171
E 3 1 REX MAIN DRIVE
Abbreviated designation
Column on sheet (1 - 8)
Sheet number of circuit diagram
S = Thermal contact
Q = Motor protecting switch
E = Fault converter
This means the converter has tripped for the Rex drive with designation E31, i.e. in the circuit diagram
on Sheet 3, Column 1.

Phone: ++43/316/69 01-0, Fax: ++43/316/69 01-115 01 / 2006
3.4 CLEANING DOORS AND PROTECTIVE WINDOWS
Doors and protective windows are displayed if they are open. The fault is corrected by closing the rele-
vant door.
17: REX REAR DOOR

Safety switch S191
S 19 1 REX REAR DOOR
Abbreviated designation
Column on sheet (1 - 8)
Sheet number of circuit diagram
S = Switch
This means that the Rex rear door with switch designation S191 on Sheet 19, Column 1 is open.
3.5 BUFFER BATTERY IN THE CONTROL SYSTEM
4: BUFFER BATTERY CPU Change battery Cause: Buffer battery in the control system is empty
Remedy: Do not switch off the main switch until the bat-
tery has been changed; otherwise stored prod-
uct settings will be deleted!
Change the battery as soon as possible. The main switch must be switched ON during battery change.
3.6 NUMBER OF PIECES ATTAINED
36: REX PIECES COMPLETE Cause: Preselected number of pieces attained

Delete piece counter, increase preselection
Remedy: Increase preselection value or delete the cur-
rent number of pieces! ⇒ see also chapter 2.4
"Piece counter"

Phone: ++43/316/69 01-0, Fax: ++43/316/69 01-115 01 / 2006
16 SPECIFICATIONS

Tel.: +43 316.6901.0, Fax: +43 316.6901.115 Edition 05/2009
Besteht aus Analyse
Datum 13-02-05
Zeit 10:23:21
Seite 1(2)
User: MKORBELIUS
Seq St Teil AEC Stk Bezeichnung EC KB Länge Breite Verl-F. %
Standort Produkt Nr. Artikel Gr. Verantw. Planmethode niedr.Level Zeichn.Nr.

GRZ K99999 RSAUSENG 0 01 FARBE
Status Prod Struktur KB Status
K06.6.01/192/00 05 0
COMBILINE KCL8
NB600_CGV-ST-RR-MOC-AB
INNSCORE ZIMBAWE
0120960
0010 20 B06.2.06/29/00 1 STREUMOHNERWALZE 0 0
01.04 WALZE FUER: STREUER BEI MO(WB) INTEGRIERT)
02.01 NENNBREITE: 610 MM
04.04 STREUBREITE: 540 MM DURCHGEHEND
05.01 STREUGUT: MOHN, SESAM, KUEMMEL
06.05 STREUPROFIL: 12 NUTEN AM UMFANG
. B=3 MM T=3 MM
0020 05 B06.6.01/40/00 1,00 BASIC UNIT CGV-COMBI 1 0
0030 05 B06.6.02/34/00 1,00 PRE-PRESSER VD-AUST 1 0
DURCHGEHEND, NB600, 2 1/4"
0040 10 B06.6.02/37/00 1,00 STAMPING HEAD K5-AUST 0 0
COMBI LINE NB560 2 1/4"
0050 05 B06.6.02/47/01 1,00 PRE-PRESSER VD-AUST 1 0
5R, T110, NB600, 2 1/4"
0060 10 B06.6.02/50/00 1,00 STAMPING HEAD 1 0
0070 10 B06.6.03/00/00 1 SWINGS-SL CGV-COMBI 0 1
CREATED ON 02-06-12
----------- 02-06-12 RAUCH
01.01 GEHAENGE: DURCHGEHEND
02.01 GEHAENGEANZAHL: 230
0080 10 B06.6.04/66/02 1,00 CONNECTION AFTER CGV 1 0
0090 10 B06.6.05/48/00 1,00 CONNECTION REX 1 0
0100 10 B06.6.06/06/00 1,00 LONG ROLLING UNIT AT INFEED 1 0
NW600
0110 05 B06.6.07/35/02 1,00 ROLLER AUSLAUFBAND MIT VORKALI 1 0
0120 05 B06.6.08/04/06 1,00 STAMPING STATION CGV-COMBI 1 0
NW600
0130 05 B06.6.09/08/01 1,00 DISCHARGE BT. STAMP.ST. CGV-CO 0 0
NW560
0140 10 B06.6.10/10/01 1,00 DRIVE CGV-COMBI W. STAMP.STATI 1 0
0150 10 B06.6.10/16/01 1,00 ANTRIEB UNTERBAND 1 0
0160 10 B06.6.11/20/02 1,00 DISCHARGE BELT CGV-COMBI 1 0
NW600
HABASIT_LINK_BAND
0170 10 B06.6.16/17/02 1,00 ZUBEHOER_STANZE 1 0
0180 10 B06.6.17/35/01 1,00 CONTROL PANEL 1 0
0190 10 B06.6.21/00/01 1,00 DUSTER CGV-COMBI 0 0
0200 10 B06.6.21/19/01 1,00 DUSTER CGV-COMBI 1 0
0210 10 B06.6.22/10/00 1,00 DUSTER INSERT CGV-COMBI 1 0
DUSTER UPPER BELT
CREATED ON 05-10-06
NW600
NB600
0240 10 B06.6.31/04/03 1,00 BASIC UNIT SEEDER MOC/ST 1 0
0250 10 B06.6.32/00/01 1,00 DAMPENING BELT MOC/ST 0 0
0260 10 B06.6.33/02/01 1,00 DAMPENING ROLLER MOC/ST 0 0
WITH GROOVES
0270 10 B06.6.33/03/00 1,00 DISTRIBUTING ROLLER 1 0
SEEDER NW600
0280 10 B06.6.34/00/02 1,00 WATER EXTRACTION 0 0
MOC/ST
0290 10 B06.6.35/06/03 1,00 SEEDER BELT MOC/ST 0 0
NW600
0300 20 B06.6.36/00/00 1 SEED BOX MOC/ST 0 1
SEEDER NW 600
www.koenig-rex.com
Besteht aus Analyse
Datum 13-02-05
Zeit 10:23:21
Seite 2(2)
User: MKORBELIUS
02.01 KORNGREOSSE: 1 - 3 MM
0310 20 B06.6.37/00/00 1 COLLECTING DRAWER MOC/ST 0 1
INCL. MATERIAL; FINISHED
CREATED ON 03-02-10
----------- 03-02-10 BUDAI
01.01 MOHNERTYPE: MOC/ST
03.01 STREUGUTRUECKFUEHRUNG: MIT SPIRALBUERSTE
04.01 ANTRIEB: UEBER KETTE
0320 10 B06.6.38/06/02 1,00 RECYCLING UNIT MOC/ST 0 0
0330 10 B06.6.39/02/00 1,00 DRIP UNIT_FESTO 1 0
SEEDER NW 600
0340 10 B06.6.40/11/02 1,00 VERSCHALUNG OBERBAND 1 0
0350 10 B06.6.53/31/01 1,00 DISCHARGE BELT 1 0
NW600
0360 10 B06.6.54/06/03 1,00 TIMED ROLLER NB600 1 0
0370 05 B06.6.55/07/05 1,00 INTERMEDIATE BELT WK 1 0
NW600
0380 10 B06.6.97/00/00 1,00 CONTROL SCALE 1 0
0390 20 B06.6.98/00/00 1 TRANSPORT FRAME 0 1
TO COMBI LINE
ST/K-AS600
CREATED ON 03-01-20
0400 10 B06.6.99/00/02 1,00 SPARE PARTS PACK 0 0
AND MACHINE ACCESSORIES
WITH STAMPING STATION
0410 05 B59.3.20/09/03 1,00 AB 600/1000 1 0
0420 10 B59.3.20/99/02 1,00 SPS STEUERUNG 1 0
0430 10 B59.3.21/02/02 1,00 ABZIEHLADE 1 0
0440 10 B59.3.21/94/05 1,00 ANSCHLAG UND 1 0
0450 10 B59.3.21/95/00 2,00 BLECHAUFLAGE NB 600 1 0
0460 05 B59.3.22/12/02 1,00 GESTELL UNTER 1 0
www.koenig-rex.com
17 ELECTRICAL DOCUMENTATION
17.1 SUBDIVISION OF THE CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
Cover sheet Electrical data

Plant designation
Customer name
Table of Contents
Main power circuits Drives

Adjustments
Climate
Safety power circuits Emergency Off, control voltage

Protective doors, panelling, etc.
Control voltage circuits PLC digital inputs

PLC digital outputs
PLC analogue inputs
PLC analogue outputs
Layout plans PLC modules

Switchgear cabinet
Control panels
Settings Frequency converters

Tel.: +43 316.6901.0, Fax: +43 316.6901.115 Edition 05/2009
17.2 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM DESIGNATIONS
The circuit diagram number is located bottom right in the header of every sheet (e.g.:
06.11.0.1234), also the page or sheet number (e.g.: Sheet 0).
nächstes Blatt
next sheet 0.1
–
06.11.0.1234 +
Blatt
sheet 0
17.3 COMPONENT DESIGNATION AND CROSS-

REFERENCES
The following key is used to designate switches, relays, frequency converters, etc.:
Examples: Short name of the op- Sheet no.: Column No.

erating element (10 col./sh.)
Switch on Sheet 12, Column 1

S 121 S 12 1
Motor on Sheet 3, Column 5

M35 M 3 5
Converter on Sheet 8.1, Column 8

E 8.18 E 8.1 8
Protective motor switch on Bl. 14, Sp.: 2

Q 142 Q 14 2
In order to mark cross-references, the sheet and column of the respective contact or corre-
sponding potential is given in the same form.
–––► L07 /13.1 i.e.: Potential L07 continues on Sheet 13, Column 1
7.3 i.e.: The contact assembly is on Sheet 7, Column 3

2.3 i.e.: The contact assembly is on the same sheet, Column 2

Tel.: +43 316.6901.0, Fax: +43 316.6901.115 Edition 05/2009
17.4 WIRING DIAGRAM, DESCRIPTION AND ELECTRI-

CAL SPARE PARTS

Tel.: +43 316.6901.0, Fax: +43 316.6901.115 Edition 05/2009
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Kunde : Innscore Zimbawe

customer
Standort : Kommission : C03.0.16/02/00 + C03.0.16/12/00 + C03.0.16/14/02

site commission C06.6.03/83/00 + C59.3.00/00/05
Anlagenbezeichnung : Basic REX I Zeichnungsnummer : 06.11.0.3459

plant designation CL600 Stanze+SCHR-WK+RR +MOC + AB Drawing Number von 3410
from 3410
Steuerung : Simatic S7 - 313C Nennleistung : REX: 2,0 kW CL:10,0 kW

control motor power
Schutzart : IP 54 Einspeisung : 3x400V+N / 50Hz

degree of protection incoming power
Vorschrift : ÖVE/ÖNORM E 8001-6-62 / EN 60204-1 Nennstrom : REX: 5 A CL: 18,0 A

regulation EN ISO 13849-1 current rating
Teilebesonderheit : - Steuerspannung : 24VDC

part feature control voltage
Baujahr : 2013 Deutsch

year of construction Englisch
Letzte Änderung : 01.02.2013 Letzter Bearbeiter : Martin Manninger Anzahl der Seiten : 75
Last change Last user Number of pages
Vorherige Seite Nächste Seite

Previous page Next page 1
Datum 01.02.2013 Anlagenbezeichnung Seitenbeschreibung
date plant designation Page description
Basic REX I Titelblatt
Änderung
change
Datum
date
Name
name
Bearb.
user Martin Manninger KOENIG MASCHINEN CL600 Stanze+SCHR-WK+RR +MOC + AB title sheet
Zeichnungsnummer
Drawing Number 06.11.0.3459 Blatt
sheet 0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Inhaltsverzeichnis table of contents

Seite Seitenbeschreibung Seitenzusatzfeld Datum Bearbeiter
page Page description page supplementary field date user
0 Titelblatt title sheet 01.02.2013 Martin Manninger
1 Inhaltsverzeichnis : =T//0 - /95 01.02.2013 Martin Manninger
1.1 Inhaltsverzeichnis : /96 - /242 table of contents : /96 - /242 01.02.2013 Martin Manninger
1.2 Inhaltsverzeichnis : /250 - /280 table of contents : /250 - /280 01.02.2013 Martin Manninger
2 Drahtfarben wiring colour 01.02.2013 Martin Manninger
1 Einspeisung incoming power 01.02.2013 Martin Manninger
2 Versorgung supply 01.02.2013 Martin Manninger
3 Versorgung supply 01.02.2013 Martin Manninger
6 Antriebe REX actuation REX 01.02.2013 Martin Manninger
7 Stauber duster 01.02.2013 Martin Manninger
16 Antriebe Vorgärschrank actuation first prover 01.02.2013 Martin Manninger
18 Gehängetrocknung swing drying 01.02.2013 Martin Manninger
19 Klima VGS climate VGS 01.02.2013 Martin Manninger
20 Entkeimung sterilization 01.02.2013 Martin Manninger
26 Antriebe Formstation actuation formingstation 01.02.2013 Martin Manninger
27 Stauber Formstation duster formingstation 01.02.2013 Martin Manninger
28 Taktrolle setting roller 01.02.2013 Martin Manninger
36 Mohner seeder 01.02.2013 Martin Manninger
40 Abziehband retractingbelt 01.02.2013 Martin Manninger
41 Abziehmotor retracting motor 01.02.2013 Martin Manninger
75 Ventil / Kupplung REX valve / clutch REX 01.02.2013 Martin Manninger
76 Ventil / Kupplung Gärschrank valve / clutch prover 01.02.2013 Martin Manninger
77 Befeuchterwalze dampening roller 01.02.2013 Martin Manninger
78 Sicherung Klemmen fuse terminals 01.02.2013 Martin Manninger
80 Not Aus emergency OFF 01.02.2013 Martin Manninger
81 Steuerspannung Versorgung control voltage supply 01.02.2013 Martin Manninger
83 Sicherheitsschalter REX safety switch REX 01.02.2013 Martin Manninger
84 Sicherheitsschalter VGS safety switch VGS 01.02.2013 Martin Manninger
90 Bedientableau control panel 01.02.2013 Martin Manninger
92 Tastatur keyboard 01.02.2013 Martin Manninger
93 Digital Eingänge digital Inputs 01.02.2013 Martin Manninger

0 Previous page Next page 1.1
Basic REX I Inhaltsverzeichnis : =T//0 - /95
Änderung
change
Datum
date
Name
name
Bearb.
user Martin Manninger KOENIG MASCHINEN CL600 Stanze+SCHR-WK+RR +MOC + AB table of contents : =T//0 - /95
Zeichnungsnummer
sheet 1
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

96 Digital Ausgänge digital outputs 01.02.2013 Martin Manninger
98 Analoge Eingänge analogs Inputs 01.02.2013 Martin Manninger
99 Analoge Ausgänge analogs outputs 01.02.2013 Martin Manninger
110 Digitale Ausgänge digital outputs 01.02.2013 Martin Manninger
111 Digitale Ausgänge digital outputs 01.02.2013 Martin Manninger
200 SPS Rack 0 PLC Rack 0 01.02.2013 Martin Manninger
204 Beschriftung Labelling 01.02.2013 Martin Manninger
206 Schaltschrank REX electrical cabinet REX 01.02.2013 Martin Manninger
207 Schaltschrank electrical cabinet 01.02.2013 Martin Manninger
230 Aufbau REX design REX 01.02.2013 Martin Manninger
231 Vorgärschrank first prover 01.02.2013 Martin Manninger
232 Formstation formingstation 01.02.2013 Martin Manninger
233 Mohner seeder 01.02.2013 Martin Manninger
235 Abziehgerät retracting unit 01.02.2013 Martin Manninger
240 Frequenzumrichter inverter 01.02.2013 Martin Manninger

1 Previous page Next page 1.2
Basic REX I Inhaltsverzeichnis : /96 - /242
Änderung
change
Datum
date
Name
name
Bearb.
user Martin Manninger KOENIG MASCHINEN CL600 Stanze+SCHR-WK+RR +MOC + AB table of contents : /96 - /242
Zeichnungsnummer
sheet 1.1
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

250 Leistungsverbraucher power consumer 01.02.2013 Martin Manninger
260 Artikelstückliste : 0310414 04A - E60405630 01.02.2013 Martin Manninger
261 Artikelstückliste : E60405630 - E60904145 01.02.2013 Martin Manninger
280 Schaltplannummer wiring diagram number 01.02.2013 Martin Manninger

1.1 Previous page Next page 2
Basic REX I Inhaltsverzeichnis : /250 - /280
Änderung
change
Datum
date
Name
name
Bearb.
user Martin Manninger KOENIG MASCHINEN CL600 Stanze+SCHR-WK+RR +MOC + AB table of contents : /250 - /280
Zeichnungsnummer
sheet 1.2
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Drahtfarben Artikelnummer
wiring colour 230V/400V
Article Number
schwarz WIRE_BLACK_0,75 WIRE_BLACK_1,5
black
L1/L2/L3 E63102069 0 E63106469 0
hellblau N - Leiter WIRE_LIGHTBLUE_0,75 WIRE_LIGHTBLUE_1,5
light blue N - conductor E63102169 0 E63111069 0
grün / gelb Schutzleiter WIRE_GREEN/YELLOW_1,5
green / yellow protective wire E63114069 0
rot 230V Steuerspannung WIRE_RED_0,5 WIRE_RED_0,75 WIRE_RED_1,5
red 230V control voltage E63100051 0 E63100069 0 E63113069 0
Drahtfarben Artikelnummer
wiring colour 24V DC / 10V DC Article Number
braun WIRE_BROWN_0,5 WIRE_BROWN_1,5
brown
+ 24 V DC E63100056 0 E63114269 0
blau 24 V DC Allgemein / SPS Eingänge WIRE_DARKBLUE_0,5 WIRE_DARKBLUE_1,5
blue 24 V DC General / PLC Inputs E63100050 0 E63112069 0
grün SPS Ausgang WIRE_GREEN_0,5
green PLC output E63100053 0
blau / weiß - 24 V DC WIRE_BLUE_WHITE_0,5 WIRE_BLUE_WHITE_1,5
blue / white (GND) E63100055 0 E63114169 0
orange Fremdspannung WIRE_ORANGE_0,5 WIRE_ORANGE_0,75
orange external voltage E63100052 0 E63104069 0
weiß Messung (0-10V, PT100) WIRE_WHITE_0,5
white measuring (0-10V, PT100) E63100054 0 m
gelb Sicherheits Sensorik WIRE_YELLOW_0,75 WIRE_YELLOW_1,5
yellow safety sensors E63103069 0 E63115069 0
violett WIRE_VIOLETT_0,5 WIRE_VIOLETT_0,75
Bremsmodul
violet E63100058 0 E63104269 0
brake module
grau WIRE_GRAY_0,5 WIRE_GRAY_0,75
gray + 48-60 V DC E63100057 0 E63104169 0
braun +10V
brown +10V
grün 0-10V
Analog Kabel (0-10V, PT100)
green 0-10V analogue cable (0-10V, PT100)
weiß 0V
Vorherige Seite white 0V Nächste Seite
1.2 Previous page Next page =/1
Basic REX I Drahtfarben
Änderung
change
Datum
date
Name
name
Bearb.
user Martin Manninger KOENIG MASCHINEN CL600 Stanze+SCHR-WK+RR +MOC + AB wiring colour
Zeichnungsnummer
sheet 2
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
3x400V+N / 50Hz
L011 / 2.0
L012 / 2.0
L013 / 2.0
N / 2.0
1 3 5 N 13 1 3 5 N 13 1 3 5 N 13
F12 F14 F15

16 A N. 14 16 A N. 14 10 A N. 14
2 4 6 2 4 6 2 4 6
E64871630 E64871630 E64871130
/94.5
/100.7
/100.7
E64877030 E64877030 E64877030
E64878030 E64878030 E64878030
E64878030 E64878030 E64878030
E64878130 E64878130 E64878130
E64878130 E64878130 E64878130
1 3 5 1 3 5 1 3 5
K812 K814 K816

2 4 6 /81.2 2 4 6 /81.4 2 4 6 /81.5 2 4 6
Q10
32 A 1 3 5 1 3 5 1 3 5 1 3 5
E63003230
Hauptschalter
E60330030 main switch K813 K815 K817
/81.3 2 4 6 /81.4 2 4 6 /81.6 2 4 6
L021 / 6.0 L031 / 16.0 L041 / 36.0

L022 / 6.0 L032 / 16.0 L042 / 36.0
L023 / 6.0 L033 / 16.0 L043 / 36.0 Stecker
N21 / 6.0 N31 / 16.0 N41 / 36.0 plug
1,5 kW 1,5 kW 1,1 kW

Steht auch bei ausgeschaltetem Hauptschalter unter Spannung
Versorgung Versorgung Versorgung

Antriebe Antriebe Antriebe
Remains energized when main switch is opened
REX Vorgärschrank Abziehgerät

supply supply supply Klemmleisten:
actuation actuation first actuation terminal strips:
REX prover retracting unit X1 = Schaltschrank

electrical cabinet
PE X1_ES = Klemmen Not Aus

terminals emergency OFF
attention!
Achtung!
Achtung! X1_S_REX = Klemmen Sicherheitsschalter REX im X1

attention! terminals safety switch REX in the X1
Schutzeinrichtung Fehlerstrom-Schutzschalter:
X1 L1 L2 L3 N PE X1_S_VGS = Klemmen Sicherheitsschalter VGS
Safety device Ground fault current circuit-breaker:
L1 L2 L3 N PE terminals safety switch VGS

Allstromsensitive Fehlerstrom-Schutzschalter
AC/DC sensitive Ground fault current circuit-breaker
X2 = REX
Fehlerstrom 300 mA
Ground fault current 300 mA REX
X2_ES = Klemmen Not Aus im X2

L1 L2 L3 N PE NORM: EN50178 terminals emergency OFF in the X2
ÖVE-EN 0160
X2_S_REX = Klemmen Sicherheitsschalter REX
6 kW terminals safety switch REX
Einspeisung X5 = Abziehgerät
incoming power retracting unit

=T//2Previous page Next page 2
Basic REX I Einspeisung
Änderung
change
Datum
date
Name
name
Bearb.
user Martin Manninger KOENIG MASCHINEN CL600 Stanze+SCHR-WK+RR +MOC + AB incoming power
Zeichnungsnummer
sheet 1
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
3x400V+N / 50Hz
1.9 / L011 L011 / 3.0

1.9 / L012 L012 / 3.0
1.9 / L013 L013 / 3.0
1.9 / N N / 3.0
Überspannungsableiter
overvoltage arrester
L1 L2 L3
U27 U28 U29

N N N
N 12 14 Ersatzteilnummer für
replacement part number
U26 for
E63795030 PE 11
E63795130
/100.3
E64878030
E64878130 L1 L2 L3 = E63795230
E64878130 N = E63795330
PE
Klemmen 1 - 40 = REX 400V

terminals 1 - 40 = REX 400V
Klemmen 200 - 299 = REX 24V

terminals 200 - 299 = REX 24V
Klemmen 300 - 399 = Vorgärschrank 400 V

terminals 300 - 399 = first prover 400 V
Klemmen 510 - 749 = Digital Eingänge

terminals 510 - 749 = digital Inputs
Klemmen 800 - 829 = Diodenklemme

terminals 800 - 829 = Diode terminal
Klemmen 750 - 799 = Digital Ausgänge

terminals 750 - 799 = digital outputs
Klemmen 850 - 899 = Analoge Eingänge

terminals 850 - 899 = analogs Inputs
Klemmen 2000 - 2097 = Not Aus

terminals 2000 - 2097 = emergency OFF
Klemme 2099 = Reset Taste

terminal 2099 = RESET button
Klemmen 2300 - 2399 = Sicherheitsschalter Vorgärschrank

terminals 2300 - 2399 = safety switch first prover
Klemmen 1000 - 1099 = Start - Stopp Taste

terminals 1000 - 1099 = start - stop button
Klemmen 1100 - 1199 = Verbindungsleitung Fremd Anlage

terminals 1100 - 1199 = connection wire separate plant

1 Previous page Next page 3
Basic REX I Versorgung
Änderung
change
Datum
date
Name
name
Bearb.
user Martin Manninger KOENIG MASCHINEN CL600 Stanze+SCHR-WK+RR +MOC + AB supply
Zeichnungsnummer
sheet 2
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
3x400V+N / 50Hz
2.9 / L011 L011 / 18.0

2.9 / L012 L012 / 18.0
2.9 / L013 L013 / 18.0
2.9 / N N / 18.0
1 N 13 1 N 13 1 N
F30 F31 F35

10 A 2 N. 14 10 A 2 N. 14 10 A 2 N.
E64871030 E64871030 E64871030
/100.6
/100.6
E64877030 E64877030 E64878030
E64878030 E64878130 E64878230
E64878230 E64878230
K810 PE
/81.1 2 N01 / 18.2
L01 / 18.2
COMILINE
Versorgung L N PE
supply T35
10A
230V / 50Hz E65521029
- +
Netzgerät
power supply unit
X1 L06 X1 L07
L07 / 28.0
1 3
F33
25A 24 VDC
30mA IΔ
E64842530
2 4 L06 / 16.0
PE 1
43 43
F37 K812 K814

/78.1 /81.2 44 /81.4 44
2,5 A tr 2
43 43
E62326074
K813 K815
340
341
342
343
X1 X1 X1 X1 /81.3 44 /81.4 44
L11 / 28.0
PE
X1 201 X1 200 X1 50
X2 201 X2 200
PE PE
L PE L07.2 / 83.1
L PE N L PE N
H31 L06.2 / 6.0
E62850078
18 W
X33 X34
N E65017078 E65018078
Steckdose PC Steckdose
Beleuchtung Stanze socket PC für Waage
lighting stamping station

Basic REX I Versorgung
Änderung
change
Datum
date
Name
name
Bearb.
user Martin Manninger KOENIG MASCHINEN CL600 Stanze+SCHR-WK+RR +MOC + AB supply
Zeichnungsnummer
sheet 3
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
3x400V+N / 50Hz
1.3 / L021 L021 / 7.0

1.3 / L022 L022 / 7.0
1.3 / L023 L023 / 7.0
1.3 / N21 N21 / 7.0
1 3 5 13 1 3 5 13
20 Q64 Q66
21
22
23
X1 1,4 A 14 0,28 A 14
E63700657 E63701657
/94.2
/94.3
E63700957 I> I> I> E63700957 I> I> I>
20
21
22
23
X2 2 4 6 REX 2 4 6
L021.2 / 7.0
N21.2 / 7.0
E61 L1 L2 L3 1 3 5 1 3 5
/94.1
1,5 kW
L1 N +24V 8 K962 K963
E61522057 /96.2 2 4 6 /96.3 2 4 6
E61529057 SIEMENS Din3 7 L967.2 / 7.1
E61522457 Micro
REX
master Din2 6
420
RUN 5 L961 / 96.1
C61
47nF
+10VDC 1 E62105013
A62 / 99.2
0-10VDC 3
0V
10 4 A61 / 99.2
11 0V 2
PE
Störung
fault
0V 9
X1 4 5 6 X1 7 8 9
U V W
PE PE
3.8 / L06.2 L06.2 / 7.0

PE
X2 4 5 6 X2 7 8 9
PE
U V W PE U V W PE U V W PE
M M M Option
M61 3
M64 3
M66 3
optionally
/94.1 0,37 kW 0,06 kW
0,75 kW 3x400V 3x400V
3x400V
1 1
2 2
REX Hauptantrieb Schleifmotor Teigabnahmerolle
REX maindrive moulding motor dough discharge roller
Basic REX I Antriebe REX
Änderung
change
Datum
date
Name
name
Bearb.
user Martin Manninger KOENIG MASCHINEN CL600 Stanze+SCHR-WK+RR +MOC + AB actuation REX
Zeichnungsnummer
sheet 6
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
3x400V+N / 50Hz
6.9 / L021 L021

6.9 / L022 L022
6.9 / L023 L023
6.9 / N21 N21
6.2 / L021.2
6.2 / N21.2
6.2 / L967.2 L967.2 / 96.7
E71 L1 L2 L3
/94.4 L1 N +24V 8
0,37 kW
E61520057
E61529057 SIEMENS Din3 7
REX Micro
master Din2 6 L966 / 96.6
420
RUN 5 L965 / 96.5
+10VDC 1
0-10VDC 3
Z2
10 0V 4 R73
10 kΩ Z1
0V E66500530
11 2
E60407030
Störung E60408030
fault REX
0V 9
PE
U V W
6.3 / L06.2 L06.2 / 75.0

PE
PE
U V W PE
M
M71 3
0,18 kW
3x230V
Spreizbandstauber
fingerbeltduster
Basic REX I Stauber
Änderung
change
Datum
date
Name
name
Bearb.
user Martin Manninger KOENIG MASCHINEN CL600 Stanze+SCHR-WK+RR +MOC + AB duster
Zeichnungsnummer
sheet 7
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
3x400V+N / 50Hz
1.4 / L031 L031 / 26.0

1.4 / L032 L032 / 26.0
1.4 / L033 L033 / 26.0
1.4 / N31 N31 / 26.0
1 3 5 13
Q166
0,85 A 14
E63700557
/101.6
E63700957 I> I> I>
2 4 6
E161 L1 L2 L3 1 3 5
/101.5
0,37 kW
L1 N +24V 8 K972
E61520057 /97.2 2 4 6
E61529057 SIEMENS Din3 7 L967 / 26.1
Micro
master Din2 6
420
RUN 5 L971 / 26.1
C162
47nF
+10VDC 1 E62105013
A162 / 99.5
0-10VDC 3
PE
0V
10 4 A161 / 99.5
300
301
302
0V
11 2
PE X1
Störung
fault
0V 9
U V W
3.8 / L06 L06 / 26.0

PE
PE
U V W PE U V W PE
M M
M161 3
M166 3
/101.5 /101.6
0,18 kW 0,25 kW
3x230V 3x400V
1 1
2 2
Antrieb Vorgärschrank Langroller Eingabe

drive first prover long rolling unit infeed unit
Basic REX I Antriebe Vorgärschrank
Änderung
change
Datum
date
Name
name
Bearb.
user Martin Manninger KOENIG MASCHINEN CL600 Stanze+SCHR-WK+RR +MOC + AB actuation first prover
Zeichnungsnummer
sheet 16
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
3x400V+N / 50Hz
3.9 / L011 L011 / 19.0

3.9 / L012 L012 / 19.0
3.9 / L013 L013 / 19.0
3.9 / N N / 19.0
230V / 50Hz
3.2 /L01 L01 / 19.5

1 3 13 3.2 / N01 N01 / 19.5
F181
10 A 2 4 14
E64871030
/101.7
E64877030
E64878130
E64878230
1 3 5 11
K1081 K1082
/108.1 2 4 6 /108.2 12 14
PE
303
304
305
306
X1 X1
R181
1,5 kW
E64300047
MECH
M183 U2 Z2 U1/Z1 PE
Heizung
Gehängetrocknung
heater
swing drying Ventilator
L1081 / 108.1
Gehängetrocknung
fan swing
drying
1
S181
E64300047 2
Gehängetrocknung
swing drying
L181 / 108.1

Basic REX I Gehängetrocknung
Änderung
change
Datum
date
Name
name
Bearb.
user Martin Manninger KOENIG MASCHINEN CL600 Stanze+SCHR-WK+RR +MOC + AB swing drying
Zeichnungsnummer
sheet 18
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
3x400V+N / 50Hz
18.9 / L011 L011

18.9 / L012 L012
18.9 / L013 L013
18.9 / N N
230V / 50Hz
18.9 / L01 L01 / 20.0

18.9 / N01 N01 / 20.0
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
890
891
892
314
315
X1 X1 X1 X1 X1
Klima Vorgärschrank
climate first prover
Basic REX I Klima VGS
Änderung
change
Datum
date
Name
name
Bearb.
user Martin Manninger KOENIG MASCHINEN CL600 Stanze+SCHR-WK+RR +MOC + AB climate VGS
Zeichnungsnummer
sheet 19
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
230V / 50Hz
19.9 / L01 L01 / 36.5

19.9 / N01 N01 / 36.5
11
K1087
/108.7 12 14
316
317
318
319
X1 X1
PE
L PE
H202
2 Stück
2 pieces
N
E62820273
E62820473
Entkeimung
steril lamps
Entkeimung
Vorgärschrank
sterilization
first prover

Basic REX I Entkeimung
Änderung
change
Datum
date
Name
name
Bearb.
user Martin Manninger KOENIG MASCHINEN CL600 Stanze+SCHR-WK+RR +MOC + AB sterilization
Zeichnungsnummer
sheet 20
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
3x400V+N / 50Hz
16.9 / L031 L031 / 27.0

16.9 / L032 L032 / 27.0
16.9 / L033 L033 / 27.0
16.9 / N31 N31 / 27.0
16.2 / L967 L967 / 36.1

16.2 / L971 L971 / 36.1
E261 L1 L2 L3 E264 L1 L2 L3 E267 L1 L2 L3

/104.1 L1 N +24V 8 /104.2 L1 N +24V 8 /104.3 L1 N +24V 8
1,5 kW 0,37 kW 0,37 kW
E61522057 E61520057 E61520057
E61522457 SIEMENS Din3 7 E61529057 SIEMENS Din3 7 E61529057 SIEMENS Din3 7
E61529057 Micro Micro Micro
master Din2 master Din2 master Din2
6 6 L1092 / 109.2 6
420 420 420
RUN RUN RUN
5 5 L1091 / 109.1 5 L1093 / 109.3
C262 C265 C268
47nF 47nF 47nF
+10VDC 1 +10VDC 1 +10VDC 1
E62105013 E62105013 E62105013
A262 / 120.1 A264 / 120.3 A266 / 120.5
0-10VDC 3 0-10VDC 3 0-10VDC 3
0V 0V 0V
10 4 A261 / 120.1 10 4 A263 / 120.3 10 4 A265 / 120.5
11 0V 2 11 0V 2 11 0V 2
PE PE PE
Störung Störung Störung
fault fault fault
0V 9 0V 9 0V 9
U V W U V W U V W
16.2 / L06 L06 / 28.0

PE PE PE
PE
schwarz / grün
yellow - green
black / green
violett / blau
PE PE
violet / blue
brown / red
gelb - grün
braun / rot
schwarz / grün
yellow - green
black / green
violett / blau
violet / blue
brown / red
gelb - grün
braun / rot
U V W PE
M M
M261 3
M264 3
/104.1 /104.2
1,1 kW 0,1 kW M
3x400V 3x230V M267 3
1 1 /104.3
120 °C 0,12 kW
3x230V
2 2
Unterband Oberband
bottom belt top belt
Kalibrierwalze
Vorherige Seite calibrating roller Nächste Seite
Basic REX I Antriebe Formstation
Änderung
change
Datum
date
Name
name
Bearb.
user Martin Manninger KOENIG MASCHINEN CL600 Stanze+SCHR-WK+RR +MOC + AB actuation formingstation
Zeichnungsnummer
sheet 26
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
26.9 / L031 L031

26.9 / L032 L032
26.9 / L033 L033
26.9 / N31 N31
1 3 5 13
Q271
0,35 A 14
E63701657
/104.4
E63700957 I> I> I>
2 4 6
1 3 5
K1095
/109.5 2 4 6
PE
320
321
322
323
324
325
X1 X1
U V W PE
M
M271 3
0,04 kW
3x400V
Stauber Formstation
duster formingstation

Basic REX I Stauber Formstation
Änderung
change
Datum
date
Name
name
Bearb.
user Martin Manninger KOENIG MASCHINEN CL600 Stanze+SCHR-WK+RR +MOC + AB duster formingstation
Zeichnungsnummer
sheet 27
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
3.8 / L11 L11 / 81.8
3.8 / L07 L07 / 75.0

+24VDC
26.9 / L06 L06 / 36.0
M281
40 W
1
X1 400
ELRA +24VDC rot red
X1 401
24VDC 2 Z2
FHD-40 GND schwarz black
X1 402
R283
3 10 kΩ Z1
+10VDC rosa rosa
4
X1 403 E66500530
0-10VDC gelb yellow E60407030
X1 404
Alarm
5
violett violet L281 / 104.6 E60408030
E60425030
6
Enc. A blau blue
7
Enc. B grün green montiert im
X1 405
run
8
braun brown L1097 / 109.7 Schaltschrank X1
X1 406 installed in
brake
9
weiß white L1098 / 109.8 the electrical cabinet X1
10
F/R grau gray
11
24V Enc rot / blau red / blue
Taktrolle
setting roller

Basic REX I Taktrolle
Änderung
change
Datum
date
Name
name
Bearb.
user Martin Manninger KOENIG MASCHINEN CL600 Stanze+SCHR-WK+RR +MOC + AB setting roller
Zeichnungsnummer
sheet 28
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
3x400V+N / 50Hz
1.6 / L041 L041 / 40.0

1.6 / L042 L042 / 40.0
1.6 / L043 L043 / 40.0
1.6 / N41 N41 / 40.0
230V / 50Hz
20.9 / L01 L01 / 41.3

20.9 / N01 N01 / 41.3
26.8 / L967 L967 / 40.1 11 11 11

26.2 / L971 L971 / 40.1 K1114 K1115 K1116
/111.4 12 14 /111.5 12 14 /111.6 12 14
E361 L1 L2 L3 E363 L1 L2 L3
/105.4 L1 N +24V 8 /105.5 L1 N +24V 8
0,37 kW 0,37 kW
E61520057 E61520057
E61529057 SIEMENS Din3 7 E61529057 SIEMENS Din3 7
Micro Micro
master Din2 6
master Din2 6
420 420
RUN RUN
L1111 / 111.1
326
327
328
329
330
331
5 5
C362 C364 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1
47nF 47nF
+10VDC 1 +10VDC 1
E62105013 E62105013
A362 / 121.1 A364 / 121.3 PE PE
0-10VDC 3 0-10VDC 3
0V 0V
10 4 A361 / 121.1 10 4 A363 / 121.3
11 0V 2 11 0V 2
PE PE
Störung Störung
fault fault
0V 9 0V 9
L N
U V W U V W M367 U2 Z2 U1/Z1 PE
M
M366 1~
1
Y368
28.8 / L06 L06 / 40.0 PE 230V 2
PE PE
PE PE
Absaugventilator Wasserventil
U V W PE U V W PE
extraction fan water valve
M M Streugutrückförderer
M361 3
M363 3 seeding material reclaimer
0,06 kW 0,12 kW
3x230V 3x230V
2
Antrieb Mohner Streuer
drive seeder strewer
Basic REX I Mohner
Änderung
change
Datum
date
Name
name
Bearb.
user Martin Manninger KOENIG MASCHINEN CL600 Stanze+SCHR-WK+RR +MOC + AB seeder
Zeichnungsnummer
sheet 36
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
3x400V+N / 50Hz
36.9 / L041 L041 / 41.0

36.9 / L042 L042 / 41.0
36.9 / L043 L043 / 41.0
36.9 / N41 N41 / 41.0
36.4 / L967 L967 / 96.7

36.2 / L971 L971 / 97.1
E401 L1 L2 L3
/103.1 L1 N +24V 8
0,37 kW
E61520057
E61529057 SIEMENS Din3 7
Micro
master Din2 6
420
RUN 5
C401
47nF
+10VDC 1 E62105013
A402 / 120.7
0-10VDC 3
0V
10 4 A401 / 120.7
11 0V 2
PE
Störung
fault
0V 9
U V W
36.5 / L06 L06 / 75.8

PE
PE
U V W PE
M
M401 3
/103.1
0,18 kW
3x230V
1
Abziehbandantrieb
retracting belt drive
Basic REX I Abziehband
Änderung
change
Datum
date
Name
name
Bearb.
user Martin Manninger KOENIG MASCHINEN CL600 Stanze+SCHR-WK+RR +MOC + AB retractingbelt
Zeichnungsnummer
sheet 40
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
3x400V+N / 50Hz
40.9 / L041 L041

40.9 / L042 L042
40.9 / L043 L043
40.9 / N41 N41
230V / 50Hz
36.9 / L01 L01

1 3 5 13 36.9 / N01 N01
Q411
1,93A 14
E63700757
/103.2
E63700957 I> I> I>
2 4 6
1 3 5 1 3 5 53 53
K977 K978 K977 K978

/97.7 2 4 6 /97.8 2 4 6 /97.7 54 /97.8 54
vorwärts abziehen
forward retracting
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
X1 X1 X1 X1
PE
1
X5 X5 7 X5 8
L1 N
G413 ˜
E08300931 - +
˜
- +
U V W PE
-
M
M411 3
Y413
/103.2 M411 +
0,75 kW
3x400V
2 Bremse
Abziehmotor
Abziehmotor brake
retracting motor retracting motor

Basic REX I Abziehmotor
Änderung
change
Datum
date
Name
name
Bearb.
user Martin Manninger KOENIG MASCHINEN CL600 Stanze+SCHR-WK+RR +MOC + AB retracting motor
Zeichnungsnummer
sheet 41
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
28.8 / L07 L07 / 76.0

+24VDC
A1 13
K964
+
+
24V DC
/96.4 A2 14
-
X1_S_REX 146 148
X2_S_REX 146 148
21 31
S758
E60920985 22 32
REX
X2_S_REX 147 149
X1_S_REX 147 149
X1 250
X2 250
V751 L837 / 81.2
- +
K758
24V DC Y11 Y12 Y21 Y22 Y35 Y34 Y32 A1 1
E67106057 Schütz Automatik
1 Kanal 1
channel 1
Kanal 2
channel 2
Kontrolle Start
contactor automatic L+ Eingang
Input
Y751 checking start
27 W 2
Sicherheits
Ausgang 1
Sicherheits
Ausgang 2 SIEMENS
safety
output 1
safety
output 2 3TK2841 M
14 24 A2
X2 251 max. max.
1,5A 1,5A
L758 / 93.8
7.2 / L06.2 L06.2 / 95.1 40.2 / L06 L06 / 76.0
-24VDC -24VDC
Teigkupplung
dough clutch
Sicherheitsschalter
Teigeinzug
safety switch dough
infeed
Basic REX I Ventil / Kupplung REX
Änderung
change
Datum
date
Name
name
Bearb.
user Martin Manninger KOENIG MASCHINEN CL600 Stanze+SCHR-WK+RR +MOC + AB valve / clutch REX
Zeichnungsnummer
sheet 75
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
75.9 / L07 L07 / 77.0

+24VDC
F767
/78.2
2,5 A tr 2
E62326074
K973
13
+
14
-
/97.3
X1 800
V767
- +
Y767
2
X1 801
75.9 / L06 L06 / 77.0

-24VDC
Kupplung
Stanzenstauber
clutch
duster reginamatic

Basic REX I Ventil / Kupplung Gärschrank
Änderung
change
Datum
date
Name
name
Bearb.
user Martin Manninger KOENIG MASCHINEN CL600 Stanze+SCHR-WK+RR +MOC + AB valve / clutch prover
Zeichnungsnummer
sheet 76
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
76.9 / L07 L07 / 78.0

+24VDC
F771
/78.2
2,5 A tr 2
E62326074
schwarz
black
red
rot
D775 1 2
1 3 5 1 3 5 24V
E46420401 +24VDC GND
K1112 K1113 E62097169 RUN 10 schwarz black
/111.2 2 4 6 /111.3 2 4 6 brake 9 weiß white

FYD 66SD3
F/R 8 grau gray
heben absenken SERVEX
GND 7 violett violet
raise lower
6 blau blue
5 grün green
Z2
R777
10 kΩ Z1
gelb yellow E66500530
4
E60407030
E60408030
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
X1 802 X1 803
orange orange
braun brown
violett violet
K971 K1114.1
gelb yellow
grün green
weiß white
grau gray
blau blue
A1 A2
13 13
rot red
+
M
M771 14 14
24V - -
M775 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
/97.2 /111.4
Servex Motor
Servex motor
76.9 / L06 L06 / 78.0

-24VDC Hubmotor Antrieb Befeuchterwalze
Befeuchterwalze drive dampening roller
lifting
motor dampening roller

Basic REX I Befeuchterwalze
Änderung
change
Datum
date
Name
name
Bearb.
user Martin Manninger KOENIG MASCHINEN CL600 Stanze+SCHR-WK+RR +MOC + AB dampening roller
Zeichnungsnummer
sheet 77
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
77.9 / L07 L07 / 80.0

+24VDC
77.9 / L06 L06 / 80.9
3 3 3 3 3 3
F37 F767 F771 F1023 F1036 F1056

/3.7 4 /76.7 4 /77.1 4 /102.3 4 /103.6 4 /105.6 4
L788 / 100.5
Kontakt der Sicherung Klemmen bei Störung geschlossen

contact the fuse terminals at fault closed
S7_R0
24VDC L+ M
Versorgung
SPS
supply
PLC

Basic REX I Sicherung Klemmen
Änderung
change
Datum
date
Name
name
Bearb.
user Martin Manninger KOENIG MASCHINEN CL600 Stanze+SCHR-WK+RR +MOC + AB fuse terminals
Zeichnungsnummer
sheet 78
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
78.9 / L07 L07 / 81.0

+24VDC
Not Aus
emergency OFF
L806 / 100.1
X1_ES 2000 2002 2004

X2_ES 100 102 104
REX 11 21 31
S801
E60400230 12 22 32
E60405130
E60405130
E60405130 X2_ES 101 103 105
E60405230
E60410130
X1_ES 2001 2003 2005
REX RESET
X1_ES 2006 2008 2010 X1_ES 2037 2039 2041
Taste L905 / 90.4
X5 381 383 385 RESET
Eingabe Abziehband button
infeed unit 11 21 31 retractingbelt 11 21 31 13
S801.1 S803.2 S808

E60400230 12 22 32 E60400230 12 22 32 E60400430 14
E60405130 E60405630 E60405030
E60405130 E60405630 E60405030
E60405130 E60405630 X5 380 382 384 E60405230
E60405230 E60410130 E60415230
E60410130
X1_ES 2007 2009 2011
Abziehgerät
X1_ES 2036 2038 2040 X1_ES 2099
retracting unit
X1_ES 2012 2014 2016 X1_ES 2031 2033 2035 L809 / 100.4
Ausgabe
distribution 11 21 31 21
S801.2 K810
E60400230 12 22 32 /81.1 22
E60405630
E60405630
E60405630
E60410130
X1_ES 2013 2015 2017 X1_ES 2030 2032 2034 K808
24V DC Y11 Y12 Y21 Y22 Y35 Y34 Y32 A1 1
Kanal 1
channel 1
Kanal 2
channel 2
Kontrolle Start
Input
checking start
X1_ES 2018 2020 2022 X1_ES 2025 2027 2029
Formstation
formingstation 11 21 31
Sicherheits
Ausgang 1
Sicherheits
Ausgang 2 SIEMENS
S801.3
E60400230 12 22 32
safety
output 1
safety
output 2 3TK2841 M
14 24 A2
E60405130 max. max.
E60405130 1,5A 1,5A
E60405130
E60405230
E60410130
X1_ES 2019 2021 2023 X1_ES 2024 2026 2028
L808 / 81.1
L807 / 83.9 78.9 / L06 L06 / 81.0
Steuerspannung
control voltage
Not Aus
emergency OFF

Basic REX I Not Aus
Änderung
change
Datum
date
Name
name
Bearb.
user Martin Manninger KOENIG MASCHINEN CL600 Stanze+SCHR-WK+RR +MOC + AB emergency OFF
Zeichnungsnummer
sheet 80
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
80.9 / L07 L07 / 83.8

+24VDC
28.8 / L11
X1 804
V818
- +
L847 / 84.7
80.8 / L808 L808 / 100.2 75.9 / L837 L837 / 83.7 L838 / 83.7 L848 / 84.7
Y818
V810 V812 V813 V814 V815 V816 V817 2
E64902057 E64902357 E64902357 E64902357 E64902357 E64902357 E64902357
- + - + - + - + - + - + - +
A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1
K810 K812 K813 K814 K815 K816 K817

24V DC A2 24V DC A2 24V DC A2 24V DC A2 24V DC A2 24V DC A2 24V DC A2 X1 805
80.9 / L06 L06 / 83.9

230V Antriebe REX Vorgärschrank Abziehgerät Sicherheitsventil Pneumatik
230V actuation first prover retracting unit safety-valve pneumatic
E64900357 E64900457 E64900457 E64900457 E64900457 E64900457 E64900457

1 2 /3.1 1 2 /1.2 1 2 /1.2 1 2 /1.3 1 2 /1.3 1 2 /1.5 1 2 /1.5
3 4 3 4 /1.2 3 4 /1.2 3 4 /1.4 3 4 /1.4 3 4 /1.5 3 4 /1.5
5 6 5 6 /1.2 5 6 /1.2 5 6 /1.4 5 6 /1.4 5 6 /1.5 5 6 /1.5
13 14 13 14 /94.6 13 14 /94.6 13 14 /100.8 13 14 /100.8 13 14 /100.8 13 14 /100.8
21 22 /80.8 21 22 /83.8 22 21 /83.8 21 22 /84.8 22 21 /84.8 21 22 /84.8 22 21 /84.8
31 32 31 32 31 32 31 32 31 32 31 32 31 32
43 44 43 44 /3.7 43 44 /3.7 43 44 /3.8 43 44 /3.8 43 44 43 44
Steuerspannung
control voltage
Basic REX I Steuerspannung Versorgung
Änderung
change
Datum
date
Name
name
Bearb.
user Martin Manninger KOENIG MASCHINEN CL600 Stanze+SCHR-WK+RR +MOC + AB control voltage supply
Zeichnungsnummer
sheet 81
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
3.8 / L07.2 L07.2 / 94.1 81.8 / L07 L07 / 84.1
X1_S_REX 122 124

X2_S_REX 120 122 124
13 21 31
Tür hinten S934
E60931861
door back E60930161 14 22 32
REX
X2_S_REX 121 123 125

X1_S_REX 121
L934 / 93.4
X2_S_REX 126 128 130
13 21 31
Tür vorne S935
E60931861
door in front E60930161 14 22 32
REX
X2_S_REX 127 129 131

X1_S_REX 127
L935 / 93.5
21
K812 80.8 / L807 L807 / 84.9

Tür X2_S_REX 132 134 136 /81.2 22
Bedienseite 22
Auswiegebereich S936
13 21 31
K813
/81.3 21
E60931861
door E60930161 14 22 32
REX
operationside
divider X2_S_REX 133 135 137 K838
24V DC Y11 Y12 Y21 Y22 Y35 Y34 Y32 A1 1
X1_S_REX 133
L936 / 93.6 Kanal 1
channel 1
Kanal 2
channel 2
Kontrolle Start
Input
checking start
Tür X2_S_REX 138 140 142
Antriebsseite
Sicherheits
Ausgang 1
Sicherheits
Ausgang 2 SIEMENS
Auswiegebereich S937
13 21 31 safety
output 1
safety
output 2 3TK2841 M
E60931861 14 24 A2
door E60930161 14 22 32
max. max.
REX 1,5A 1,5A
drive side
X2_S_REX 139 141 143
divider
X1_S_REX 139 141 143
L937 / 93.7
81.2 / L837 81.8 / L06 L06 / 84.9
81.3 / L838
Sicherheitsschalter
REX
safety switch REX
Basic REX I Sicherheitsschalter REX
Änderung
change
Datum
date
Name
name
Bearb.
user Martin Manninger KOENIG MASCHINEN CL600 Stanze+SCHR-WK+RR +MOC + AB safety switch REX
Zeichnungsnummer
sheet 83
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
83.9 / L07 L07 / 90.0
X1_S_VGS 2300 2302 2304 X1_S_VGS 2355 2357 2359 X1_S_VGS 2360 2362 2364
Scheibe
Bedienseite
13 21 31
rechts S1011
E60931861
window E60930161 14 22 32
MECH
operationside
right
X1_S_VGS 2301 2303 2305 X1_S_VGS 2354 2356 2358 X1_S_VGS 2361 2363 2365
L07.5 / 103.1
X1_S_VGS 2306 2308 2310 X1_S_VGS 2349 2351 2353 Sicherheitsschalter 2368 2370
Scheibe Abziehgerät X5 350 352 354
Bedienseite vorne
13 21 31 13 21 31
S1011.1
links safety switch retracting S1055 21
E60931861 E60920985
window E60930161 14 22 32 unit inretracting
Abziehgerät 14 22 32 K814
MECH unit
operationside front /81.4 22
X5 351 353 355 22
left
X1_S_VGS 2307 2309 2311 X1_S_VGS 2348 2350 2352 X1_S_VGS 2367 K815
L1035 / 103.5 /81.4 21
L1051 / 105.1 21
X1_S_VGS 2312 2314 2316 X1_S_VGS 2343 2345 2347 Sicherheitsschalter K816 83.9 / L807
Scheibe Abziehgerät X5 356 358 360 /81.5 22
Triebseite Sicherheitsschalter 2 hinten 22
S1011.2
13 21 31
Formstation S1051.1
14 22 32 13 21 31
K817
links
E60931861 E60931861
safety switch retracting S1013
E60920985
/81.6 21
window E60930161 14 22 32 safety switch 2 E60930161 13 21 31 unitretracting
Abziehgerät 14 22 32
MECH MECH unit
driveside formingstation back
left X5 357 359 361 K848
X1_S_VGS 24V DC Y11 Y12 Y21 Y22 Y35 Y34 Y32 A1 1
X1_S_VGS 2313 2315 2317 X1_S_VGS 2342 2344 2346 2372
L1013 / 101.3 Kanal 1
channel 1
Kanal 2
channel 2
Kontrolle Start
Input
checking start
X1_S_VGS 2318 2320 2322 X1_S_VGS 2337 2339 2341 Sicherheitsschalter

Scheibe Schmutzlade 1 X5 362 364 366
Triebseite Sicherheitsschalter 1 Abziehgerät

Sicherheits
Ausgang 1
Sicherheits
Ausgang 2 SIEMENS
rechtsS1011.3
13 21 31
Formstation S1051
14 22 32
safety switch dirt S1014
13 21 31 safety
output 1
safety
output 2 3TK2841 M
E60931861 E60931861 E60935061 14 24 A2
window E60930161 14 22 32 safety switch 1 E60930161 13 21 31 batten 1 retracting Abziehgerät
E60935161 14 22 32
max. max.
MECH MECH 1,5A 1,5A
driveside formingstation unitretracting unit
X5 363 365 367
right
X1_S_VGS 2319 2321 2323 X1_S_VGS 2336 2338 2340 X1_S_VGS 2373
L1011 / 101.1 L1014 / 101.4
L1012 / 101.2 81.5 / L847 83.9 / L06 L06 / 90.0
Sicherheitsschalter X5 368 370 372 81.6 / L848
X1_S_VGS 2324 2326 2328 X1_S_VGS 2331 2333 2335 Schmutzlade 2
Scheibe
Stanze
Klappe
Stanze
Abziehgerät S958
E60935061
safety switch dirt E60935161
13 21 31
Sicherheitsschalter
13 21 31 14 22 32
window S1012 flap S1012.1
14 22 32
E60931861
stamping station E60930161 14 22 32
E60931861
stamping station E60930161 13 21 31
unit
Abziehgerät
batten 2 retractingretracting unit
X5 369 371 373
Vorgärschrank
MECH MECH
X1_S_VGS 2325 2327 2329 X1_S_VGS 2330 2332 2334

X1_S_VGS 2374 2369 2371
L957 / 95.7 safety switch first
prover
Basic REX I Sicherheitsschalter VGS
Änderung
change
Datum
date
Name
name
Bearb.
user Martin Manninger KOENIG MASCHINEN CL600 Stanze+SCHR-WK+RR +MOC + AB safety switch VGS
Zeichnungsnummer
sheet 84
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
84.9 / L07 L07 / 92.0

+24VDC
84.9 / L06 L06 / 93.0
X1 500 X1 501 X1 503 X1 504
80.8 / L905
L906 / 96.8
E904 E907
E65235657 24V 0V E65235657 24V 0V
DC DC
TP177B-C TP177B-C
Tableau Tableau
CL Formstation
MPI=5 MPI=6
X1 MPI PLC IF 1B PLC IF 1B
X900 X904 X906

E65050157 R on E65050157 R on E65050157 R on
on on on
off off off
off off
off
Abschlusswiderstand Abschlusswiderstand Abschlusswiderstand
terminating resistor terminating resistor terminating resistor
ON: Ende MPI Profibus Kabel ON: Ende MPI Profibus Kabel ON: Ende MPI Profibus Kabel
SH A1 B1 A2 B2 SH ON: end MPI Profibus cable SH A1 B1 A2 B2 SH ON: end MPI Profibus cable SH A1 B1 A2 B2 SH ON: end MPI Profibus cable
OFF: Steckanschluss für PC OFF: 2. Tableau OFF: 2. Tableau

OFF: plug-in connection for PC OFF: 2. control panel OFF: 2. control panel
Stecker bei SPS Stecker bei Tableau Stecker bei Tableau

plug at PLC plug at control panel plug at control panel
rot
red
MPI Profibus Kabel

MPI Profibus cable
grün
green
rot
red
MPI Profibus Kabel

MPI Profibus cable
grün
green
Basic REX I Bedientableau
Änderung
change
Datum
date
Name
name
Bearb.
user Martin Manninger KOENIG MASCHINEN CL600 Stanze+SCHR-WK+RR +MOC + AB control panel
Zeichnungsnummer
sheet 90
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Vorgärschrank
first prover
90.9 / L07 L07 / 93.0

+24VDC
X1 1000
13 21
Eingabe S921 S921
infeed unit .2 14 .1 22
E60402030
E60405030
E60405130 X1 1001 X1 1002
E60405230
X1 1003
13 21
Ausgabe S921.1 S921.1
distribution .2 14 .1 22
E60402030
E60405530
E60405630 X1 1004 X1 1005
E60422330
X1 1006
13 21
Bedientableau S921.2 S921.2
Formstation .2 14 .1 22
E60402030
control panel E60405030
E60405130 X1 1007 X1 1008
formingstation E60405230 X1 1009
X1 1010 X1 1011
X1 1012
X5 304
Abziehband
retractingbelt
13 21
S921.5 S921.5
.2 14 .1 22
E60402030
E60405530
E60405630 X5 305 X5 306
E60422630
AB
X1 1013 X1 1014
L921 / 102.1 L922 / 102.2

Basic REX I Tastatur
Änderung
change
Datum
date
Name
name
Bearb.
user Martin Manninger KOENIG MASCHINEN CL600 Stanze+SCHR-WK+RR +MOC + AB keyboard
Zeichnungsnummer
sheet 92
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
92.9 / L07 L07 / 94.0

+24VDC
90.9 / L06 L06 / 94.0
bei Störung = bei Störung = bei Störung = bei Störung = bei Störung =
Eingang ein Eingang ein Eingang ein Eingang ein Eingang ein
at fault = Input at fault = Input at fault = Input at fault = Input at fault = Input
on on on on on
83.2 / L934 83.2 / L935 83.2 / L936 83.2 / L937 75.8 / L758
Achtung!
attention!
nicht verwendete Eingänge
not used Inputs
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
E124.0 E124.1 E124.2 E124.3 E124.4 E124.5 E124.6 E124.7
X2
1 S7-313C Eingangskarte Stecker
+ inputcard plug
24VDC Rack 0
Tür hinten Tür Sicherheitsklappe

door back Bedienseite Teigeinzug
door safety flap dough
operationside infeed
Tür vorne Tür
door in front Antriebsseite
door
drive side

Basic REX I Digital Eingänge
Änderung
change
Datum
date
Name
name
Bearb.
user Martin Manninger KOENIG MASCHINEN CL600 Stanze+SCHR-WK+RR +MOC + AB digital Inputs
Zeichnungsnummer
sheet 93
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
93.8 / L07 L07 / 95.0

+24VDC
93.8 / L06 L06 / 95.0
83.2 / L07.2 L07.2 / 95.1
X2 200 13 13 X2 200
F12 K812
1 /1.2 14 /81.2 14
M61
/6.1 2
13 13 21
K813 S947 S947

/81.3 14 .8 14 .7 22
E60402030 REX
X2 223 E60405030
E60405130
E60405230
REX
10 13 13 10
E61 Q64 Q66 E71

/6.1 11 14 14 /7.0 11
X2 224 X2 227 X2 203 X2 204
X1 224 X1 227 X1 203 X1 204
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
E125.0 E125.1 E125.2 E125.3 E125.4 E125.5 E125.6 E125.7
S7-313C
Rack 0
Eingangskarte
inputcard
Stecker
plug X2 -
20
-
REX Hauptantrieb Teigabnahmerolle Versorgung Start

REX maindrive dough discharge roller Antriebe start
REX Sicherheitsrelais
Schleifmotor Spreizbandstauber supply
moulding motor fingerbeltduster REX
actuation safety-relay Stopp
REX REX stop

Änderung
change
Datum
date
Name
name
Bearb.
Zeichnungsnummer
sheet 94
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
94.8 / L07 L07 / 96.0

+24VDC
94.8 / L06 L06 / 96.0
94.7 / L07.2 L07.2
75.2 / L06.2 L06.2
X2 200 X2 200 X2 200 X2 200 X2 200 X2 200

X2 201 X2 201 X2 201 X2 201 X2 201 X2 201
X1 510
br bl br bl br bl br bl br bl
+ - + - + - + - + -
S951 S952 S953 S955 S956
E60904145 E60904145 E60904145 E60904145 E60904145
E60903645 E60903745 E60903645 E60903745 E60903645
E60903945 sw REX sw REX sw Option sw REX sw
REX optionally
X2 212 X2 213 X2 210 X2 211 X2 214 X2 215

X1 511
bei Störung =
X1 212 X1 213 X1 210 X1 211 X1 214 X1 215
Eingang ein
at fault = Input
on
84.6 / L957
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29
E126.0 E126.1 E126.2 E126.3 E126.4 E126.5 E126.6 E126.7
S7-313C
Rack 0
Eingangskarte
inputcard
Stecker
plug X1 -
30
1:1 Impuls Teigfühler Teigabnahmerolle

Schieberstopp Niveau nieder dough discharge roller Sicherheits
1:1 pulse dough sensor Thermostat
slider stop level low Verdampfer
Schieberstopp 2 Teigfühler Spreizbandstauber + Heizung
slider stop 2 Niveau hoch fingerbeltduster safety
dough sensor thermostat
level high humidifier +
Sicherheitsschalter heater
Schmutzlade 2
Abziehgerät
safety switch dirt
batten 2 retracting
Vorherige Seite unit Nächste Seite
Änderung
change
Datum
date
Name
name
Bearb.
Zeichnungsnummer
sheet 95
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
95.8 / L07 L07 / 97.0

+24VDC
21 30
+
S7-313C
Rack 0
Ausgangskarte
output card
Stecker
plug X2 -
+ A124.0 A124.1 A124.2 A124.3 A124.4 A124.5 A124.6 A124.7 -
24VDC
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29
40.2 / L967
X1 232
X1 233 X1 235 X1 234
X2 232
X2 233 X2 235 X2 234
6.2 / L961 7.2 / L965 7.2 / L966 7.2 / L967.2
REX Hauptmotor Stauber RESET

REX main motor Spreizband Ausgang X1 750
duster RESET
finger belt Stauber output
Gegenlauf E62105013
47nF
duster C968
antirotation
H968
E60460030 2
E60460130
Option
optionally
V962 V963
A1 13
K964 +
+
E64902057 E64902057 90.5 / L906
- + - +
24V DC
/75.1 A2 14
A1 A1
E61010048 - X1 751
K962 K963
24V DC A2 24V DC A2
Option
optionally
95.8 / L06 L06 / 97.0
Schleifmotor Teigeinzug Hupe

moulding motor dough infeed Störung
horn
E64901057 E64901057
fault
1 2 /6.4 1 2 /6.6
3 4 /6.4 3 4 /6.6
5 6 /6.4 5 6 /6.6
13 14 13 14
Teigabnahmerolle
dough discharge roller

Basic REX I Digital Ausgänge
Änderung
change
Datum
date
Name
name
Bearb.
user Martin Manninger KOENIG MASCHINEN CL600 Stanze+SCHR-WK+RR +MOC + AB digital outputs
Zeichnungsnummer
sheet 96
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
96.8 / L07 L07 / 98.0

+24VDC
31 40
S7-313C
Rack 0
Ausgangskarte
output card
Stecker
plug X2
+ A125.0 A125.1 A125.2 A125.3 A125.4 A125.5 A125.6 A125.7 -
24VDC
32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
40.2 / L971
Antrieb
Vorgärschrank
Unterband
Abziehband
drive
first prover
bottom belt X1 806 X1 808 X1 810
retractingbelt
V974 V975 V976

22 22
- + - + - +
K978 K977
.8 21 .7 21
A1 13
K971
+
24V DC 1 1 1
/77.7 A2 14
E61010048 - Y974 Y975 Y976
2 2 2
V972 V977 V978

E64902057 E64902057 E64902057
- + - + - +
1
A1 13
K973
+
A1 X1 807 X1 809 X1 811 A1 A1
P971 h K972 24V DC

/76.7 A2 14
K977 K978
E60365065 24V DC A2 - 24V DC A2 24V DC A2
E61010048
E64901557
2
96.8 / L06 L06 / 98.0
vorwärts abziehen
Antrieb Kupplung Bedienseite Triebseite Verschiebeeinrichtung forward retracting
Vorgärschrank Stanzenstauber operationside driveside adjustment equipment Abziehmotor
drive clutch retracting motor
first prover E64901057 duster reginamatic --> --> E64900957
E64901157
E64900957
E64901157
1 2 /16.6 Triebseite Bedienseite 1 2 /41.1 1 2 /41.2
3 4 /16.6 3 4 /41.1 3 4 /41.2
5 6 /16.6
driveside operationside 5 6 /41.1 5 6 /41.2
13 14 Schneidevorrichtung 22 21 .8 22 21 .7
53 54 /41.3 53 54 /41.4
Langroller cutting device 61 62 61 62
Eingabe
long rolling
unit infeed unit
Änderung
change
Datum
date
Name
name
Bearb.
Zeichnungsnummer
sheet 97
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
97.8 / L07 L07 / 99.0

+24VDC
97.8 / L06 L06 / 99.0
X1 850 X1 851
X1 852 X1 853 X1 854 X1 855
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
0-10 VDC
V I C V I C V I C V I C
Analogkarte
PEW 752 PEW 754 PEW 756 PEW 758
analog-card
Rack 0 S7-313C
Stecker
plug X1

Basic REX I Analoge Eingänge
Änderung
change
Datum
date
Name
name
Bearb.
user Martin Manninger KOENIG MASCHINEN CL600 Stanze+SCHR-WK+RR +MOC + AB analogs Inputs
Zeichnungsnummer
sheet 98
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
98.8 / L07 L07 / 100.0

+24VDC
98.8 / L06 L06 / 100.0
S7-313C Rack 0 Analogkarte

analog-card
Stecker
plug X1
R AI4 V A V A MANA
PEW 760 PAW 752 0-10 VDC PAW 754 MANA
14 15 16 17 18 19 20
X1 856
6.2 / A62 16.2 / A162
grün
green
REX Hauptantrieb
REX maindrive
weiß 16.2 / A161
white X1 857
6.2 / A61
PE Antrieb
3x0,25 mm² Vorgärschrank
E62053569
drive
first prover

Basic REX I Analoge Ausgänge
Änderung
change
Datum
date
Name
name
Bearb.
user Martin Manninger KOENIG MASCHINEN CL600 Stanze+SCHR-WK+RR +MOC + AB analogs outputs
Zeichnungsnummer
sheet 99
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
99.8 / L07 L07 / 101.0

+24VDC
99.8 / L06 L06 / 101.0
11 13 13 13
U26 F30 F14 K814

/2.6 12 14 /3.0 14 /1.3 14 /81.4 14
13 13 13
F31 F15 K815

/3.1 14 /1.5 14 /81.4 14
13
K816
/81.5 14
13
K817
/81.6 14
Kontakt der Sicherungsklemme

bei Störung geschlossen
contact the Fused terminal at
fault closed
80.8 / L806 81.1 / L808 80.8 / L809 78.9 / L788
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
E0.0 E0.1 E0.2 E0.3 E0.4 E0.5 E0.6 E0.7
1 SM321 Eingangskarte
+ inputcard
24VDC Rack 0 Steckplatz 4 slot / module 4
Not Aus Überspannungsableiter Sicherungsklemme Versorgung 230V Sicherheitsrelais

emergency OFF overvoltage arrester Fused terminal supply 230V Vorgärschrank
Steuerspannung RESET Taste safety-relay first
control voltage RESET button prover
Versorgung
Antriebe
Vorgärschrank
Formstation
Abziehgerät
supply
actuation first
prover
99 Previous page formingstation Next page 101
Datum 01.02.2013 Anlagenbezeichnung Seitenbeschreibung retracting unit
Änderung
change
Datum
date
Name
name
Bearb.
Zeichnungsnummer
sheet 100
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
100.8 / L07 L07 / 102.0

+24VDC
100.8 / L06 L06 / 102.0
X1 512 X1 514
1 1 13
M161 M166 F181

/16.1 2 /16.6 2 /18.1 14
X1 513 X1 515
10 13
E161 Q166
bei Störung = bei Störung = bei Störung = bei Störung = /16.0 11 14
Eingang ein Eingang ein Eingang ein Eingang ein
at fault = Input at fault = Input at fault = Input at fault = Input
on on on on
84.2 / L1011 84.4 / L1012 84.6 / L1013 84.6 / L1014
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
E1.0 E1.1 E1.2 E1.3 E1.4 E1.5 E1.6 E1.7
SM321 Eingangskarte 20
-
inputcard -
Rack 0 Steckplatz 4 slot / module 4
Scheiben Sicherheitsschalter Antrieb Heizung

Vorgärschrank Abziehgerät Vorgärschrank Gehängetrocknung
windows hinten drive heater
first prover safety switch retracting first prover swing drying
unit
Sicherheitsschalter Sicherheitsschalter Langroller Leitungsschutzschalter
back Verdampfer
Stanze Schmutzlade 1 Eingabe
Heizung
safety switch stamping Abziehgerät long rolling Miniature circuit-breaker
station safety switch dirt unit infeed unit humidifier
heater
batten 1 retracting
unit

Änderung
change
Datum
date
Name
name
Bearb.
Zeichnungsnummer
sheet 101
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
101.8 / L07 L07 / 103.0
101.8 / L06 L06 / 103.0

1
F1023
/78.2
2,5 A tr 2
E62326074 L1023 / 104.1
516
517
521
522
525
526
X1 X1 X1
br bl br bl br bl br bl/pk br bl br bl
+ - + - + - + - + - + -
S1023 S1024 S1025 S1026 S1027 S1027.1
E60904145 E60904145 E60904145 E62906044 E60904145 E60904145
E60903645 E60903645 E60903645 E62906144 E60903645 E60903645
1 4
sw sw sw E62900744 sw sw sw
S1028 P
3
X1 518 X1 519 X1 520 X1 523 X1 524 X1 527
92.1 / L921 92.2 / L922
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29
E2.0 E2.1 E2.2 E2.3 E2.4 E2.5 E2.6 E2.7
SM321 Eingangskarte
Rack 0 inputcard Steckplatz 4 slot / module 4
Start Stopp Positionsschalter Teigkontrolle Kontrolle

start stop Stanze lang Stanze Druckluft
position switch dough check checking
Vorgärschrank stamping station long stamping station pressure air
first prover
1 : 1 Referenzimpuls Positionsschalter Drucktassenkontrolle
Stanze Stanze rund pressure swing control
1 : 1 reference puls position switch
stamping station stamping station round

Änderung
change
Datum
date
Name
name
Bearb.
Zeichnungsnummer
sheet 102
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
102.8 / L07 L07 / 104.0

+24VDC
102.8 / L06 L06 / 104.0
1
F1036
/78.3
2,5 A tr 2
E62326074
300 532
301 533
X1
X5
84.6 / L07.5
1 1 br bl/pk br bl br bl
M401 M411 13 13
+ - + - + -
/40.1 2 /41.1 2 S1033 S1034 S1036 S1037 S1038
E60900261 14 E60400330 14 E62906044 E60904145 E60904145
Abziehgerät E60405530 E62906144 E60903645 E60903645
retracting unit E60407030 E62900744 sw Abziehgerät sw Abziehgerät sw
E60408030 Abziehgerät retracting unit retracting unit
Abziehgerät retracting unit
X5 316 X5 317 X5 314 retracting unit
X5 315 X5 309 X5 310 X5 311
bei Störung =
X1 528 X1 529 X1 530 X1 531 X1 534 X1 535 X1 536
Eingang ein
at fault = Input
10 13 on
E401 Q411 84.6 / L1035

/40.0 11 14
32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
E3.0 E3.1 E3.2 E3.3 E3.4 E3.5 E3.6 E3.7
inputcard -
Abziehbandmotor Blechkontrolle ohne Abziehen Abziehen

retracting belt motor tray control Blechkontrolle Start hinten
Abziehmotor without retracting retracting
retracting motor tray control start Abziehen back
Sicherheitsschalter
vorne Vorne
safety switch in retracting
front in front
Abziehgerät
retracting unit
Änderung
change
Datum
date
Name
name
Bearb.
Zeichnungsnummer
sheet 103
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
103.8 / L07 L07 / 105.0

+24VDC
103.8 / L06 L06 / 105.0
102.8 / L1023
544
545
X1 538 X1 540 X1 542 X1
orange orange
1 orange orange
br bl br bl
M261 M264 M267
/26.1 2 /26.4 gelb /26.7 gelb
+ - + -
yellow yellow
S1047 S1048
E60904145 E60904145
E60903745 E60903745
sw sw
X1 539 X1 541 X1 543
X1 546 X1 547
10 10 10 13
E261 E264 E267 Q271 bei Störung =

Eingang ein
/26.0 11 /26.3 11 /26.6 11 14 at fault = Input
on
28.2 / L281
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
E4.0 E4.1 E4.2 E4.3 E4.4 E4.5 E4.6 E4.7
1 SM323 Eingangskarte
+ inputcard
24VDC Rack 0 Steckplatz 5 slot / module 5
Antrieb Antrieb Störung Taktrolle

Unterband Kalibrierwalze Taktrolle unten
drive drive fault setting
bottom belt calibrating roller setting roller Taktrolle roller down
Antrieb Stauber oben
Oberband Formstation setting
drive top duster roller top
belt formingstation

Änderung
change
Datum
date
Name
name
Bearb.
Zeichnungsnummer
sheet 104
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
104.8 / L07 L07 / 106.0

+24VDC
104.8 / L06 L06 / 106.0
1
F1056
548
549
556
557
X1 X1 /78.3
2,5 A tr 2
E62326074
551
552
X1
br bl
+ -
S1052 br bl br bl
E60904145 10 10
E60903745 br bl/pk
sw E361 E363 + - + - + -
/36.0 11 /36.3 11 S1056 S1057 S1058
E62900644 E60904145 E60904145
MOC sw E60903645 E60903645
MOC sw MOC sw
X1 550 X1 558
X1 553 X1 554 X1 555
bei Störung =
Eingang ein
at fault = Input
on
84.4 / L1051
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
E5.0 E5.1 E5.2 E5.3 E5.4 E5.5 E5.6 E5.7
inputcard -
Sicherheitsschalter 2 Antrieb Streuer Teigkontrolle Befeuchterwalze

Formstation Mohner strewer Mohner eingeschoben
safety switch 2 drive dough check dampening roller
formingstation Formstation seeder seeder in position
Druckbrett Befeuchterwalze
eingeschoben oben
formingstation dampening roller
pressure top
board in position

Änderung
change
Datum
date
Name
name
Bearb.
Zeichnungsnummer
sheet 105
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
105.8 / L07 L07 / 107.0

+24VDC
105.8 / L06 L06 / 107.0
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29
E6.0 E6.1 E6.2 E6.3 E6.4 E6.5 E6.6 E6.7
SM321 Eingangskarte
Rack 0 inputcard Steckplatz 5 slot / module 5

Änderung
change
Datum
date
Name
name
Bearb.
Zeichnungsnummer
sheet 106
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
106.8 / L07 L07 / 108.0

+24VDC
106.8 / L06 L06 / 108.0
32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
E7.0 E7.1 E7.2 E7.3 E7.4 E7.5 E7.6 E7.7
inputcard -

Änderung
change
Datum
date
Name
name
Bearb.
Zeichnungsnummer
sheet 107
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
107.8 / L07 L07 / 109.0

+24VDC
1 10
SM322 Ausgangskarte Steckplatz 6 slot / module 6
+ Rack 0 output card -
+ A8.0 A8.1 A8.2 A8.3 A8.4 A8.5 A8.6 A8.7 -
24VDC
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
X1 752 X1 754 X1 756
18.1 / L1081
18.1 / L181
X1 753 X1 755 X1 757
V1081
E64902057
- +
A1 A1 A1
K1081 K1082 K1087

24V DC A2 24V A2 24V A2
107.8 / L06 L06 / 109.0

Heizung Ventilator Heizung Verdampfer Ventilator Frischluftventilator Entkeimung
heater fan heater humidifier Vorgärschrank fresh air sterilization
Gehängetrocknung fan first fan
prover
swing drying
E64901057 E61021548 E61021548
1 2 /18.1 14 14
3 4 /18.1 12 11 /18.3 12 11 /20.2
5 6 /18.1
13 14
Klima / Ventilator Vorgärschrank

climate / fan first prover
Änderung
change
Datum
date
Name
name
Bearb.
Zeichnungsnummer
sheet 108
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
108.8 / L07 L07 / 110.0

+24VDC
11 20
+ A9.0 A9.1 A9.2 A9.3 A9.4 A9.5 A9.6 A9.7 -
24VDC
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
26.5 / L1091 26.5 / L1092 26.8 / L1093 28.2 / L1097 28.2 / L1098
Freigabe Gegenlauf Freigabe Gegenlauf Freigabe Bremse

antirotation
enable antirotation enable Taktrolle Taktrolle
Oberband Kalibrierwalze enable brake
Formstation calibrating roller setting roller setting roller
top belt
formingstation
V1095
E64902057
- +
A1
K1095
24V DC A2
108.8 / L06 L06 / 110.0
Formstation
formingstation
E64901057
1 2 /27.1
3 4 /27.1
5 6 /27.1
13 14
Stauber
Formstation
duster
Vorherige Seite formingstation Nächste Seite
Änderung
change
Datum
date
Name
name
Bearb.
Zeichnungsnummer
sheet 109
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
109.8 / L07 L07 / 111.0

+24VDC
21 30
+ A10.0 A10.1 A10.2 A10.3 A10.4 A10.5 A10.6 A10.7 -
24VDC
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29
109.8 / L06 L06 / 111.0

Basic REX I Digitale Ausgänge
Änderung
change
Datum
date
Name
name
Bearb.
Zeichnungsnummer
sheet 110
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
110.9 / L07 L07 / 120.0

+24VDC
31 40
Rack 0 output card
+ A11.0 A11.1 A11.2 A11.3 A11.4 A11.5 A11.6 A11.7 -
24VDC
32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
36.5 / L1111
Streuer
strewer
22 22
A1 13
K1113 K1112 K1114.1
+
.3 21 .2 21 24V DC
/77.8 A2 14
E61010048 -
V1112 V1113
E64902057 E64902057
- + - +
A1 A1 A1 A1 A1
K1112 K1113 K1114 K1115 K1116

24V DC A2 24V DC A2 24V A2 24V A2 24V A2
E64901557
110.9 / L06 L06 / 120.0

heben senken Absaugventilator
Wasserventil
raise lower extraction fan
water valve
E64900957 E64900957 E61021548 E61021548 E61021548

1 2 /77.1 1 2 /77.2 14 14 14
3 4 /77.1 3 4 /77.2 12 11 /36.5 12 11 /36.7 12 11 /36.8
5 6 /77.1 5 6 /77.3
22 21 .3 22 21 .2
Streugutrückförderer
Hubmotor Befeuchterwalze seeding material reclaimer
lifting motor dampening roller
Mohner MOC
Vorherige Seite
seeder MOC Nächste Seite
Basic REX I Digitale Ausgänge
Änderung
change
Datum
date
Name
name
Bearb.
Zeichnungsnummer
sheet 111
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
111.8 / L07 L07 / 121.0

+24VDC
111.8 / L06 L06 / 121.0
1 20
SM332 Rack 0 Analogkarte Steckplatz 7 slot / module 7
analog-card
+ CH0 PAW 304 CH1 PAW 306 CH2 PAW 308 CH3 PAW 310 -
0-10 VDC
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
26.2 / A262 26.5 / A264 26.8 / A266 40.2 / A402
26.2 / A261 26.5 / A263 26.8 / A265 40.2 / A401
Unterband Oberband Kalibrierwalze Abziehband

bottom belt top belt calibrating roller retractingbelt

Änderung
change
Datum
date
Name
name
Bearb.
Zeichnungsnummer
sheet 120
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
120.9 / L07 L07
+24VDC
120.9 / L06 L06
SM332 Rack 0 Analogkarte Steckplatz 7 slot / module 7

analog-card
CH4 PAW 312 CH5 PAW 314 CH6 PAW 316 CH7 PAW 318
0-10 VDC
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38
36.2 / A362 36.5 / A364
36.2 / A361 36.5 / A363
Antrieb Mohner Streuer

drive seeder strewer

Änderung
change
Datum
date
Name
name
Bearb.
Zeichnungsnummer
sheet 121
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
E65200057
E65200857
E65205157
E65217057
E65217057
E65207057
E65217057
E65207057
E65217057
E65208057
E65217057
E65211057
E65217057
S7_313C R0_4_SM321 R0_5_SM321 R0_6_SM322 R0_7_SM332
DI8/AI5/AO2 DI/DO 16 DI 32 DI 32 DO 32 AO 8
SF 1 1 1 1
1L+ 1L+ 1L+ L+
SIEMENS 2 2 2 2 2 2
V V E124.0 E0.0 E4.0 A8.0
3 3 3 3 3 3
DC5V A A E124.1 E0.1 E4.1 A8.1 CH0
4 4 4 4 4 4
AI0 E124.2 E0.2 E4.2 A8.2
FRCE 5 5 5 5 5 5
V V E124.3 E0.3 E4.3 A8.3
RUN 6 6 6 6 6 6
PUSH A A E124.4 E0.4 E4.4 A8.4
STOP 7 7 7 7 7 7
AI1 E124.5 E0.5 E4.5 A8.5 CH1
8 8 8 8 8 8
V V E124.6 E0.6 E4.6 A8.6
9 9 9 9 9 9
RUN A A E124.7 E0.7 E4.7 A8.7
10 10 10 10 10
STOP AI2
MRES
11 11 11 11 11 11
V V CH2
12 12 12 12 12 12
A A E125.0 E1.0 E5.0 A9.0
13 13 13 13 13 13
AI3 E125.1 E1.1 E5.1 A9.1
14 14 14 14 14 14
R E125.2 E1.2 E5.2 A9.2
15 15 15 15 15 15
AI4 E125.3 E1.3 E5.3 A9.3 CH3
16 16 16 16 16 16
AO1V E125.4 E1.4 E5.4 A9.4
17 17 17 17 17 17
AO0A E125.5 E1.5 E5.5 A9.5
18 18 18 18 18 18
AO1V E125.6 E1.6 E5.6 A9.6
19 19 19 19 19 19
AO1A E125.7 E1.7 E5.7 A9.7
20 20 20 20 20
MANA 1M 1M 1M M
21 21 21 21 21
2L+ 2L+ 2L+ 2L+
22 22 22 22 22 22
E126.0 A124.0 E2.0 E6.0 A10.0
23 23 23 23 23 23
E126.1 A124.1 E2.1 E6.1 A10.1 CH4
24 24 24 24 24 24
SIMATIC E126.2
25
A124.2
25
E2.2
25
E6.2
24
A10.2
25 25
E126.3 A124.3 E2.3 E6.3 A10.3
S7-300 E126.4
26
A124.4
26
E2.4
26
E6.4
26
A10.4
26 26
27 27 27 27 27 27
E126.5 A124.5 E2.5 E6.5 A10.5 CH5
28 28 28 28 28 28
E126.6 A124.6 E2.6 E6.6 A10.6
29 29 29 29 29 29
E126.7 A124.7 E2.7 E6.7 A10.7
30 30 30 30 30
4M 2M 2M 2M
31 31 31 31
3L+ 3L+ 3L+ CH6
32 32 32 32 32
A125.0 E3.0 E7.0 A11.0
33 33 33 33 33
A125.1 E3.1 E7.1 A11.1
34 34 34 34 34
A125.2 E3.2 E7.2 A11.2
35 35 35 35 35
A125.3 E3.3 E7.3 A11.3 CH7
36 36 36 36 36
A125.4 E3.4 E7.4 A11.4
37
L+ A125.5
37
E3.5
37
E7.5
37
A11.5
37
38 38 38 38 38
M A125.6 E3.6 E7.6 A11.6
39
39 39 39 39
A125.7 E3.7 E7.7 A11.7
40 40 40 40
3M 3M 3M
Steckplatznummer 2/X1 2/X2 4 5 6 7

Card location number
Digital Adresse E126.0- E124.0-E125.7 E0.0- E4.0-E7.7 A8.0-

digital address E126.7 A124.0-A125.7 E3.7 A9.7
Analoge Adresse PEW752 -760 PAW304-

analogs address PAW752-754 PAW318
Basic REX I SPS Rack 0
Änderung
change
Datum
date
Name
name
Bearb.
user Martin Manninger KOENIG MASCHINEN CL600 Stanze+SCHR-WK+RR +MOC + AB PLC Rack 0
Zeichnungsnummer
sheet 200
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
PEW
PAW304
752
PAW306
A124
E126
E124
A10
PEW
A8
E0
E2
E4
E6
754
PAW308
PEW
PAW310
756
PEW
PAW312
758
PEW
PAW314
760
A125
E125
A11
A9
E1
E3
E5
E7
PAW
PAW316
752
PAW
PAW318
754

Basic REX I Beschriftung
Änderung
change
Datum
date
Name
name
Bearb.
user Martin Manninger KOENIG MASCHINEN CL600 Stanze+SCHR-WK+RR +MOC + AB Labelling
Zeichnungsnummer
sheet 204
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
X2_TS
600x400x250
E64763753
0310414 04A
0310414 04A
REX
70.00 70.00
KK 25x75mm
KK 40x75mm
Klemmen
terminals
E61 E71
1,5 kW 0,37 kW
400V 230V
KK 25x75mm

Basic REX I Schaltschrank REX
Änderung
change
Datum
date
Name
name
Bearb.
user Martin Manninger KOENIG MASCHINEN CL600 Stanze+SCHR-WK+RR +MOC + AB electrical cabinet REX
Zeichnungsnummer
sheet 206
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
930,0
X1_CL600
0660319 01A
0607148 06C
L011
0607220 02A
150,0
150,0
0607220 ZM
0660531 ZD F12 F14 F15 F30 F31 F35 F181 NC NC
F181
F12
F14
F15
F30
F31
U26
0660534 ZB 16 A 16 A 10 A 10 A 10 A 10 A 10 A
0660535 05B
K1112 K1113
0660535 05C
0660535 ZD
0660536 01A
40,0
40,0
0660537 03A
0661008 01A
0661230 07A
E12103015
E12109562 L021
Option
optionally L031 L041
E30000005
E34200005
140,0
P971
T35
153,0
E34220005 Q64 Q66 Q166 Q271 Q411 F33
E39400516 1,4 A 0,28 A 0,85 A 0,35 A 1,93A K812 K813 K814 K815 K816 K817 X33 25A
30mA 10A
30,0
25,0
NC NC
90,0
K810 K962 K963 K972 K1095 K977 K978 K1081
Option
optionally 70.00 70.00 70.00 70.00
30,0
235,0
E161 E261 E264 E267
K1114.1
1080,0
115,0
R283
K758
K808
K838
K848
R777
K964
K971
K973
F1023
F1036
F1056
K1082
K1087
K1114
K1115
K1116
F767
F771
0,37 kW 1,5 kW 0,37 kW 0,37 kW
F37
230V 400V 230V 230V
25,0
60,0
R0_4_SM321 70.00 70.00 70.00

R0_5_SM321
R0_6_SM322
R0_7_SM332
220,0
S7_313C
193,0
X1
X2
D775
E361 E363 E401
0,37 kW 0,37 kW 0,37 kW
230V 230V 230V
80,0
Klemmleiste
152,0
connector block

Basic REX I Schaltschrank
Änderung
change
Datum
date
Name
name
Bearb.
user Martin Manninger KOENIG MASCHINEN CL600 Stanze+SCHR-WK+RR +MOC + AB electrical cabinet
Zeichnungsnummer
sheet 207
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Spreizbandstauber
fingerbeltduster
emergency OFF
Start / Stopp
start / stop
Not Aus
TASTATUR_REX
10kΩ
S801 S947 R73

Änderung
change
Datum
date
Name
name
Bearb.
Zeichnungsnummer
sheet 210
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
TABLEAU
Emergency stop
Start / Stopp
start / stop
Not-Aus
SIEMENS
SIMATIC PANEL AUSGABE
TP177B-C
COMBILINE
E65235657
S801.2 S921.1
Start / Stopp
start / stop
Not-Aus
Emergency stop
ohne Blechkontrolle
emergency OFF
Start / Stopp
tray control
start / stop
Not Aus
without
S801.1
TASTATUR AB
S921
RESET
Taste
RESET RESET
button
S808 H968
Hupe
Störung
horn
fault
S803.2 S921.5 S1034

Änderung
change
Datum
date
Name
name
Bearb.
Zeichnungsnummer
sheet 211
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
TABLEAU 2
380x300x155mm
SIEMENS
SIMATIC PANEL
Not Aus
emergency OFF
TP177B-C
S801.3 Formstation
E65235657
S921.2
Start Stopp
start stop

Änderung
change
Datum
date
Name
name
Bearb.
Zeichnungsnummer
sheet 212
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Aufbau Bedienseite S758

design operationside Sicherheitsklappe
Teigeinzug
Aufbau Mitte safety flap dough
design middle infeed
Aufbau Antriebsseite
design drive side
M64
Schleifmotor
moulding motor
Y751
S935 Teigkupplung
M71 dough clutch
Tür vorne
Spreizbandstauber door in front
fingerbeltduster
M65 S953/S954
Teigabnahmerolle
dough discharge roller Teigfühler
dough sensor
S936 M61
Tür Bedienseite
REX Hauptantrieb
door operationside
REX maindrive
S937
Tür Triebseite
door driveside
1. Schieberstopp
S951 S934
1. slider stop
2. Schieberstopp
2. slider stop
S952 X2 Tür hinten
door back
Schaltschrank
Schalter Teigabnahmerolle electrical cabinet
switch dough discharge roller
S955
auf Triebseite
up driveside
Schalter Spreizbandstauber
switch fingerbeltduster
S956
Basic REX I Aufbau REX
Änderung
change
Datum
date
Name
name
Bearb.
user Martin Manninger KOENIG MASCHINEN CL600 Stanze+SCHR-WK+RR +MOC + AB design REX
Zeichnungsnummer
sheet 230
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Entkeimung
Gehängetrocknung
sterilization
swing drying
H202 Antriebsmotor Vorgärschrank
R181 drive motor first prover
S181 M161 Verdampfer
Scheibe Stanze M183 Heizung
window stamping station humidifier
S1012 heater
Kupplung Stanzenstauber
clutch duster reginamatic
R191/S191
R193/S193
Y767
M195/D197.1
Positionsschalter Stanze
Y198/M201
position switch stamping station
S1024/S1025
Langroller Eingabe Gärschrank
1 : 1 Referenzimpuls
long rolling unit infeed unit prover
1 : 1 reference puls S1023
M166
Klappe Stanze
flap stamping station S1012.1
S1027/S1027.1
Drucktassenkontrolle
pressure swing control
S1026
Teigkontrolle Ausgabe
dough check distribution
S1011.3 S1011.2 S1011.1 S1011

Scheibe Scheibe Scheibe Scheibe
Triebseite Triebseite Bedienseite Bedienseite
rechts links links rechts
window window window window
driveside driveside operationside operationside
right left left right

Basic REX I Vorgärschrank
Änderung
change
Datum
date
Name
name
Bearb.
user Martin Manninger KOENIG MASCHINEN CL600 Stanze+SCHR-WK+RR +MOC + AB first prover
Zeichnungsnummer
sheet 231
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Sicherheitsschalter
Formstation 2
safety switch
Taktrolle formingstation 2
setting roller
Taktrolle M281 S1051.1

oben / unten Oberband
setting top belt Stauber Formstation
roller top / down duster formingstation
M264
S1047 M271
S1048 Sicherheitsschalter
Formstation 1
safety switch
formingstation 1
S1051
M261 M267
Unterband Kalibrierwalze
bottom belt calibrating roller

Basic REX I Formstation
Änderung
change
Datum
date
Name
name
Bearb.
user Martin Manninger KOENIG MASCHINEN CL600 Stanze+SCHR-WK+RR +MOC + AB formingstation
Zeichnungsnummer
sheet 232
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Befeuchterwalze
dampening roller
M771/M775/S1067/S1068
Streuer
strewer
M363
Absaugventilator
extraction fan
M366
M367
Streugutrückförderer
seeding material reclaimer
M361
Antrieb Mohner
drive seeder
S1066
Teigkontrolle
Mohner
Y368 dough check
Wasserventil seeder
water valve

Basic REX I Mohner
Änderung
change
Datum
date
Name
name
Bearb.
user Martin Manninger KOENIG MASCHINEN CL600 Stanze+SCHR-WK+RR +MOC + AB seeder
Zeichnungsnummer
sheet 233
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Sicherheitsschalter vorne
safety switch in front
S1036
Abziehen Start S1035
retracting start Sicherheitsschalter hinten
safety switch back
M411 S1013
Y413
Abziehmotor
retracting motor
S139 M401
Zählimpuls
Abziehband
counter pulse
retractingbelt
S1037
Abziehen Vorne
retracting in front
S1014
S1038 Sicherheitsschalter
S1033 Schmutzlade
Blechkontrolle Abziehen Hinten
Abziehgerät
tray control retracting back
safety switch dirt
batten retracting
unit

Basic REX I Abziehgerät
Änderung
change
Datum
date
Name
name
Bearb.
user Martin Manninger KOENIG MASCHINEN CL600 Stanze+SCHR-WK+RR +MOC + AB retracting unit
Zeichnungsnummer
sheet 235
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
MICRO MASTER 420
Anzeige
Display
Funktion
function
auf Taste
up button
Parameter
parameter
abwärts Taste
down button
Tipp Betrieb
joggle
P0010 muß bei Inbetriebnahme auf 1 gestellt werden.

At initiation you must adjust P0010 to 1.
P0003 muß zum Ändern der nachfolgenden Parameter von 2 auf 3 gestellt werden.
to change the other parameters you must change P0003 from 2 to 3
Um alle Parameter auf Siemens Werkseinstellungen zurückzusetzen,

muß P0010 auf 30 und dannach P0970 auf 1 gesetzt werden.
For reseting the inverter (SIEMENS facory setting)

P0010 must be set to 30 and after you can set P0970 to 1.

Basic REX I Frequenzumrichter
Änderung
change
Datum
date
Name
name
Bearb.
user Martin Manninger KOENIG MASCHINEN CL600 Stanze+SCHR-WK+RR +MOC + AB inverter
Zeichnungsnummer
sheet 240
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
SIEMENS
Hauptantrieb Spreizbandstauber
MICRO MASTER 420 maindrive fingerbeltduster
Nr. Parameter
No. parameter E61 E71
Parameterfilter Inbetriebnahme
P0010 Parameter groups for commissioning 0 0
Motor Spannung
P0304 motor voltage 400 230
Motor Nennstrom
P0305 motor current rating 2.60 0.97
Motor Nennleistung
P0307 motor motor power 0.75 0.18
Motor Nennfrequenz
P0310 motor frequency rating 50.00 50.00
Motor Nenndrehzahl
P0311 motor speed rating 965 1350
Motorkühlung
P0335 motor cooling 0 0
Auswahl Befehlsquelle
P0700 selection command source 2 2
Auswahl Frequenzsollwert
P1000 selection frequency setpoint 2 2
minimum Frequenz
P1080 minimum frequency 10.00 10.00
maximum Frequenz
P1082 maximum frequency 75.00 70.00
Hochlaufzeit
P1120 Ramp-up time 0.30 0.30
Tieflaufzeit
P1121 Ramp-down time 0.40 0.30
Ende Schnellinbetriebnahme
P3900 end quick commissioning 0 0
P0003 Benutzer Zugangsebene

user acces level 2 2
P0758 minimum Frequenz Analog
minimum frequency analogue 10.00 20.00
P0760 maximum Frequenz Analog
maximum frequency analogue 150.00 140.00
P0610 Reaktion bei Motorübertemperatur
reaction at temperature of the motor to high 0 2
P0640 Motorüberlastfaktor
Motor overload factor 200.0 150.0
P1210 Automatischer Wiederanlauf
Automatic re-start 1 1
P1300 Steuerungsart
Control mode 1 1
P1310 Konstante Spannungsanhebung
Continuous boost
50 50
P1335 Vorherige Seite
Schlupfkompensation
Slip compensation
100.0 100.0 Nächste Seite
Änderung
change
Datum
date
Name
name
Bearb.
Zeichnungsnummer
sheet 241
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
SIEMENS
MICRO MASTER 420 Vorgärschrank Unterband Oberband Kalibrierwalze Mohner Streuer Abziehband
first prover bottom belt top belt calibrating roller seeder strewer retractingbelt
Nr. Parameter
No. parameter E161 E261 E264 E267 E361 E363 E401
Parameterfilter Inbetriebnahme
P0010 Parameter groups for commissioning 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Motor Spannung
P0304 motor voltage 230 400 230 230 230 230 230
Motor Nennstrom
P0305 motor current rating 1.00 2.70 1.14 0.81 0.62 1.00 1.20
Motor Nennleistung
P0307 motor motor power 0.18 1.10 0.1 0.10 0.06 0.12 0.25
Motor Nennfrequenz
P0310 motor frequency rating 50.00 50.00 50.00 50.00 50.00 50.00 50.00
Motor Nenndrehzahl
P0311 motor speed rating 1350 1410 835 2625 1350 1420 1350
Motorkühlung
P0335 motor cooling 0 0 1 1 0 0 0
Auswahl Befehlsquelle
P0700 selection command source 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Auswahl Frequenzsollwert
P1000 selection frequency setpoint 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
minimum Frequenz
P1080 minimum frequency 10.00 0.00 10.00 10.00 00.00 00.00 0.00
maximum Frequenz
P1082 maximum frequency 50.00 60.00 70.00 70.00 60.00 60.00 75.00
Hochlaufzeit
P1120 Ramp-up time 0.30 0.30 0.30 0.30 0.30 0.30 0.30
Tieflaufzeit
P1121 Ramp-down time 0.30 0.30 0.30 0.30 0.30 0.30 0.30
Ende Schnellinbetriebnahme
P3900 end quick commissioning 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
P0003 Benutzer Zugangsebene

user acces level 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
P0758 minimum Frequenz Analog
minimum frequency analogue 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 20.00 20.00 0.00
P0760 maximum Frequenz Analog
maximum frequency analogue 110.00 120.00 140.00 140.00 120.00 120.00 215.00
P0610 Reaktion bei Motorübertemperatur
reaction at temperature of the motor to high 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
P0640 Motorüberlastfaktor
Motor overload factor 200.0 150.0 200.0 200.0 150.0 150.0 150.0
P1210 Automatischer Wiederanlauf
Automatic re-start 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
P1300 Steuerungsart
Control mode 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
P1310 Konstante Spannungsanhebung
Continuous boost
50 50 50 50 50 50 50
P1335 Vorherige Seite
Schlupfkompensation
Slip compensation
100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 Nächste Seite
Änderung
change
Datum
date
Name
name
Bearb.
Zeichnungsnummer
sheet 242
Leistung.xlsx

Previous page Next page
Datum Anlagenbezeichnung Seitenbeschreibung
Änderung Datum Name Bearb. Zeichnungsnummer Blatt
change date name user KOENIG MASCHINEN Drawing Number sheet
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Artikelstückliste Parts list

Betriebsmittelkennzeichen Menge Artikelnummer Typnummer Bezeichnung Montageort UL Nummer Norm
Device tag amount Article Number Type number Designation mounting site UL number Norm
X2_TS 1 0310414 04A DISTANZHUELSE 5,5/15/37 REX

X1_CL600 2 0607148 06C BEFESTIGUNG KABELKANAL
X1_CL600 1 0607220 02A
X1_CL600 1 0607220 ZM
X1_CL600 1 0660319 01A TRAGSCHINE
X1_CL600 1 0660531 ZD SCHALTKASTEN COMBILINE 800
X1_CL600 1 0660534 ZB GRUNDPLATTE SCHALTSCHR. CL800
X1_CL600 2 0660535 05B DICHTUNGSPROFIL ST0048
X1_CL600 2 0660535 05C DICHTUNGSPROFIL ST0048
X1_CL600 1 0660535 ZD Tür für CL800
X1_CL600 2 0660536 01A U-PROFIL COMBILINE 600+800
X1_CL600 1 0660537 03A ABDECKBLECH für CL600
X1_CL600 1 0661008 01A WINKEL COMBILINE 600+800
X1_CL600 1 0661230 07A KABELTASSE E624.93478 mit 604mm
X1_CL600 2 E12103015 VORREIBER - EDEELSTAHL
X1_CL600 2 E12109562 ANSCHRAUBSCHARNIER 120 GRAD
X1_CL600 8 E30000005
X1_CL600 8 E34200005
X1_CL600 8 E34220005
X1_CL600 4 E39400516
D775 0 E46420401 LEISTUNGSELEKTRONIK FYD 66 SD 3
Q10 1 E60330030 HAUPE H-P1
P971 1 E60365065 BG 70.29 BETRIEBSSTUNDENZAEHLER, 12...48 VDC
S801 1 E60400230 M22-PV NOT-AUS-TASTE mit Zugent REX UL Listed: NKCR E29184 CSA: 3211-03 12528
S801.1 1 E60400230 M22-PV NOT-AUS-TASTE mit Zugent UL Listed: NKCR E29184 CSA: 3211-03 12528
S803.2 1 E60400230 M22-PV NOT-AUS-TASTE mit Zugent Abziehgerät retracting unit UL Listed: NKCR E29184 CSA: 3211-03 12528
S1034 1 E60400330 M22-WRK KNEBELGRIFF WAHLTASTER 2 STELLUNGEN Abziehgerät retracting unit UL Listed: NKCR E29184 CSA: 3211-03 12528
S808 1 E60400430 M22-D-X DRUCKTASTE FLACH, OHNE SCHILD UL Listed: NKCR E29184 CSA: 3211-03 12528
S921 1 E60402030 M22-DDL-GR-X1/X0 DOPPELDRUCKTASTE 1/0 UL Listed: NKCR E29184 CSA: 3211-03 12528
S921.1 1 E60402030 M22-DDL-GR-X1/X0 DOPPELDRUCKTASTE 1/0 UL Listed: NKCR E29184 CSA: 3211-03 12528
S921.2 1 E60402030 M22-DDL-GR-X1/X0 DOPPELDRUCKTASTE 1/0 UL Listed: NKCR E29184 CSA: 3211-03 12528
S921.5 1 E60402030 M22-DDL-GR-X1/X0 DOPPELDRUCKTASTE 1/0 AB UL Listed: NKCR E29184 CSA: 3211-03 12528
S947 1 E60402030 M22-DDL-GR-X1/X0 DOPPELDRUCKTASTE 1/0 REX UL Listed: NKCR E29184 CSA: 3211-03 12528
S808 1 E60405030 M22-K10 KONTAKTELEMENT 1S FRONTBEF. UL Listed: NKCR E29184 CSA: 3211-03 12528
S921 1 E60405030 M22-K10 KONTAKTELEMENT 1S FRONTBEF. UL Listed: NKCR E29184 CSA: 3211-03 12528
S921.2 1 E60405030 M22-K10 KONTAKTELEMENT 1S FRONTBEF. UL Listed: NKCR E29184 CSA: 3211-03 12528
S947 1 E60405030 M22-K10 KONTAKTELEMENT 1S FRONTBEF. REX UL Listed: NKCR E29184 CSA: 3211-03 12528
S801 1 E60405130 M22-K01 KONTAKTELEMENT 1O FRONTBEF. REX UL Listed: NKCR E29184 CSA: 3211-03 12528
S801.1 1 E60405130 M22-K01 KONTAKTELEMENT 1O FRONTBEF. UL Listed: NKCR E29184 CSA: 3211-03 12528
S921 1 E60405130 M22-K01 KONTAKTELEMENT 1O FRONTBEF. UL Listed: NKCR E29184 CSA: 3211-03 12528
S947 1 E60405130 M22-K01 KONTAKTELEMENT 1O FRONTBEF. REX UL Listed: NKCR E29184 CSA: 3211-03 12528
S801 1 E60405230 M22-A BEFESTIGUNGSADAPTER FRONTBEF. REX UL Listed: NKCR E29184 CSA: 3211-03 12528
S801.1 1 E60405230 M22-A BEFESTIGUNGSADAPTER FRONTBEF. UL Listed: NKCR E29184 CSA: 3211-03 12528
S808 1 E60405230 M22-A BEFESTIGUNGSADAPTER FRONTBEF. UL Listed: NKCR E29184 CSA: 3211-03 12528
S921 1 E60405230 M22-A BEFESTIGUNGSADAPTER FRONTBEF. UL Listed: NKCR E29184 CSA: 3211-03 12528
S947 1 E60405230 M22-A BEFESTIGUNGSADAPTER FRONTBEF. REX UL Listed: NKCR E29184 CSA: 3211-03 12528
S921.1 1 E60405530 M22-KC10 KONTAKTELEMENT 1S BODENBEF. UL Listed: NKCR E29184 CSA: 3211-03 12528
S921.5 1 E60405530 M22-KC10 KONTAKTELEMENT 1S BODENBEF. AB UL Listed: NKCR E29184 CSA: 3211-03 12528
S1034 1 E60405530 M22-KC10 KONTAKTELEMENT 1S BODENBEF. Abziehgerät retracting unit UL Listed: NKCR E29184 CSA: 3211-03 12528
S801.2 1 E60405630 M22-KC01 KONTAKTELEMENT 1O BODENBEF. UL Listed: NKCR E29184 CSA: 3211-03 12528

Basic REX I Artikelstückliste : 0310414 04A -
Änderung
change
Datum
date
Name
name
Bearb.
user Martin Manninger KOENIG MASCHINEN CL600 Stanze+SCHR-WK+RR +MOC + AB E60405630
Zeichnungsnummer
sheet 260
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

S803.2 1 E60405630 M22-KC01 KONTAKTELEMENT 1O BODENBEF. Abziehgerät retracting unit UL Listed: NKCR E29184 CSA: 3211-03 12528
S921.1 1 E60405630 M22-KC01 KONTAKTELEMENT 1O BODENBEF. UL Listed: NKCR E29184 CSA: 3211-03 12528
S921.5 1 E60405630 M22-KC01 KONTAKTELEMENT 1O BODENBEF. AB UL Listed: NKCR E29184 CSA: 3211-03 12528
R73 1 E60407030 M22S-ST-X SCHILDTRAEGER REX
R283 1 E60407030 M22S-ST-X SCHILDTRAEGER
R777 1 E60407030 M22S-ST-X SCHILDTRAEGER
S1034 1 E60407030 M22S-ST-X SCHILDTRAEGER Abziehgerät retracting unit
R73 1 E60408030 M22-XST EINLEGESCHILD REX
R283 1 E60408030 M22-XST EINLEGESCHILD
R777 1 E60408030 M22-XST EINLEGESCHILD
S1034 1 E60408030 M22-XST EINLEGESCHILD Abziehgerät retracting unit
S801 1 E60410130 M22XZK-GB99 NOT-AUS SCHILD "GB" REX
S801.1 2 E60410130 M22XZK-GB99 NOT-AUS SCHILD "GB"
S803.2 1 E60410130 M22XZK-GB99 NOT-AUS SCHILD "GB" Abziehgerät retracting unit
AB 2 E60411030 M22S-B BLINDVERSCHLUSS AB
CL 1;7 E60411030 M22S-B BLINDVERSCHLUSS
REX 3 E60411030 M22S-B BLINDVERSCHLUSS REX
S808 1 E60415230 M22-XD-B-GB14 TASTENPLATTE BLAU RESET
S921.1 1 E60422330 M22-I3 AUFBAUGEHAEUSE 3-FACH UL Listed: NKCR E29184 CSA: 3211-03 12528
S921.5 1 E60422630 M22-I6 AUFBAUGEHAEUSE 6-FACH AB UL Listed: NKCR E29184 CSA: 3211-03 12528
R283 1 E60425030 M22-IVS HUTSCHIENEN ADAPTER UL Listed: NKCR E29184 CSA: 3211-03 12528
R777 1 E60425030 M22-IVS HUTSCHIENEN ADAPTER UL Listed: NKCR E29184 CSA: 3211-03 12528
H968 1 E60460030 M22-AMC AKUSTIKMELDER UL Listed: NKCR E29184 CSA: 3211-03 12528
H968 1 E60460130 M22-XAM EINSATZ SUMMER BA9S 18-30V UL Listed: NKCR E29184 CSA: 3211-03 12528
S1033 1 E60900261 Z 4 V 10 H 335 - 11 Z/m POSITIONSSCHALTER SCHMERSAL MIT SCHWENKHEBELVORSATZ 4V (BREITE= 40.5 MM)
Abziehgerät retracting unit UL Listed: NKCR E57648 CSA: 3211-03 017298
S951 1 E60903645 STECKER V1-W-5M-PVC P&F REX
S1023 1 E60903645 STECKER V1-W-5M-PVC P&F
S1027.1 1 E60903645 STECKER V1-W-5M-PVC P&F
S1037 1 E60903645 STECKER V1-W-5M-PVC P&F Abziehgerät retracting unit
S1038 1 E60903645 STECKER V1-W-5M-PVC P&F Abziehgerät retracting unit
S1057 1 E60903645 STECKER V1-W-5M-PVC P&F MOC
S1058 1 E60903645 STECKER V1-W-5M-PVC P&F MOC
S952 1 E60903745 STECKER V1-G-5M-PVC P&F REX
S955 1 E60903745 STECKER V1-G-5M-PVC P&F Option optionally
S1047 1 E60903745 STECKER V1-G-5M-PVC P&F
S951 1 E60903945 BF 12 BEFESTIGUNGSFLANSCH P&F REX
S951 1 E60904145 NJ 4-12 GM 40-E2-V1-3G-3D NAEHERUNGSSCHALTER P&F NJ4 St REX UL Listed: NRKH E87056 CSA: 3211-03 1007121
S955 1 E60904145 NJ 4-12 GM 40-E2-V1-3G-3D NAEHERUNGSSCHALTER P&F NJ4 St Option optionally UL Listed: NRKH E87056 CSA: 3211-03 1007121
S1023 1 E60904145 NJ 4-12 GM 40-E2-V1-3G-3D NAEHERUNGSSCHALTER P&F NJ4 St UL Listed: NRKH E87056 CSA: 3211-03 1007121
S1027.1 1 E60904145 NJ 4-12 GM 40-E2-V1-3G-3D NAEHERUNGSSCHALTER P&F NJ4 St UL Listed: NRKH E87056 CSA: 3211-03 1007121
S1037 1 E60904145 NJ 4-12 GM 40-E2-V1-3G-3D NAEHERUNGSSCHALTER P&F NJ4 St Abziehgerät retracting unit UL Listed: NRKH E87056 CSA: 3211-03 1007121

Basic REX I Artikelstückliste : E60405630 - E60904145 Zeichnungsnummer
Änderung
change
Datum
date
Name
name
Bearb.
user Martin Manninger KOENIG MASCHINEN CL600 Stanze+SCHR-WK+RR +MOC + AB Parts list : E60405630 - E60904145 Drawing Number 06.11.0.3459 Blatt
sheet 261
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

S1038 1 E60904145 NJ 4-12 GM 40-E2-V1-3G-3D NAEHERUNGSSCHALTER P&F NJ4 St Abziehgerät retracting unit UL Listed: NRKH E87056 CSA: 3211-03 1007121
S1057 1 E60904145 NJ 4-12 GM 40-E2-V1-3G-3D NAEHERUNGSSCHALTER P&F NJ4 St MOC UL Listed: NRKH E87056 CSA: 3211-03 1007121
S1058 1 E60904145 NJ 4-12 GM 40-E2-V1-3G-3D NAEHERUNGSSCHALTER P&F NJ4 St MOC UL Listed: NRKH E87056 CSA: 3211-03 1007121
S758 1 E60920985 i10-HB213 SICHERHEITSPOSITIONSSCHALTER REX UL Listed: NKCR E198242
S1013 1 E60920985 i10-HB213 SICHERHEITSPOSITIONSSCHALTER Abziehgerät retracting unit UL Listed: NKCR E198242
S1055 1 E60920985 i10-HB213 SICHERHEITSPOSITIONSSCHALTER Abziehgerät retracting unit UL Listed: NKCR E198242
S934 1 E60930161 AZ 15/16-B1 ENDSCHALTERBUEGEL B1 FUER REX
S1011 1 E60930161 AZ 15/16-B1 ENDSCHALTERBUEGEL B1 FUER MECH
S1011.1 1 E60930161 AZ 15/16-B1 ENDSCHALTERBUEGEL B1 FUER MECH
S934 1 E60931861 AZ 16-12 ZVRK Endschalter limit switch REX UL Listed: NKCR E57648 CSA: 3211-03 017298
S1011 1 E60931861 AZ 16-12 ZVRK Endschalter limit switch MECH UL Listed: NKCR E57648 CSA: 3211-03 017298
S1011.1 1 E60931861 AZ 16-12 ZVRK Endschalter limit switch MECH UL Listed: NKCR E57648 CSA: 3211-03 017298
S958 1 E60935061 SICHERHEITSSCHALTER MAGN. Abziehgerät retracting unit
S1014 1 E60935061 SICHERHEITSSCHALTER MAGN. Abziehgerät retracting unit
S958 1 E60935161 BETAETIGUNGSMAGNET BPS 16 Abziehgerät retracting unit
S1014 1 E60935161 BETAETIGUNGSMAGNET BPS 16 Abziehgerät retracting unit
K964 1 E61010048 DEK-OV-24 DC/24 DC/3 TRANSISTOR MODUL
K1114.1 1 E61010048 DEK-OV-24 DC/24 DC/3 TRANSISTOR MODUL
K1082 1 E61021548 EMG 10-REL/KSR-G 24/21-LC RELAIS-MODUL UL Listed NRAQ E238705
E71 1 E61520057 6SE6420-2AB13-7AA1 UMRICHTER MICROMASTER 420 0.37kW REX UL Listed: NMMS E121068
E161 1 E61520057 6SE6420-2AB13-7AA1 UMRICHTER MICROMASTER 420 0.37kW UL Listed: NMMS E121068
E61 1 E61522057 6SE6420-2UD21-5AA1 UMRICHTER MICROMASTER 420 1.5kW REX UL Listed: NMMS E121068
E261 1 E61522057 6SE6420-2UD21-5AA1 UMRICHTER MICROMASTER 420 1.5kW UL Listed: NMMS E121068
E61 1 E61522457 6SE6400-2FA00-6AD0 EMV Filter KLASSE A REX

Änderung
change
Datum
date
Name
name
Bearb.
sheet 262
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

E261 1 E61522457 6SE6400-2FA00-6AD0 EMV Filter KLASSE A

E61 1 E61529057 6SE6400-0BP00-0AA1 BEDIENFELD F. MM 420 REX cULus listed 508C
E71 1 E61529057 6SE6400-0BP00-0AA1 BEDIENFELD F. MM 420 REX cULus listed 508C
E161 1 E61529057 6SE6400-0BP00-0AA1 BEDIENFELD F. MM 420 cULus listed 508C
D775 1 E62097169 REGLER-MOTORKABEL FUER
F37 1 E62326074 SICHERUNGSKLEMME 881004 0000
H202 2 E62820273 1KOE-2036KN VERSORGUNGSEINHEIT 1KOE-2036KN Bezeichnung: sterilAir D2036-KN Gerätearmatur Entkeimung steril lamps
H202 2 E62820473 2-UVC-2036-HT HOCHLEISTUNGSROEHRE UVC2036-2N Entkeimung steril lamps
H31 1 E62850078 FEUCHTRAUMWANNENLEUCHTE 18W SYLPROOF PRO
S1056 1 E62900644 REFL. LICHTTASTER E3F2-R2B4 MIT REFLEKTOR MOC
S1026 1 E62900744 E39-R3 ZUBEHÖR FÜR FOTOSENSOR
S1036 1 E62900744 E39-R3 ZUBEHÖR FÜR FOTOSENSOR Abziehgerät retracting unit
S1026 1 E62906044 E3Z-LR86 LASER LICHTSCHRANKEN mit 4 poligem M8 Stecker
S1036 1 E62906044 E3Z-LR86 LASER LICHTSCHRANKEN mit 4 poligem M8 Stecker Abziehgerät retracting unit
S1026 1 E62906144 XS3F-M421-405-A STECKER GERADE 5M F.E629.06044
S1036 1 E62906144 XS3F-M421-405-A STECKER GERADE 5M F.E629.06044 Abziehgerät retracting unit
Q10 1 E63003230 EINBAU - HAUPTSCHALTER MOE 32A P1-32/EA/SVB, 11 KW / 32 A UL listed 340B
WIRE_DARKBLUE_0,5 0 E63100050
WIRE_RED_0,5 0 E63100051
WIRE_ORANGE_0,5 0 E63100052
WIRE_GREEN_0,5 0 E63100053
WIRE_WHITE_0,5 0 E63100054
WIRE_BLUE_WHITE_0,5 0 E63100055
WIRE_BROWN_0,5 0 E63100056
WIRE_GRAY_0,5 0 E63100057
WIRE_VIOLETT_0,5 0 E63100058
WIRE_RED_0,75 0 E63100069
WIRE_BLACK_0,75 0 E63102069
WIRE_LIGHTBLUE_0,75 0 E63102169
WIRE_YELLOW_0,75 0 E63103069
WIRE_ORANGE_0,75 0 E63104069
WIRE_GRAY_0,75 0 E63104169
WIRE_VIOLETT_0,75 0 E63104269
WIRE_BLACK_1,5 0 E63106469
WIRE_LIGHTBLUE_1,5 0 E63111069
WIRE_DARKBLUE_1,5 0 E63112069
WIRE_RED_1,5 0 E63113069
WIRE_GREEN/YELLOW_1,5 0 E63114069
WIRE_BLUE_WHITE_1,5 0 E63114169
WIRE_BROWN_1,5 0 E63114269
WIRE_YELLOW_1,5 0 E63115069
Q166 1 E63700557 SIRIUS 3RV1021-0JA10 M0TORSCHUTZSCHALTER 0.7-1A
Q64 1 E63700657 SIRIUS 3RV1021-1AA10 MOTORSCHUTZSCHALTER 1.1-1.6A
Q411 1 E63700757 MOTORSCHUTZSCHALTER 1.8-2.5A
Q64 1 E63700957 SIRIUS 3RV1901-1E HILFSSCHALTER SIEMENS

Änderung
change
Datum
date
Name
name
Bearb.
sheet 263
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Q66 1 E63700957 SIRIUS 3RV1901-1E HILFSSCHALTER SIEMENS REX

Q66 1 E63701657 SIRIUS 3RV1021-0EA10 REX
Q271 1 E63701657 SIRIUS 3RV1021-0EA10
L021 1 E63702357 SIRIUS 3RV1915-1AB Option optionally
L031 1 E63702357 SIRIUS 3RV1915-1AB
U26 1 E63795030 UEBERSPANNUNGSABLEITER
U26 1 E63795130 HILFSSCHALTER Z. E63795030
R181 1 E64300047 ALI ANLEGETEMPERATURREGLER T. ALI EINSTELLBEREICH 35-85 GRAD C MECH
S181 1 E64300047 ALI ANLEGETEMPERATURREGLER T. ALI EINSTELLBEREICH 35-85 GRAD C Gehängetrocknung swing drying
X2_TS 1 E64763753 SCHALTSCHRANK 400/600/250 REX
F33 1 E64842530 FEHLERSTROMSCHUTZSCHALTER
F30 1 E64871030 PLSM-C10/1N-DW Leitungsschutzschalter Miniature circuit-breaker
F12 1 E64877030 Type ZP-IHK Hilfsschalter 1S+1Ö
F12 1 E64878030 Type ZV-L1/N-80-36 Anschlusswinkel L1/N
U26 1 E64878030 Type ZV-L1/N-80-36 Anschlusswinkel L1/N
F12 1 E64878130 Type ZV-L2/L3-80-36 Anschlusswinkel L2/L3
U26 1 E64878130 Type ZV-L2/L3-80-36 Anschlusswinkel L2/L3
F30 1 E64878230 ZV-N-05TE-36 Anschlusswinkel N für 2Polige LSS
L011 1 E64879030 Type ZV-SS-80A SAMMELSCHIENE 80A
L011 1 E64879130 ZV-ADP ABDECKPROFIL
L011 1 E64879230 ZV-AEK ENDKAPPE
K810 1 E64900357 SCHUETZ 5,5 KW BAUGROESSE S00 UL Listed E31519 IEC/EN60947-4-1
K812 1 E64900457 LEISTUNGSSCHUETZ 7.5 KW BAUGROESSE S0 Listed 165C IEC/EN60947-4-1
K977 1 E64900957 SCHUETZ 4 KW, 1OE BAUGROESSE S00 UL Listed E31519 IEC/EN60947-4-1

Änderung
change
Datum
date
Name
name
Bearb.
sheet 264
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

K962 1 E64901057 SCHUETZ 4 KW, 1S BAUGROESSE S00 UL Listed E31519 IEC/EN60947-4-1
K963 1 E64901057 SCHUETZ 4 KW, 1S BAUGROESSE S00 Option optionally UL Listed E31519 IEC/EN60947-4-1
K977 1 E64901157 HILFSSCHALTERBLOCK 1S+1OE 1 SCHLIESSER + 1 OEFFNER Listed 165C
K978 1 E64901157 HILFSSCHALTERBLOCK 1S+1OE 1 SCHLIESSER + 1 OEFFNER Listed 165C
K977 1 E64901557 VERDRAHTUNGSBAUSATZ FUER WENDESCHUETZ BGR S00 Listed 165C
K1112 1 E64901557 VERDRAHTUNGSBAUSATZ FUER WENDESCHUETZ BGR S00 Listed 165C
V810 1 E64902057 ENTSTÖRDIODE, DC 12...250 V
V963 1 E64902057 ENTSTÖRDIODE, DC 12...250 V Option optionally
V812 1 E64902357 RC-GLIED ZUM AUFSETZEN AUF SCHUETZE
X33 1 E65017078 MIT SCHNAPPBEFESTIGUNG SCHUKODOSE F. VERTEILEREINBAU
X34 1 E65018078 KLAPPDECKEL IN ALU GUSSGEHAUSE SCHUKO STECKDOSE-AP MIT
X900 1 E65050157 TYPE 6ES7972-0BB12-0XA0 ANSCHLUSSSTECKER F. PROFIBUS
S7_313C 1 E65200057 S7 SIMATIC S7-300, Profilschiene
S7_313C 1 E65200857 6ES7313-5BE00-0AB0 ZENTRALBAUGRUPPE CPU 313C UL Listed: NRAQ E116536
S7_313C 1 E65205157 6ES7953-8LF00-0AA0 MICRO MEMORY CARD MC 953/64K
R0_4_SM321 1 E65207057 DIGITALEINGABE SM 321 (32DE) FUER S7-300, POTENTIALGETRENNT UL Listed: NRAQ E116536
R0_5_SM321 1 E65207057 DIGITALEINGABE SM 321 (32DE) FUER S7-300, POTENTIALGETRENNT UL Listed: NRAQ E116536
R0_6_SM322 1 E65208057 S7 SIMATIC S7-300, Digitalausgabe SM 322 UL Listed: NRAQ E116536
R0_7_SM332 1 E65211057 S7 SIMATIC S7-300, Analogausgabe SM 332
R0_4_SM321 1 E65217057 6ES7392-1AM00-0AA0 FRONTSTECKER 392 40 POLIG UL Listed: NRAQ E116536
S7_313C 1 E65217057 6ES7392-1AM00-0AA0 FRONTSTECKER 392 40 POLIG UL Listed: NRAQ E116536
E904 1 E65235657 6AV6642-0BA01-1AX0 TOUCH PANEL TP 177B DP/PN COL. UL Listed: NRAQ E116536
E907 1 E65235657 6AV6642-0BA01-1AX0 TOUCH PANEL TP 177B DP/PN COL. UL Listed: NRAQ E116536
T35 1 E65521029 PSL1 240 24 SCHALTNETZTEIL PSL1 240 24
R73 1 E66500530 TYPE M22-R10K POTENTIOMETER 10K OHM REX UL Listed: NKCR E29184 CSA: 3211-03 12528
R283 1 E66500530 TYPE M22-R10K POTENTIOMETER 10K OHM UL Listed: NKCR E29184 CSA: 3211-03 12528
R777 1 E66500530 TYPE M22-R10K POTENTIOMETER 10K OHM UL Listed: NKCR E29184 CSA: 3211-03 12528
K758 1 E67106057 Type 3TK2841-1BB40 SICHERHEITSSCHALTGERÄT 3TK2841 UL Listed: E44653

Änderung
change
Datum
date
Name
name
Bearb.
sheet 265
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Legende Frequenzumrichter legend inverter

Betriebsmittelkennzeichen Bezeichnung Platzierung Montageort Nennleistung Artikelnummer
Device tag Designation Placement mounting site motor power Part number
E61 REX Hauptantrieb /6.1 REX 1,5 kW E61522057

REX maindrive
E71 Spreizbandstauber /7.0 REX 0,37 kW E61520057
fingerbeltduster
E161 Antrieb Vorgärschrank /16.0 0,37 kW E61520057
drive first prover
E261 Unterband /26.0 1,5 kW E61522057
bottom belt
E264 Oberband /26.3 0,37 kW E61520057
top belt
E267 Kalibrierwalze /26.6 0,37 kW E61520057
calibrating roller
E361 Antrieb Mohner /36.0 0,37 kW E61520057
drive seeder
E363 Streuer /36.3 0,37 kW E61520057
strewer
E401 Abziehbandantrieb /40.0 0,37 kW E61520057
retracting belt drive

Änderung
change
Datum
date
Name
name
Bearb.
Zeichnungsnummer
sheet 270
KOENIG MASCHINEN
Schaltplannummer
wiring diagram number
06.11.0.3459
3x400V+N / 50Hz
Besteht aus Analyse
Datum 13-02-05
Zeit 10:24:15
Seite 1(5)
User: MKORBELIUS

GRZ B99999 RSAUSENG 0 01 FARBE
C06.6.03/14/02 10 0
ELECTRIC-CL600 (S7) 3459
wiring diagram 06.11.0.3459
Basic I+CL600+RR+MOC+AB
3x380-415V+N
0010 10 0607148 06C A 2 BEFESTIGUNG KABELKANAL 1 0
0020 20 0607220 02A 1 HANDLE 1 0
0030 10 0607220 ZM 1 FRONT PANEL 1 0
0040 20 0660319 01A 1 SUPPORT RAIL 1 0
0050 10 0660531 ZD 1 SWITCH BOX 1 0
0060 10 0660534 ZB 1 PANEL 1 0
0070 10 0660535 05B 2 DICHTUNGSPROFIL 1 0
0080 10 0660535 05C 2 DICHTUNGSPROFIL 1 0
0090 10 0660535 ZD 1 DOOR 1 0
0100 20 0660536 01A 2 U-PROFILE 1 0
0110 10 0660537 03A 1 ABDECKBLECH 1 0
0120 20 0661008 01A 1 ANGLE IRON 1 0
0130 10 0661230 07A 1 KABELTASSE 1 0
0140 E12103015 2 VORREIBER - EDELSTAHL 2 0
0150 E12109562 2 HINGE TO SCREW IN,120 DEGREES 2 0
ANSCHRAUBSCHARNIER 120 GRAD
EDELSTAHL
VERDECKT LIEGEND
RECHTS U. LINKS EINSETZBAR,
SCHARNIERBOCK M. EINGEPR. GEWB: M6
SCHARNIERROLLE ANSCHRAUBBAR
STIFT OHNE NUT
(243-9208)
0200 E60330030 1 CAP H-P1 0 0
(017253)
0210 E60365065 1 OPERATING HOURS COUNTER 2 0
TYPE BG 70.29, 12...48 VDC,
ART.NR. 711408 + 711812
45X35 MM, SCHNAPPBAR
MIT KLEMMENABDECKUNG
TELE-HAASE
!!!!Nur komplette Sets liefern !!!!
0220 E60400230 3 EMERGENCY-OFF-SWITCH 2 0
TYPE M22-PV
ORDER-NO. 216876
0230 E60400430 1 PUSH BUTTON FLAT,WITHOUT PLATE 2 0
TYPE M22-D-X
ORDER NO. 216602
FRONT RING TITANIUM
0240 E60402030 3 DOUBLE PUSH BUTTON 1/0 2 0
TYPE M22-DDL-GR-X1/X0
ORDER NO. 216700
FRONT RING TITANIUM
BUTTON PLATE 1/0
0250 E60405030 4 CONTACT ELEMENT 1S FRONT FIX. 2 0
TYPE M22-K10
ORDER NO. 216376
NORMALLY OPEN CONTACT
0260 E60405130 8 CONTACT ELEMENT 10 FRONT FIX. 2 0
TYPE M22-K01
ORDER-NO. 216378
CLOSED CONTACT
0270 E60405230 5 FIXING ADAPTOR FRONT HOLD. 2 0
TYPE M22-A
ORDER-NO. 216374
0280 E60405530 1 CONTACT ELEMENT 1S FLOOR FIX. 2 0
TYPE M22-KC10
ORDER NO. 216380
FLOOR FIXING
0290 E60405630 4 CONTACT ELEMENT 1O FLOOR FIX. 2 0
TYPE M22-KC01
ORDER NO. 216382
CLOSING CONTACT
FLOOR FIXING
0300 E60407030 2 PLATE HOLDER
www.koenig-rex.com
Besteht aus Analyse
Datum 13-02-05
Zeit 10:24:15
Seite 2(5)
User: MKORBELIUS
2 0
TYPE M22S-ST-X
ORDER NO. 216392
FOR BUTTONS, LAMPS (ROUND)
0310 E60408030 2 INSERT PLATE 2 0
TYPE M22-XST
ORDER NO. 216480
PLATE SIZE 18X27 MM
0320 E60410130 5 EMERGENCY STOP LABEL 2 0
0330 E60411030 14 BLIND 2 0
TYPE M22S-B
ORDER NO. 216390
0340 E60415230 1 BUTTON PLATE BLUE 2 0
TYPE M22-XD-B-GB14
BLUE PLATE labeled "RESET"
ORDER NO. 218204
FOR SINGLE PUSH BUTTON M22-D-X
0350 E60422330 1 AUFBAUGEHAEUSE 3-FACH 1 0
0360 E60425030 2 CAP RAIL ADAPTOR 2 0
TYPE M22-IVS
ORDER NO. 216400
FOR 1 UNIT
0370 E60460030 1 AKUSTIKMELDER 2 0
0380 E60460130 1 INSERT SUMMER BA9S 18-30V 2 0
0390 E60903645 5 PLUG V1-W-5M-PVC P&F 2 0
0400 E60903745 4 PLUG-G-5M-PVC P&F 2 0
0410 E60904145 9 PROXIMITY SWITCH P&F 2 0
Näherungsschalter NJ 4 St.EX
TYPE NJ 4-12 GM 40-E2-V1-3G-3D
10-60 V DC PNP, INDUKTIV,
SCHLIESSER ,1 LED ,
GEWINDE M12,
SCHALTABSTAND 4 MM, N.BUENDIG
MIT STECKERAUSFÜHRUNG V1
086389
(FÜR EX-BEREICH ZONE 22)
(Alternativ:NCN4-12GM40-E2-V1-3G-3D)
(Angebot 9901068008)
UL gebprüft
Alte Ausführung bis April 2008
Näherungsschalter NJ 4 St.
YPE NJ 4-12 GM 40-E2-V1
10-60 VDC PNP, SCHLIESSER,
INDUKTIV, M12 GEWINDE, 1 LED,
SCHALTABSTAND 4 MM / NICHT
BUENDIG,
MIT STECKERAUSFUEHRUNG V1
086389
ALTERNATIV: -TS-16 BI 4U-EM12WD

(Fa. Haider)
0420 E61010048 4 TRANSISTOR MODULE PHOENIX 2 0
DEK-OV-24 DC/24 DC/3
INPUT 24 VDC
OUTPUT 24 VDC / 3 A
ART.NO. 29 41 37 4
0430 E61021548 5 RELAIS MODUL PHOENIX 2 0
TYPE EMG 10-REL/KSR-G24/21-LC
0440 E61520057 6 CONVERTER MICROMASTER 420 0.37 2 0
6SE6420-2AB13-7AA0
POWER: 0.37 KW
INPUT: 1 AC 200-240 V +/-10%
OUTPUT:3 AC 0-INPUT V
SIE
2.3 A / 0-650 HZ
WITH INTERNAL FILTER CLASS A
(** ATTENTION ORDER OPERATION
PANEL SEPARATELY ! E615.29057)
0450 E61522057 1 CONVERTER MICROMASTER 420 1.5 2 0
6SE6420-2UD21-5AA0
POWER: 1.5 KW
INPUT: 3 AC 380V-480V +/-10%
OUTPUT: 3 AC 0-INPUT V
7.4 A / 0-650 HZ
WITHOUT FILTER
(** ATTENTION ORDER OPERATION
PANEL SEPARATELY ! E615.29057)
0460 E61522457 1 EMV Filter KLASSE A 2 0
6SE6400-2FA00-6AD0
380V-480V / 3AC / 6A
Unterbau FSA
www.koenig-rex.com
Besteht aus Analyse
Datum 13-02-05
Zeit 10:24:15
Seite 3(5)
User: MKORBELIUS
(PASSEND FÜR UMRICHTER

E61520557 + E61521557 + E61522057)
0470 E61529057 7 OPERATION PANEL F. MICROMASTER 2 0
6SE6400-0BP00-0AA0
(TO: E615.20057, E615.21057,
E615.22557, E615.22057,
E615.23057, )
0480 E62097169 1 CONTROLLER-CABLE 1 0
0490 E62326074 6 SICHERUNGSKLEMME 881004 0000 1 0
0500 E62850078 1 FEUCHTRAUMWANNENLEUCHTE 18W 1 0
0510 E62900744 1 E39-R3 ACCESSORIES 2 0
0520 E62906044 1 LASER LEIGHT BARRIER OMRON 2 0
0530 E62906144 1 PLUG 5M F.E629.06044 2 0
0540 E63003230 1 EINBAU - HAUPTSCHALTER K&M 32A 2 0
0550 E63700557 1 MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCH 0.7-1A 2 0
SIRIUS 3RV1021-0JA10
SIZE S0
0560 E63700657 1 MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCH 2 0
1.1-1.6 A,SIRIUS 3RV1021-1AA10
SIZE S0
0570 E63700757 1 MOTOR PROTECT. SWITCH 1.8-2.5A 2 0
SIRIUS 3RV1021-1CA10
SIZE S0
0580 E63700957 4 AUXILIARY SWITCH SIEMENS 2 0
SIRIUS 3RV1901-1E
HORIZONTAL 1S+10E
FOR MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCH
SIZE S00, S0, S2, S3
0590 E63701657 1 MOTOR PROTECTIVE SWITCH 2 0
0600 E63702357 2 THREE-PHASE BUSBAR (2) 2 0
SIRIUS 3RV1915-1A
FOR 2 SWITCHES
0610 E63795030 1 SURGE ARRESTER 2 0
SURGE ARRESTER 3+1 pol.
Type SPC-S-3+1
Art. No.248193
3x230/400VAC
Arrester class C
Pluggable
Max. pre fuse =160A
Spare part for:
E63795230 L1/L2/L3 (SPC-S-20/335)
E63795330 N (SPC-S-N/PE)
0620 E63795130 1 HILFSSCHALTER Z. E63795030 2 0
auxiliary contact for SPC-S
Type SPC-S-HK
Art. No. 248203
(for E63795030)
0630 E64842530 1 FEHLERSTROMSCHUTZSCHALTER 2 0
2-pol.25/0,03
Type PFIM-25/2/003-MW
Art. Nr. 235390
Nennstrom 25A
Auslösung 30mA
2- polig
0640 E64871030 4 CIRCUIT BRAKER 2 0
0650 E64871130 1 LEITUNGSSCHUTZSCHALTER 10A/3+N 2 0
0660 E64871630 2 PROTECTION CIRCUIT 16A/3+N 2 0
0670 E64877030 6 AUXILIARY SWITCH 1S +1 OE 2 0
0680 E64878030 9 ANGLE BRACKET L1/N 2 0
0690 E64878130 10 ANGLE BRACKET L2/L3 2 0
0700 E64878230 4 ANGLE BRACKET N 2 0
0710 E64879030 4 SAMMELSCHIENE 80A 2 0
0720 E64879130 1 COATING PROFILE 2 0
0730 E64879230 2 ENDKAPPE 2 0
0740 E64900357 1 CONTACTOR 3RT1017-1BB44-3MA0 2 0
SCHUETZ, AC-3, 5,5KW/400V,
2S+2OE, UNLOESBAR,
DC 24V, 3POLIG, BGR. S00,
SCHRAUBANSCHLUSS
FUER SUVA APPLIKATIONEN
0750 E64900457 6 CONTACTOR 3RT1025-1BB44-3MA0 2 0
SCHUETZ, AC-3, 7,5KW/400V,
2S+2OE, UNLOESBAR
DC 24V, 3POLIG, BGR.S0,
SCHRAUBANSCHLUSS
www.koenig-rex.com
Besteht aus Analyse
Datum 13-02-05
Zeit 10:24:15
Seite 4(5)
User: MKORBELIUS
FUER SUVA APPLIKATIONEN

0760 E64900957 4 CONTACTOR 4KW, 10E 2 0
0770 E64901057 5 CONTACTOR 4 KW, 1S 2 0
SIRIUS 3RT1016-1BB41
AC-3 4 KW / 400 V,
COIL 24 V DC
SIZE S00
0780 E64901157 2 AUXILIARY SWITCH BLOCK 1S+1OE 2 0
SIRIUS 3RH1911-1FA11
0790 E64901557 2 WIRING KIT 2 0
SIRIUS 3RA1913-2A
FOR REVERSING
CONTACTOR BGR S00
0800 E64902057 10 SUPPRESSOR DIODE, DC 12..250 V 2 0
SIRIUS 3RT1916-1DG00
FOR CONTACTOR SIZE S00 3RT1.
0810 E64902357 6 RC-CIRCUIT 2 0
0820 E65017078 1 WALL SOCKET 2 0
TYPE MPE 03240
0830 E65018078 1 SCHUKO STECKDOSE-AP MIT 0 0
0840 E65050157 3 ANSCHLUSSSTECKER F. PROFIBUS 2 0
0850 E65200057 1 PROFILE RAIL L= 530 MM 2 0
TYPE 6ES7390-1AF30-0AA0
FOR S7-300
0860 E65200857 1 CENTRAL UNIT CPU 313C 2 0
0870 E65205157 1 MICRO MEMORY CARD MC 953/64K 2 0
TYPE 6ES7953-8LF20-0AA0
FOR S7-300/C7/ET 200S
IM151 CPU,
3,3 V NFLASH, 64 KBYTE
(used in E652.00157, E652.00257,
E652.00657, E652.00857)
OLD TYPE 6ES7953-8LF11-0AA0
0880 E65207057 2 DIGITAL INPUT SM 321 (32DE) 2 0
TYPE 6ES 7321-1BL00-0AA0
FOR S7-300, POTENTIAL BROKEN
32 DE, 24 V DC (1X32 DE)
0890 E65208057 1 DIGITAL OUTPUT SM 322 (32DA) 2 0
TYPE 6ES7322-1BL00-0AA0
FOR S7-300, POTENTIAL BROKEN
32 DA, 24 V DC, 0.5 A
TOTAL CURRENT 8 A,
0900 E65211057 1 ANALOG OUTPUT SM 332 (8AA) 2 0
0910 E65217057 6 FRONT PLUG 392 40-POLE 2 0
TYPE 6ES7392-1AM00-0AA0
F. S7-300, W. SCREW CONTACTS
0920 E65235657 2 TOUCH PANEL TP 177B DP/PN COL. 2 0
TYPE 6AV6642-0BA01-1AX0
5,7" STN 256 Color-DISPLAY,
MPI/PROFIBUS-DP Protokoll
RS 485-/RS422-/USB Schnittstelle
Drucker Schnittstelle
Slot für MM-Card
0930 E65521029 1 SWITCHING POWER SUPPLY 10A 0 0
PSL1 240 24
Input: 90-132VAC/186-264VAC/210-370VAC
Output: 24 VDC / 10 A
0940 E66500530 2 POTENTIOMETER 10K OHM 2 0
TYPE M22-R10K
ORDER NO. 229491
FITTING DIAMETER = 22 MM
SCALE 1-10
0950 E67106057 4 SAFETY REALY 1 0
Serie Sirius
Typ 3TK2841-1BB40
FOR SAFETY LEVEL Category 4 / SIL 3
SUPPLY 24 VDC
2 OUTPUT 24 VDC/2A
0160 E30000005 8 HEXAGON NUT M5 DIN 934 STAINL. 2 0
STEEL A2
0170 E34200005 8 WASHER M5,DIN 125 NIROSTA 1 0
0180 E34220005 8 LOCKING WASHER S 5 STAINLESS 1 0
STEEL;A2 M 5
0190 E39400516 4 SAUCER HEAD SCREW M5X16 1 0
DIN 603;STAINLESS STEEL A2
www.koenig-rex.com
Besteht aus Analyse
Datum 13-02-05
Zeit 10:24:15
Seite 5(5)
User: MKORBELIUS
www.koenig-rex.com
Besteht aus Analyse
Datum 13-02-05
Zeit 10:27:57
Seite 1(2)
User: MKORBELIUS

GRZ COMBILI RSAUSENG 0 02 FARBE
C59.3.00/00/04 10 0
ELECTRIC AB600
switch, sensors and terminal box for
when mounted an AB600
Designed 04.05.2011
0030 E60400230 1 EMERGENCY-OFF-SWITCH 2 0
TYPE M22-PV
ORDER-NO. 216876
0040 E60400330 1 SELECTOR BUTTON 2 POSITIONS 2 0
TYPE M22-WRK T-HANDLE
ORDER NO. 216867
FRONT RING TITANIUM
0050 E60402030 1 DOUBLE PUSH BUTTON 1/0 2 0
TYPE M22-DDL-GR-X1/X0
ORDER NO. 216700
FRONT RING TITANIUM
BUTTON PLATE 1/0
0060 E60405530 2 CONTACT ELEMENT 1S FLOOR FIX. 2 0
TYPE M22-KC10
ORDER NO. 216380
FLOOR FIXING
0070 E60405630 4 CONTACT ELEMENT 1O FLOOR FIX. 2 0
TYPE M22-KC01
ORDER NO. 216382
CLOSING CONTACT
FLOOR FIXING
0080 E60407030 3 PLATE HOLDER 2 0
TYPE M22S-ST-X
ORDER NO. 216392
FOR BUTTONS, LAMPS (ROUND)
0090 E60408030 3 INSERT PLATE 2 0
TYPE M22-XST
ORDER NO. 216480
PLATE SIZE 18X27 MM
0100 E60410130 1 EMERGENCY STOP LABEL 2 0
0110 E60411030 3 BLIND 2 0
TYPE M22S-B
ORDER NO. 216390
0120 E60422630 1 AUFBAUGEHAEUSE 6-FACH 2 0
0130 E60900261 1 LIMIT SWITCH 2 0
0160 E60903645 2 PLUG V1-W-5M-PVC P&F 2 0
0170 E60904145 2 PROXIMITY SWITCH P&F 2 0
Näherungsschalter NJ 4 St.EX
TYPE NJ 4-12 GM 40-E2-V1-3G-3D
10-60 V DC PNP, INDUKTIV,
SCHLIESSER ,1 LED ,
GEWINDE M12,
SCHALTABSTAND 4 MM, N.BUENDIG
MIT STECKERAUSFÜHRUNG V1
086389
(FÜR EX-BEREICH ZONE 22)
(Alternativ:NCN4-12GM40-E2-V1-3G-3D)
(Angebot 9901068008)
UL gebprüft
Alte Ausführung bis April 2008
Näherungsschalter NJ 4 St.
YPE NJ 4-12 GM 40-E2-V1
10-60 VDC PNP, SCHLIESSER,
INDUKTIV, M12 GEWINDE, 1 LED,
SCHALTABSTAND 4 MM / NICHT
BUENDIG,
MIT STECKERAUSFUEHRUNG V1
086389
ALTERNATIV: -TS-16 BI 4U-EM12WD

(Fa. Haider)
0180 E60920985 2 PROXIMITY SWITCH 2 0
0190 E60935061 2 SAFETY SWITCH - SCHMERSAL 2 0
Sicherheitsschalter magnetisch
Type BNS 16-12z-V
vorderseitig Betätigungsrichtung
1S/2OE max. 100VAC/DC-400mA
Einführung 3xM20x1,5
www.koenig-rex.com
Besteht aus Analyse
Datum 13-02-05
Zeit 10:27:57
Seite 2(2)
User: MKORBELIUS
Schaltabstand 8-18 mm
[Betätiger BPS 16 (E60935161)
muss extra bestellt werden]
0200 E60935161 2 SOLENOID BPS 16 2 0
TYPE AZ 15 ZVR
0210 E62906044 1 LASER LEIGHT BARRIER OMRON 2 0
0220 E62906144 1 PLUG 5M F.E629.06044 2 0
0230 E64610052 1 SCHALTSCHRANK 380/300/150 SO 2 0
www.koenig-rex.com
Schmierstoffmengen, Inspektionsintervalle
Lubricant capacity, Inspection intervals
MAS 2000 - MAS 2000 - MAS 2000 - MAS 2000 -

Stirnradgetriebemotoren Aufsteckgetriebemotoren Flachgetriebemotoren Kegelstirnradgetriebemotoren
Helical geared motors Shaft mounted geared motors Parallel shaft geared motors Helical bevel geared motors
MAS 2000 - MAS 2000 - EUSAS-Motor WAR

Stirnradschneckengetriebemotoren Kegelflachgetriebemotoren EUSAS-motor WAR
Helical worm geared motors Angle parallel shaft geared motors
MAS 2000 - Getriebe und Getriebemotoren

MAS 2000 - Gear units and geared motors
MAS
06/2006
Betriebsanleitung für MAS 2000 - Getriebe und Getriebemotoren
Operating instructions for MAS 2000 - Gear units and geared motors
Schmierung, Inspektion und Wartung Lubrication, inspection and maintenace

Schmierung bei Stirnrad-, Aufsteck-, Flach-, Lubrication at helical, shaft mounted, parallel
Kegelflach- und Kegelstirnradgetriebe shaft, angle parallel shaft and helical bevel
Getriebeeinheiten (mit Adapter oder Eintriebswelle - geschlos- gear units
sene Ausführung) und Getriebemotoren werden betriebsfertig Gear units (with adapter or input shaft - closed design) and
geliefert, befüllt mit Mineralöl, mit der bauformgerechten geared motors are supplied ready for use and filled with the
Schmierstoffmenge, welche der folgenden Tabelle auf den correct volume of mineral oil for the required mounting posi-
Seiten 7 bis 12 entnommen werden kann. Standardbefüllung tion (see tables on pages 7 to 12 below). Standard lubrication
mit Getriebeöl (Schmieröltyp Kennzeichnung nach DIN51502 is with gear oil (oil type as per DIN 51502 CLP220, viscosity
CLP220, Viskositätsklasse nach ISO VG 220 nach DIN51519) class as per ISO VG220 to DIN 51502) for ambient temperatu-
für Umgebungstemperatur -10°C (14°F) bis +40°C (104°F). res from -10°C (14°F) to +40°C (104°F).
Schmierung bei Stirnradschneckengetriebe Lubrication at helical worm gear units

Getriebeeinheiten (mit Adapter oder Eintriebswelle - geschlos- Gear units (with adapter or input shaft - closed design) and
sene Ausführung) und Getriebemotoren werden betriebsfertig geared motors are supplied ready for use and filled with the
geliefert, befüllt mit synthetischem Schmierstoff, mit der correct volume of synthetic lubricant for the required moun-
bauformgerechten Schmierstoffmenge, welche der folgenden ting position.
Tabelle entnommen werden. Every gear unit has a nameplate indicating the recommended
Jedes Getriebe ist mit einem Typenschild versehen, auf dem die lubricant.
Ölspezifikation ersichtlich ist.
Getriebeentlüftung: Bleeding the gear unit:

Bei Getrieben in denen Entlüftungsschrauben mit If a vent plug with transport locking device is used in the gear
Transportsicherung verwendet werden, ist die unit, the vent plug is placed at the proper position for the
Entlüftungsschraube an der der Bauform entsprechenden mounting position.
Position eingeschraubt. The rubber strip on the vent plug must be completely torn off
Die Gummilasche der Entlüftungsschraube ist vor der before the unit is put into operation.
Inbetriebnahme komplett abzureißen.
Hinweisschild (rot)
Information labels (red)
Antriebe, welche ohne Ölfüllung bestellt werden, kommen mit Gear units that are ordered without oil filling are supplied with
Innenkonservierung zur Auslieferung. Die Innenkonservierung internal rust proofing consisting of anti-corrosion oil. The anti-
der Getriebe erfolgt mit Korrosionsschutzöl. Das corrosion oil can however be mixed with the recommended
Konservierungsöl ist auf jeden Fall mit der am Typenschild lubricant indicated on the nameplate. This means that the unit
angegebenen Öltype mischbar, sodaß die Getriebe vor der does not have to be flushed before filling with oil.
Befüllung nicht ausgespült werden müssen.
Inspektion und Wartung Inspection and maintenace

Getriebe der Baureihen H, A, F, K in den Größen 40, 50, 55, 60, Gear units of the model range H, A, F, K, size 40, 50, 55, 60,
65 werden wartungsfrei ausgeführt, es ist kein Wechsel des and 65 are maintenance-free, an oil change is not necessary.
Schmiermittels erforderlich. Diese Antriebe werden ohne The gear units are executed without breather plug, there are
Entlüftungsventil ausgeführt, es gibt keine Ölablass-, no oil drain-, oil level respectively oil filling screws.
Ölstands- bzw. Ölbefüllschrauben. In the case of gear units of model range H, A, F, K, C size 70,
Bei Getrieben der Baureihen H, A, F, K, C in den Größen 70, 75, 75, 80, 85, 110, 130, 133, 136 and all helical worm gear units,
80, 85, 110, 130, 133, 136 und bei allen an oil change has to be executed corresponding to the main-
Stirnradschneckengetrieben Baureihe S ist entsprechend den tenance periods. The gear units are executed with oil drain-,
Wartungsintervallen ein Schmierstoffwechsel durchzufüh- respectively oil filling screws for the main mounting positions.
ren. Diese Getriebe sind für die Hauptbauformen mit entspre-
chenden Ölablass- bzw. Ölbefüllschrauben ausgestattet. For special applications under difficult/aggressive ambient
conditions an oil change has to be done frequently!
Bei Sonderausführungen unter erschwerten/aggresiven
Umgebungsbedingungen Öl öfters wechseln!
Die genauen Ölmengen sind auf den Typenschildern der For the exact volume of oil, see the gear unit nameplate.
Antriebe angegeben. The oil volumes indicated in liters below are only a guideline.
Die auf den nachfolgenden angeführten Ölmengen in Liter sind
Anhaltswerte.
WATT DRIVE GMBH A-2753 Markt Piesting AUSTRIA Wöllersdorfer Str. 68 Tel.:+43/2633/404-0 Fax: +43/2633/404-220 www.wattdrive.com [email protected]
1
Inspektions- und Wartungsintervalle Inspection and maintenance intervals
Zeitintervall Inspektions- und Wartungsarbeit

- Getriebe auf Geräuschveränderungen (Laufge-
räusche der Verzahnung und der Wälzlager) kontrollieren
monatlich - Gehäusetemperatur kontrollieren (max. 90°C)
- Sichtkontrolle der Dichtungen auf Leckage
- Staubablagerungen entfernen
alle 3 Monate - Entlüftungsventil äußerlich reinigen
- Gummipuffer überprüfen
halbjährlich
- Befestigungsschrauben auf festen Sitz kontrollieren
Alle 5.000 Betriebsstunden, - Sichtprüfung der Wellendichtringe auf Leckage;
spätestens alle 4 Jahre gegebenenfalls Wellendichtringe tauschen
- Ölwechsel:
Stirnradgetriebe H. 70. - H. 136.
alle 10.000 Betriebsstunden, Flachgetriebe F.. 75. - F.. 136.
spätestens alle 5 Jahre Aufsteckgetriebe A.. 75. - A.. 85.
Kegelstirnradgetriebe K.. 70. - K.. 136.
Kegelflachgetriebe C.. 70. - C.. 130.
alle 20.000 Betriebsstunden, - Ölwechsel:
spätestens alle 5 Jahre alle Stirnradschneckengetriebe
alle 10 Jahre Generalüberholung
Time interval Inspection and maintenance work

- gear units must be checked for noise changes
(running noise of the gearing and rolling bearings)
- Check the housing temperature (max. 90°C)
monthly
- Visible inspection of seals for leakage
- Remove dust deposits
every 3 months - Clean the exterior of the vent plug

- Check the rubber buffer set
every half year - Check the fixing bolts to make certain they are tight
every 5.000 service hours, - Visual check of the shaft seals;
no later than every 4 years if applicable replace the shaft seals
- Oil change:
Helical gear unit H. 70. - H. 136.
every 10.000 service hours, Parallel shaft gear unit F.. 75. - F.. 136.
no later than every 5 years Sahft mounted gear unit A.. 75. - A.. 85.
Helical bevel gear unit K.. 70. - K.. 136.
Angle parallel shaft gear unit C.. 70. - C.. 130.
every 20.000 service hours, - Oil change:
no later than every 5 years all helical worm gear units
every 10 years General recovery
2
Schmierstoffempfehlung Recommended lubricants
Für Stirnrad-, Aufsteck-, Flach-, Kegelflach- und For helical, shaft mounted, parallel shaft, angle parallel
Kegelstirnradgetriebe bei einer Umgebungs- shaft and helical bevel gear units at ambient tempera-
temperatur: -10°C bis +40°C (14°F bis 104°F) ture: -10°C up to +40°C (14°F up to 104°F)
Degol BG 220 Klüberoil GEM 1-220
Energol GR-XP 220 Mobilgear 630
ALPHA SP 220 Shell Omala OIL 220
Spartan EP 220
Synthetisches Schmiermittel für Stirnradschnecken Synthetic lubricant for helical worm gear units at
-getriebe bei einer Umgebungstemperatur: ambient temperature:
-20°C bis +60°C (4°F bis 140°F) -20°C up to +60°C (4°F up to 140°F)
Degol GS 460 Glygoyle HE 460
Alpha SYN PG 460 Tivela OIL SD
Glycolube S460 Enersyn SG-XP 460
Keinesfalls verschiedene Schmierstoffe miteinander Do not mix different types of lubricant.

mischen!
Schmiermittel für abweichende Umgebungsbedingungen auf Lubricants for other ambient conditions on request.
Anfrage.
Lebensmittelverträgliche und biologische abbaubare Food proofed and biodegradable lubricants on request.
Schmiermittel auf Anfrage.
3
BAUFORMEN MOUNTING POSITIONS
KLEMMKASTENLAGE (A,B,C,D) und KABELEINFÜHRUNG ( I , II , III )
POSITION of TERMINAL BOX (A,B,C,D) and CABLE ENTRY ( I , II , III )
B3/B5 B6 B7
B5
B3
B8 V1/V5 V3/V6 V3
V5
V6
V1
E ... Entlüftungsschraube / vent plug

Bei Getriebetypen H40, H50, H55, H60, H65 - Gear unit sizes H40, H50, H55, H60, H65 -
werden bei jeder Einbaulage im Standard keine no vent plugs used in any mounting position as stan-
Entlüftungsschrauben verwendet. dard.
SCHMIERSTOFFMENGEN LUBRICANT CAPACITY
Bauformen / Mounting positions
Type
B3/B5 B6 B7 B8 V1/V5 V3/V6
H. 40A,S 0,5 l
H. 50A,S 0,7 l
H. 55A 0,9 l
H. 60A,S 1,1 l
≤WAR114 1,2 l
H. 65A
≥WAR134 1,6 l
≤WAR114 1,8 l
H. 70A,S
2-stufig
2-stage
≥WAR134 2,3 l
≤WAR114 2,5 l
H. 80A
≥WAR134 3,0 l
≤WAR114 3,0 l
H. 85A,S
≥WAR134 3,4 l
H. 110A,S 8,0 l
H. 130A,S 12,0 l
H. 133A,S 23,0 l
H. 136A 34,0 l
H. 50C 1,1 l
H. 55C 1,2 l
H. 60C 1,4 l
H. 65C 1,6 l
3-stufig
3-stage
H. 70C 2,3 l
H. 80C 3,6 l
H. 85C 4,0 l
H. 110C 12,0 l
H. 130C 17,0 l
H. 133C 29,0 l
H. 136C 42,0 l
H. 70D 2,7 l
H. 80D 3,8 l
H. 85D 4,5 l
4-stufig
4-stage
H. 110D 13,0 l
H. 130D 18,0 l
H. 133D 30,0 l
H. 136D 48,0 l
H. 110F 13,5 l
5-stufig
5-stage
H. 130F 18,5 l
H. 133F 30,5 l
H. 136F 49,0 l
Bei Anbau eines Adapters sind folgende Mindermengen zu If an adapter is mounted, please note the following reductions
berücksichtigen: in lubricant volume:
IEC/AD 63-90 IEC/AD 101-112 IEC/AD 132 IEC/AD 160-180 IEC/AD 200-225
WN 4-6 WN 7-8
-0,1 l -0,2 l -0,4 l -0,4 l auf Anfrage / on request
4
KLEMMKASTENLAGE (A,B,C,D) und KABELEINFÜHRUNG ( I , II , III )
POSITION of TERMINAL BOX (A,B,C,D) and CABLE ENTRY ( I , II , III )
B3/B5 B6 B7
B5
B3
B8 V1/V5 V3/V6 V3
V5 V6
V1
Bei Getriebetypen H. 40E, H. 50E, H. 60E - Gear unit sizes H. 40E, H. 50E, H. 60E -

Type
B3/B5 B6 B7 B8 V1/V5 V3/V6
H. 40E 0,3 l
H. 50E 0,35 l
≤WAR114 0,5 l
H. 60E ≥WAR134
1-stufig
1-stage
0,9 l
≤WAR114 1,0 l
H. 70E ≥WAR134 1,3 l
≤WAR114 1,5 l
H. 80E ≥WAR134 1,8 l
WN 4-6 WN 7-8
5
KLEMMKASTENLAGE (1,2,3,4) und KABELEINFÜHRUNG ( I , II , III )

POSITION of TERMINAL BOX (1,2,3,4) and CABLE ENTRY ( I , II , III ) H3.. H4.. H1..
H2.. V5.. V6..
Bei Getriebetypen A.. 40., A.. 45., A.. 55., A.. 65. - Gear unit sizes A.. 40., A.. 45., A.. 55., A.. 65. -
Type Bauformen / Mounting positions

H1 H2 H3 V6 H4 V5
A.. 40A 0,75 l
A.. 45A 1,1 l
A.. 55A,S 1,2 l
2-stufig
2-stage
≤WAR114 2,9 l
A.. 65A,S ≥WAR134
2,9 l
≤WAR114 5,1 l
A.. 75A,S ≥WAR134
5,1 l
≤WAR114 9,6 l
A.. 85A,S ≥WAR134
9,6 l
A.. 55C 1,6 l
4-st. 3-stufig
4-st. 3-stage
A.. 65C 3,4 l

A.. 75C 5,5 l
A.. 85C 10,4 l
A.. 75D 6,3 l
A.. 85D 10,8 l
WN 4-6 WN 7-8
6

POSITION of TERMINAL BOX (1,2,3,4) and CABLE ENTRY ( I , II , III ) H3.. H4.. H1..
H2.. V5.. V6..
Bei Getriebetypen F.. 55., F.. 65. - Gear unit sizes F.. 55., F.. 65. -

Type
H1 H2 H3 V5 H4 V6
F.. 55A,S 1,4 l
≤WAR114 2,9 l
F.. 65A,S
≥WAR134 3,2 l
≤WAR114 5,3 l
2-stufig
2-stage
F.. 75A,S ≥WAR134 5,5 l

≤WAR114 10,4 l
F.. 85A,S
≥WAR134 10,4 l
F.. 110A,S 14,0 l
F.. 130A,S 22,0 l
3-
3-
F.. 136A 45,0 l

F.. 55C 1,8 l
F.. 65C 3,4 l
3-stufig
3-stage
F.. 75C 6,1 l

F.. 85C 11,4 l
F.. 110C 17,0 l
F.. 130C 28,0 l
4-
4-
F.. 136C 51,0 l

F.. 75D 6,4 l
5- 4-stufig
5- 4-stage
F.. 85D 11,9 l

F.. 110D 18,0 l
F.. 130D 29,0 l
F.. 136D 52,0 l
WN 4-6 WN 7-8
7
KLEMMKASTENLAGE (1,2,3,4) und KABELEINFÜHRUNG ( I , II , III ) K.. 85., K..110., K.. 136.
POSITION of TERMINAL BOX (1,2,3,4) and CABLE ENTRY ( I , II , III ) H3..
H4.. H5.. H6..
V1.. V2..
A ... Ölablaßschraube / oil drain plug
Ö ... Ölstandsschraube / oil-level plug
Bei Getriebetypen K.. 40., K.. 50., K.. 60. - Gear unit sizes K.. 40., K.. 50., K.. 60. -
Type
H3 H4 V1 V2 H5 H6
K.. 40A 1,0 l
K.. 50A 1,25 l
≤WAR114 2,0 l
2-stufig
K.. 60A
2-stage
≥WAR134 2,3 l
≤WAR114 3,9 l
K.. 70A
≥WAR134 3,9 l
≤WAR114 5,3 l
K.. 75A
≥WAR134 5,3 l
≤WAR114 4,5 l
K.. 77A
≥WAR134 4,5 l
≤WAR114 8,2 l
3-stufig
3-stage
K.. 80A
≥WAR134 8,2 l
≤WAR114 14,5 l
K.. 85A
≥WAR134 14,5 l
K.. 110A 23,5 l
K.. 136A 56,5 l
K.. 50C 1,5 l
3-stufig
3-stage
K.. 60C 2,4 l

K.. 70C 4,6 l
K.. 75C 6,0 l
K.. 77C 5,7 l
4-stufig
4-stage
K.. 80C 9,3 l

K.. 85C 15,6 l
K.. 110C 27,5 l
K.. 136C 67,5 l
4-st.
4-st.
K.. 70D 5,0 l

K.. 75D 6,4 l
K.. 77D 5,6 l
5-stufig
5-stage
K.. 80D 9,7 l

K.. 85D 16,0 l
K.. 110D 28,5 l
K.. 136D 63,5 l
WN 4-6 WN 7-8
8

POSITION of TERMINAL BOX (1,2,5,6) and CABLE ENTRY ( I , II , III ) H3.. H4..
Lage des Vorsatzgetriebes nach Seite 2 oder 5

Position of primary gear unit towards side 2 or 5 H1.. H2..
V5.. V6..

Bei allen Getriebetypen werden bei jeder Einbaulage All helical worm gear units have vent plugs in all
im Standard Entlüftungsschrauben verwendet. mounting positions as standard.

Type H1 H2 V5 H3 H4 V6
≤WAR114 2,9 l
C.. 70A ≥WAR134
3,2 l
≤WAR114 5,5 l
3-stufig
3-stage
C.. 80A ≥WAR134

5,8 l
≤WAR114 9,8 l
C.. 85A ≥WAR134
10,1 l
C.. 110A 15,0 l
C.. 130A 21,0 l
C.. 70C 3,5 l
4-stufig
6,5 l
4-stage
C.. 80C
C.. 85C 11,0 l
C.. 110C 19,0 l
C.. 130C 27,0 l
C.. 70D 3,9 l
5-stufig
5-stage
C.. 80D 7,3 l

C.. 85D 12,0 l
C.. 110D 20,0 l
C.. 130D 28,0 l
WN 4-6 WN 7-8
9

POSITION of TERMINAL BOX (1,2,3,4) and CABLE ENTRY ( I , II , III ) H3.. H4..
H5.. H6.. V1..
V2..
Bei allen Getriebetypen werden bei jeder Einbaulage All helical worm gear units have vent plugs in all
im Standard Entlüftungsschrauben verwendet. mounting positions as standard.

Type H3 V1 V2 H6 H5 H4
S.. 404A,B,S 0,5 l
S.. 454A,B,S 0,5 l
S.. 414A,B,S 0,55 l
2-stufig
S.. 464A,B,S 0,55 l

2-stage
S.. 455A,B,S 0,65 l

S.. 506A,B,S 1,2 l
S.. 507A,B,S 1,3 l
S.. 608A,B 2,1 l
≤WAR114 2,4 l
S.. 609A,B
≥WAR134 2,5 l
S.. 506C 1,5 l
3-stufig
3-stage
S.. 507C 1,6 l

S.. 608C 2,5 l
S.. 609C 2,8 l
WN 4-6 WN 7-8
-0,1 l -0,2 l -0,4 l auf Anfrage / on request
10
WATT Drives
the World
WATT DRIVE ANTRIEBSTECHNIK GMBH

A-2753 Markt Piesting
Wöllersdorfer Straße 68
Austria, EUROPE
Tel.: +43 / 2633 / 404-0
Fax: +43 / 2633 / 404-220
Email: [email protected]
Web: www.wattdrive.com
Für die Steuerung bedeutet dies, dass Um diese Anforderung zu erfüllen, müssen 5 Technische Daten
• Einschaltbefehle, die gefährdende Zustände
hervorrufen, erst dann wirksam werden dür-
• die Befestigungselemente zuverlässig sein
und zum Lösen ein Werkzeug erfordern,
!" Alle Kontaktpaare im gleichen Span-
nungsbereich betreiben.
! Alle spannungsführenden Teile auf einer 5.1 Allgemeine Systemdaten
SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems fen, wenn die Schutzeinrichtung in Schutzstel- • Vorkehrungen zur Sicherung des Form-
lung ist und gefährdende Zustände beendet schlusses nach der Einstellung getroffen Seite des Kontaktblocks anschließen. Gehäusewerkstoff UL geprüftes glasfaserverstärktes Polyester
Sebastian-Kneipp-Straße 1
D-79183 Waldkirch • www.sick.com sein müssen, bevor die Schutzstellung aufge- werden (z.B. Bolzen oder Passstifte), Schutzart nach IEC 60529 IP 67
8 010 153/25-11-02 • GO hoben ist. • die Sicherheitsschalter mit 2 Schrauben M 4 6
Mechanische Lebensdauer 1 x 10 Schaltspiele
Printed in Germany (11.02) Vor dem Einsatz von Sicherheitsschaltern ist montiert und die Schrauben mit 2,5 ... 3 Nm Betriebstemperatur –20 ... +80 °C
Alle Rechte vorbehalten • Angegebene Pro- eine Risikobeurteilung an der Maschine durch- angezogen werden.
dukteigenschaften und technische Daten stellen zuführen nach Anschlussart 1 x M 16
keine Garantieerklärung dar • EN 954-1, Sicherheitsbezogene Teile von 2.1 Umstellen der Betätigungs- Min. Kraft zur Kontaktunterbrechung 20 cNm (i10-HA) oder 35 cNm (i10-HB)
Steuerungen, Anhang C richtung Schaltwinkel 3° bis 11° (i10-HA), 5° bis 14° (i10-HB)
• EN 1050, Sicherheit von Maschinen, Risiko- Schaltglieder Zwangsöffner/Schließer 1/1 (i10-HA), 2/1 (i10-HB)
! Schrauben am Betätigungskopf lösen.
Sicherheitsschalter beurteilung
• EN 292, Sicherheit von Maschinen. ! Gewünschte Richtung einstellen.
Stehstoßspannung Uimp 2500 V
Bemessungsisolationsspannung Ui 250 V
Typenreihe i10 H Zur bestimmungsgemäßen Verwendung gehört ! Schrauben mit 0,4 Nm anziehen (Abb. 1).
Gebrauchskategorie nach i10-HA AC 15
• das Einhalten der einschlägigen Anforderun- IEC 60947-5-1 AC: 1,5 A (240 V), 3 A (120 V)
gen für den Einbau und den Betrieb, insbe- DC 13
1 Zur Sicherheit sondere EN 954-1, Sicherheitsbezogene Teile DC: 0,55 A (240 V), 1,1 A (125 V)
von Steuerungen, EN 1088, Verriegelungsein- Abb. 3: Schaltelemente und Schaltfunktionen
Dieses Kapitel dient Ihrer Sicherheit und der i10-HB AC 15
Sicherheit der Anlagenbenutzer. richtungen in Verbindung mit trennenden AC: 3 A (240 V), 6 A (120 V)
! Klemmschrauben mit 0,9 ... 1,0 Nm anziehen.
Schutzeinrichtungen, EN 60 204-1, Elektri- DC 13
! Bitte lesen Sie dieses Kapitel sorgfältig, bevor sche Ausrüstung von Maschinen ! Auf Dichtheit der Leitungseinführung achten.
Sie mit dem i10 H oder der durch den i10 H DC: 1,1 A (240 V), 2,2 A (125 V)
• die regelmäßige Kontrolle der Schutzeinrich- ! Schalterdeckel schließen und verschrauben
geschützten Maschine arbeiten. Schaltspannung min. DC 5 V
tung durch Sachkundige entsprechend Ab- (0,4 ... 0,45 Nm).
Für Verwendung/Einbau der Sicherheitsschalter schnitt 4.2. Schaltstrom min. bei DC 5 V 5 mA
sowie für Inbetriebnahme und wiederkehrende
technische Überprüfungen gelten die nationa-
4 Inbetriebnahme Entspricht den Normen EN 1088, EN 60947-5-1, EN 292, EN 60204-1
1.3 Bestimmungsgemäße
len/internationalen Rechtsvorschriften, insbe- Verwendung 4.1 Prüfungen vor der Erst- 5.2 Maßbilder
sondere Abb. 1: Umstellen der Betätigungsrichtung
• die Maschinenrichtlinie 98/37 EG, Der Sicherheitsschalter i10 H darf nur im Sinne inbetriebnahme
von Abschnitt 1.2 „Verwendungsbereiche der • Mechanische Funktionsprüfung
• die Niederspannungsrichtlinie 73/23 EG, 2.2 Einstellung des Schaltwinkels
Sicherheitsschalter“ verwendet werden. Der
• die Arbeitsmittelbenutzungsrichtlinie 89/655 Sicherheitsschalter darf nur an der Maschine ! Schutzeinrichtung durch Öffnen und Schließen
EWG, ! Auf der Welle gegenüberliegenden Seite eine auf Leichtgängigkeit prüfen.
verwendet werden, an der er gemäß dieser
Schraube am Betätigungskopf lösen.
• die Sicherheitsvorschriften sowie Betriebsanleitung von einem Sachkundigen • Elektrische Funktionsprüfung
• die Unfallverhütungsvorschriften/ montiert, installiert und erstmalig in Betrieb ! Deckel aufklappen.
! Schutzeinrichtung schließen.
Sicherheitsregeln. genommen wurde. ! Fixierschrauben lösen.
! Maschine starten.
Hersteller und Benutzer der Maschine, an der Bei jeder anderen Verwendung sowie bei Ver- ! Schaltwinkel am Nocken einstellen, Fixier-
unsere Schutzeinrichtungen verwendet werden,
sind dafür verantwortlich, alle geltenden Sicher-
änderungen am Sicherheitsschalter – auch im
Rahmen von Montage und Installation – verfällt
jeglicher Gewährleistungsanspruch gegenüber
schrauben anziehen und nach Funktionsprü-
fung entsprechend EN 294 verstiften (Sichern !" Kontrollieren, ob die Maschine beim
Öffnen der Schutzeinrichtung stoppt.
heitsvorschriften/-regeln mit der für sie zustän- des Formschlusses).
digen Behörde in eigener Verantwortung der SICK AG. ! Maschine ausschalten.
! Bohrung für Sicherungsstift 3 ∅, 12 mm tief
abzustimmen und einzuhalten. ! Schutzeinrichtung öffnen.
1.4 Allgemeine Sicherheitshinweise (Abb. 2).
1.1 Sachkundiges Personal
Der Sicherheitsschalter i10 H darf nur von
und Schutzmaßnahmen
Sicherheitsschalter erfüllen eine Personen-
!" Maschine darf bei geöffneter Schutzein-
richtung nicht starten!
sachkundigem Personal montiert, installiert und schutz-Funktion. Unsachgemäßer Einbau oder 3
in Betrieb genommen werden. Sachkundig ist,

4.2 Wiederkehrende technische
Manipulationen können zu schweren Verletzun-
wer gen von Personen führen. Überprüfungen
• über eine geeignete technische Ausbildung Wartungsarbeiten sind nicht erforderlich. Um
und
verfügt !" Sicherheitsschalter dürfen nicht umgan-
gen (Kontakte überbrückt), weggedreht,
eine einwandfreie und dauerhafte Funktion zu
gewährleisten, sind regelmäßige Kontrollen Abb. 4: Maßbild i10-HA
entfernt oder auf andere Weise unwirk-
• vom Maschinenbetreiber in der Bedienung erforderlich.
sam gemacht werden. Abb. 2: Montieren, Einstellen des Schaltwinkels
und den gültigen Sicherheitsrichtlinien unter- Täglich oder vor Schichtbeginn durch das
wiesen wurde Bedienpersonal:
und
2 Montage 2.3 Schutz vor • einwandfreie Funktion für M 16
Umgebungseinflüssen • keine Manipulation erkennbar
• Zugriff auf die Betriebsanleitung hat.
1.2 Verwendungsbereiche der

!" Die Montage darf ausschließlich von
autorisiertem Fachpersonal durchgeführt
Voraussetzung für eine dauerhafte und ein-
wandfreie Sicherheitsfunktion ist der Schutz des
Regelmäßig nach Wartungsplan der Maschine
durch den Sachkundigen
werden.
Sicherheitsschalter Schalters vor eindringenden Fremdkörpern wie • einwandfreie Schaltfunktion
Sicherheitsschalter so anbauen, dass Spänen, Sand, Strahlmitteln usw.
Sicherheitsschalter der Typenreihe i10 H sind • sichere Befestigung der Bauteile
• er für Bedienpersonal schwer zugänglich ist. Bei Lackierarbeiten das Typenschild abdecken.
elektromechanische Schalteinrichtungen. • Ablagerungen und Verschleiß
Sie werden am Scharnier schwenkbarer • Kontrolle und Austausch der Sicherheitsschal-
3 Elektroinstallation • Dichtheit der Kabeleinführung
Schutztüren angebracht und sichern trennende ter möglich sind.
• gelockerte Leitungsanschlüsse bzw. Steck-
bewegliche Schutzeinrichtungen so, dass
• der gefahrbringende Zustand der Maschine !" Der Sicherheitsschalter darf nicht als
mechanischer Anschlag verwendet !" Der elektrische Anschluss darf ausschließ-
lich von autorisiertem Fachpersonal durch-
verbinder.
nur dann eingeschaltet werden kann, wenn

die Schutzeinrichtung geschlossen ist
werden. geführt werden. !" Bei Beschädigung oder Verschleiß muss
der gesamte Schalter ausgetauscht
werden.
• ein STOP-Befehl ausgelöst wird, wenn die
Schutzeinrichtung bei laufender Maschine !" Sicherheitsschalter und Schaltnocken
müssen gegen eine Positionsverände-
! Einführöffnung ausbrechen.
! Kabelverschraubung M 16 mit entsprechen-
Der Austausch von Einzelteilen oder
Baugruppen ist unzulässig!
geöffnet wird. rung ausreichend gesichert und form- der Schutzart montieren.
schlüssig miteinander verbunden sein. Sicherheitsschalter müssen nach 1 Mio. Abb. 5: Maßbild i10-HB
! Kontaktbelegung siehe Abb. 3.
Schaltspielen komplett ausgetauscht werden.
• EN 954-1, Safety-Related Parts of Control ! Connect all live parts on one side of the con- 5 Technical data
Systems, Annex C tact block.
• EN 1050, Safety of Machinery, Principles for 5.1 General specifications
SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems Risk Assessment
Sebastian-Kneipp-Straße 1 • EN 292, Safety of Machinery. Housing material UL tested, glass-fibre reinforced polyester
D-79183 Waldkirch • www.sick.com The correct use includes Environmental protection to IEC 60529 IP 67
8 010 153/25-11-02 • GO 6
• compliance with the applicable requirements Mechanical service life 1 x 10 switching operations
Printed in Germany (11.02) for installation and operation, particularly EN Ambient temperature (operation) –20 ... +80 °C
All rights reserved 954-1, Safety-Related Parts of Control Sys- Connection type 1 x M 16
tems, EN 1088, Interlocking Devices associ-
Min. contact-breaking force 20 cNm (i10-HA) or 35 cNm (i10-HB)
ated with Guards, EN 60204-1, Electrical
i10 H Safety Switch Equipment of Machines Fig. 1: Change actuator entry direction
Switching angle
Contact elements positively guided NC
3° to 11° (i10-HA), 5° to 14° (i10-HB)
1/1 (i10-HA), 2/1 (i10-HB)
• regular inspection of the safety guard as out-
Series lined in section 4.2 by specialist personnel.
2.2 Adjusting the switching angle
contacts/NO contacts
Max. surge voltage Uimp 2500 V
1.3 Correct use ! On the side opposite the shaft, undo the re- Rated insulation voltage Ui 250 V
1 On safety The safety switch i10 H must only be applied as taining screw on the actuating head. Fig. 3: Switching elements and switch functions
Utilisation category to IEC 60947-5-1 i10-HA AC 15
This chapter deals with your own safety and the defined in section 1.2. The safety switch must ! Open hinged lid. ! Tighten clamping screws to 0.9 ... 1.0 Nm. AC: 1,5 A (240 V), 3 A (120 V)
safety of the equipment operators. only be used on the machine where it has been DC 13
! Undo fixing screws. ! Check sealing at conduit entry.
fitted, installed and initialised by qualified per- DC: 0,55 A (240 V), 1,1 A (125 V)
! Please read this chapter carefully before sonnel and in compliance with these operating ! Adjust switching angle on cam, tighten fixing ! Close switch lid and tighten screws
working with the i10 H or with machines pro- screws and, after functional test, pin to i10-HB AC 15
instructions. (0,4 ... 0,45 Nm). AC: 3 A (240 V), 6 A (120 V)
tected by the i10 H. EN 294 (securing against movement).
If the device is used for any other purposes or DC 13
The national/international legislative provisions
regulating the use/installation, the commission-
modified in any way – also during mounting and ! Hole for securing pin Ø 3 mm, 12 mm deep 4 Commissioning DC: 1,1 A (240 V), 2,2 A (125 V)
installation – any warranty claim against SICK AG (Fig. 2).
ing and regular technical inspections of safety Switching voltage (minimum) 5 V DC
shall become void. 4.1 Tests before the first commis-
switches apply. These are, in particular, Switching current (minimum) at 5 V DC 5 mA
• the Machinery Directive 98/37 EC, 1.4 General protective notes and sioning Corresponds with standards EN 1088, EN 60947-5-1, EN 292, EN 60204-1
3
• the Low Voltage Directive 73/23 EC, protective measures • Mechanical function test
• the Use of Work Equipment Regulations Di- ! Open and close safety guard to check that it is
5.2 Dimensional drawings
Safety switches serve the purpose of protecting
rective 89/655 EEC, individuals. Tampering or incorrect installation moving smoothly.
• the safety provisions as well as may result in severe personal injury. • Electrical function test
• the accident prevention provisions/safety ! Close safety guard.
regulations.
Manufacturers and users of the machines with
!" Do not override safety switches (by bridg-
ing contacts), turn them from their protec- Fig. 2: Fitting and adjusting the switching angle ! Turn on machine.
tive position, remove them or defeat them
Check whether opening the safety guard
which our safety switches are used are respon-
sible for obtaining and observing all applicable
safety rules and regulations.
in any other way.
2.3 Protection from environment !" stops the machine.
2 Installation To ensure consistent, fault-free function of the ! Turn off machine.

1.1 Specialist personnel safety switch, debris must not be allowed to en- ! Open safety guard.
ter the switch.
Only specialist personnel are authorised to
mount, install and commission the safety switch
!" The safety switch must only be installed
by authorised personnel. Mask the nameplate before applying paint.
!" Machine must not start while safety guard
is open!
i10 H. Specialist personnel are defined as per- Mount the safety switch such that
sons who
3 Electrical installation
• It is difficult for operators to access. 4.2 Regular technical inspections
• have undergone the appropriate technical
training
• it can be inspected and replaced.
!" Only authorised personnel are allowed to
connect power to the safety switch.
The safety switch is maintenance-free. To en-
and
• who have been instructed by the responsible
!" Do not use the safety switch as a mechani-
cal stop. ! Break open conduit entry.
sure consistent, fault-free function of the safety
switch, inspections should be performed on a
regular basis.
machine operator in the operation of the ma- ! Install cable connector M 16 with the required
chine and the current valid safety guidelines
and
!" The safety switch and cams must be
adequately secured against movement
IP protection.
! See connection diagram (Fig. 3).
The machine operator should carry out the fol-
lowing checks each day or before each shift:
and correctly keyed to each other. • switch functioning properly?
• who have access to the operating instruc- Fig. 4: Dimensional drawing i10-HA
tions. To satisfy this requirement
• the mounting method must be secure and re-
!" Operate all contact pairs within the same
voltage range.
• no evidence of tampering?
Specialist personnel should regularly carry out
1.2 Applications of the safety switch quire a tool for removal, the following checks as per machine mainte-
• precautions must be taken to guarantee the nance plan:
Safety switches of the i10 H series are electro- for M 16
mechanical safety interlocks. actuator connection after adjustment (e.g., • switch functioning properly?
They are fitted at the hinge point of swivelling with bolts or key pins), • all components safely installed?
guard doors and secure movable safety guards • the safety switch must be fitted with 2 M 4 • deposits and wear?
so that screws, and the screws must be tightened to • conduit entry sealed?
• the dangerous state of the machine can only (2.5 ... 3 Nm). • loose cable connections or connectors?
be enabled when the safety guard is closed
• a STOP signal is generated when the safety
guard opens while the machine is operating.
2.1 Change actuator entry direction
! Undo screws on actuating head.
!" If signs of damage or wear are detected,
the complete switch must be replaced.
Do not replace individual components or
For the control system this means that ! Set direction required. assemblies!
• activation commands leading to dangerous ! Tighten screws to 0.4 Nm (Fig. 1).
states are allowed to become effective only The complete safety switch must be replaced
when the safety guard is in the protective po- after 106 switching operations.
sition and dangerous states must no longer
exist when the safety guard opens.
Before installation of safety switches a risk as-
sessment should be performed to
Fig. 5: Dimensional drawing i10-HB
Pour la commande de la machine, cela signifie Pour remplir ces exigences, il faut que : 5 Caractéristiques techniques
que : • les éléments de fixation soient suffisamment
fiables et nécessitent un outil pour être dé-
!" Faire fonctionner toutes les paires de
contacts sur la même plage de tension.
• Les commandes de démarrage associées à 5.1 Caractéristiques communes
une situation dangereuse ne peuvent être sui- montés, ! Tous les conducteurs sous tension doivent
SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems
vies d’effet que si les protecteurs sont en posi- • les dispositions garantissant la fixation posi- être raccordés du même côté du bloc de Matériau du boîtier Polyester renforcé fibre de verre homologué UL
Sebastian-Kneipp-Straße 1
tion de protection, et inversement, la protection tive de l’assemblage doivent être prises après contacts. Indice d’étanchéité selon CEI 60529 IP 67
D-79183 Waldkirch • www.sick.com
8 010 153/25-11-02 • GO ne peut être désactivée avant la cessation mise au point (p.ex. goujons ou chevilles). Durée de vie mécanique
6
1 x 10 manœuvres
Imprimé en Allemagne (11.02) complète de la situation dangereuse. • l'interrupteur de sécurité soit fixé avec 2 vis Température ambiante de fonctionnement –20 ... +80 °C
Tous droits réservés Avant de mettre en œuvre un interrupteur de M 4 serrées au couple de 2,5 à 3 Nm.
sécurité, il est nécessaire de réaliser une ap- Type de raccordement 1 x M 16
préciation des risques en conformité avec les 2.1 Changement de la direction Force minimale d'ouverture du contact 20 cNm (i10-HA) ou 35 cNm (i10-HB)
Interrupteurs de normes :
• EN 954-1, Parties des systèmes de comman-
d’approche Angle de commutation
Éléments de contact, ouverture
3° à 11° (i10-HA), 5° à 14° (i10-HB)
1/1 (i10-HA), 2/1 (i10-HB)
! Déposer les vis de la tête de commande.
sécurité série i10 H des relatives à la sécurité, annexe C
• EN 1050, Sécurité des machines, Principes ! Orienter la tête dans la direction souhaitée.
positive/fermeture
Surtension tolérée Uimp 2500 V
pour l’appréciation des risques ! Reposer les vis en serrant au couple 0,4 Nm
Tension de mesure de l’isolement Ui 250 V
1 La sécurité • EN 292, Sécurité des machines. (Fig. 1).
Catégorie d’utilisation selon i10-HA CA 15
Par utilisation conforme aux dispositions légales CEI 60947-5-1 CA : 1,5 A (240 V), 3 A (120 V)
Ce chapitre est essentiel pour la sécurité tant Fig. 3: Eléments et fonctions de commutation
des installateurs que des opérateurs et de on entend entre autres : CC 13
l’exploitant. • le respect des exigences applicables pour la ! Serrer les vis des bornes sous un couple de CC : 0,55 A (240 V), 1,1 A (125 V)
construction et l’utilisation des machines, et 0,9 ... 1,0 Nm. i10-HB CA 15
! Lire impérativement ce chapitre avec attention
en particulier EN 954-1, Parties des systèmes CA : 3 A (240 V), 6 A (120 V)
avant de commencer à mettre en œuvre ! S’assurer de l’étanchéité au niveau du
de commandes relatives à la sécurité, EN CC 13
l’i10 H ou la machine protégée par l’i10 H. presse-étoupe.
1088, Dispositifs de verrouillage associés à CC : 1,1 A (240 V), 2,2 A (125 V)
Pour le montage et l’exploitation de des protecteurs, EN 60 204-1, Équipement ! Fermer et visser le couvercle de l’interrupteur
l’interrupteur de sécurité ainsi que pour sa mise Tension de commutation mini. 5 V CC
électrique des machines, (0,4 ... 0,45 Nm).
en service et les tests réguliers il faut impérati- Courant de commutation mini. sous 5 mA
• le contrôle régulier de l’équipement de protec- 5 V CC
vement appliquer les prescriptions légales na- 4 Mise en service
tion par le personnel habilité conformément
tionales et internationales et en particulier : Fig. 1: Changement de la direction d’approche Conformité aux normes EN 1088, EN 60947-5-1, EN 292, EN 60204-1
au paragraphe 4.2
• la directive machine 98/37 CE,
4.1 Tests et essais préalables à la 5.2 Plans cotés
• la directive machine 73/23 CE, 1.3 Conformité d’utilisation 2.2 Réglage de l'angle de première mise en service
• la directive 89/655 CEE sur l’emploi des ma- L’interrupteur de sécurité i10 H ne peut être uti- commutation
chines, • Contrôle fonctionnel mécanique
lisé que dans les domaines décrits au paragra-
• les consignes de sécurité ainsi que phe 1.2 «Domaines d’application de ! Déposer une vis de la tête de commande du ! Contrôler le bon fonctionnement sans à-coups
l’interrupteur de sécurité». Il ne peut en particu- côté opposé de l'arbre. du protecteur à l’ouverture et à la fermeture.
• les dispositions de prévention des accidents
et les règlements de sécurité, lier être mis en œuvre que sur la machine sur ! Ouvrir le capot. • Contrôle fonctionnel électrique
Le fabricant et l’exploitant de la machine pour- laquelle il a été installé et mis en service par ! Déposer les vis de fixation. ! Fermer le protecteur.
vue d’équipements de protection sont respon- des techniciens compétents selon les prescrip-
! Régler l'angle de commutation au niveau de ! Démarrer la machine.
sables avec l’Autorité compétente du respect et tions de cette notice d’instructions.
la came, revisser les vis de fixation, et après
Pour toute autre utilisation, aussi bien que pour
de la mise en œuvre des prescriptions et des
règles de sécurité en vigueur. les modifications – y compris concernant le mon-
tage et l’installation – la responsabilité de la socié-
avoir vérifié le bon fonctionnement goupiller
selon EN 294 (fixation positive). !" Contrôler que la machine s’arrête à
l’ouverture du protecteur.
1.1 Qualification du personnel té SICK AG. ne saurait être invoquée. ! Alésage de la goupille de sécurité : 3 ∅, pro- ! Arrêter la machine.
fondeur 12 mm (Fig. 2). ! Ouvrir le protecteur.
L’interrupteur de sécurité i10 H ne doit être 1.4 Consignes de sécurité et mesu-
monté, installé, mis en service et entretenu que
par des professionnels qualifiés. Sont compé-
tentes les personnes qui :
res de protection d’ordre général
Les interrupteurs de sécurité remplissent une 3
!" Contrôler que la machine ne peut pas re-
démarrer avec le protecteur ouvert.
• ont reçu la formation technique appropriée, fonction de protection des personnes.

L’implantation non conforme aux règles de l’art
4.2 Contrôle périodique technique
et
et les manipulations peuvent conduire à des Il n’est pas nécessaire d’effectuer de mainte-
• ont été formées par l’exploitant à l’utilisation
blessures corporelles graves. nance. Pour garantir durablement le bon
de l’équipement et aux directives de sécurité
fonctionnement, il est nécessaire d’effectuer un
et
en vigueur applicables,
!" Les interrupteurs de sécurité ne peuvent
pas être shuntés électriquement, ni dé-
Fig. 2: Montage, réglage de l'angle de
commutation
contrôle périodique.
Quotidiennement ou à chaque prise de service Fig. 4: Plan coté i10-HA
• ont accès à cette notice d’instructions et aux vissés ni déposés ni être rendus inopéra-
tionnels de quelque façon que ce soit. des opérateurs, contrôler :
instructions de service. 2.3 Protection contre l’influence • le bon fonctionnement
1.2 Domaines d’application de de l’environnement • l’absence de marques de manipulations.
2 Montage Régulièrement, selon le plan d’entretien de la
pour M 16
l’interrupteur de sécurité Une condition sine qua non de pérennité de la
fonction de sécurité est la protection de machine un personnel habilité doit contrôler :
Les interrupteurs de sécurité de la série i10 H
sont des équipements de commutation électro- !" Le montage doit être effectué exclusive-
ment par un personnel qualifié et habilité. l’interrupteur vis-à-vis de la pénétration de corps
étrangers comme des copeaux d’usinage, du
• le bon fonctionnement de la commutation,
mécaniques. • le bon état des fixations des différentes par-
Implanter l’interrupteur de sécurité de sorte que : sable, des projections de toutes sortes. ties du protecteur,
Ils se montent sur porte de protection d’accès • il soit difficile à atteindre par les opérateurs, Pour la peinture de l’interrupteur, protéger la • les dépôts étrangers et l’usure,
pivotante à charnières et permettent de protéger
les équipements de protection mobiles sépara- • le contrôle et l’échange de l’interrupteur de plaque signalétique.
• l’étanchéité du presse-étoupe,
sécurité restent possibles.
bles de sorte que : • le bon verrouillage des raccordements
3 Installation électrique
• la machine potentiellement dangereuse ne
peut être enclenchée que si l’équipement de !" L’interrupteur de sécurité ne doit pas servir
de butée mécanique.
comme les connecteurs de raccordement.
protection est fermé, !" Le montage doit être effectué exclusive-

ment par un personnel qualifié et habilité. !" En cas de dommages ou d’usure l’ensemble
de l’interrupteur doit être remplacé.
• une commande d’arrêt se déclenche lorsque
l’équipement de protection est ouvert pendant !" L’interrupteur de sécurité et la came qui
l’actionne doivent montrer une certaine ! Dégager l’orifice de pénétration du câble.
Le remplacement de pièces détachées ou
de groupes de pièces détachées est interdit.
que la machine est en fonctionnement. tolérance vis-à-vis d’une modification de
! Monter un presse-étoupe à vis M 16 d’indice
position et former un assemblage positif. d’étanchéité convenable. Au bout d’un million de manœuvres,
l’interrupteur doit être remplacé en totalité. Fig. 5: Plan coté i10-HB
! Pour le brochage cf. fig. 3.
Prima di impiegare degli interruttori di sicurezza • gli interruttori di sicurezza vanno montati con 5 Dati tecnici
va effettuata una valutazione dei rischi che la 2 viti M 4 e le viti serrate con 2,5 ... 3 Nm.
macchina comporta, ciò in conformità a
2.1 Modificare la direzione di 5.1 Dati generali del sistema
SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • EN 954-1, Componenti inerenti alla sicurezza
Sebastian-Kneipp-Straße 1 di comandi, appendice C azionamento Materiale del contenitore Poliestere rinforzato con fibra di vetro, omologato UL
D-79183 Waldkirch • www.sick.com • EN 1050, Sicurezza macchine, Valutazione ! Allentare le viti della testa di azionamento. Tipo di protezione conforme a IEC 60529 IP 67
8 010 153/25-11-02 • GO dei rischi Durata di servizio meccanico
6
1 x 10 cicli di comando
! Impostare la direzione desiderata.
Printed in Germany (11.02) • EN 292, Sicurezza macchine. Temperatura di funzionamento –20 ... +80 °C
Tutti i diritt riservati ! Serrare le viti con 0,4 Nm (fig. 1).
Per garantire l’uso secondo le norme è neces- Tipo di collegamento 1 x M 16
sario
Forza min. per interrompere i contatti 20 cNm (i10-HA) oppure 35 cNm (i10-HB)
• il rispetto dei requisiti richiesti per
Interruttore di sicu- l’installazione e l’uso, in particolare in confor-
mità a EN 954-1, Componenti inerenti alla Si-
Fig. 3: Elementi e funzioni di comando Angolo di comando
Organi di comando elemento di apertura
Da 3° a 11° (i10-HA), da 5° a 14° (i10-HB)
1/1 (i10-HA), 2/1 (i10-HB)
rezza serie i10 H curezza di comandi, a EN 1088, Dispositivi di
Sbarramento in abbinamento a Dispositivi di
! Avvitare le viti serrafilo con 0,9 ... 1,0 Nm.
! Fare attenzione alla tenuta dell’ingresso linea.
forzata/di chiusura
Tensione impulsiva massima Uimp 2500 V
riparo, a EN 60 204-1, Equipaggiamenti Elet- ! Chiudere il coperchio dell’interruttore e ser- Tensione di isolamento di test Ui 250 V
1 Sulla sicurezza trici per Macchine rarne le viti (0,4 ... 0,45 Nm). Categoria di utilizzo conforme a i10-HA CA 15
• il controllo regolare da parte di personale qua- IEC 60947-5-1 CA: 1,5 A (240 V), 3 A (120 V)
Questo capitolo serve alla vostra sicurezza e a
quella degli utenti dell’impianto.
lificato secondo la sezione 4.2. 4 Messa in servizio CC 13
CC: 0,55 A (240 V), 1,1 A (125 V)
! Vi preghiamo di leggere attentamente il pre- 1.3 Uso in conformità
sente capitolo prima di lavorare con l’i10 H o Fig. 1: Modificare la direzione di azionamento 4.1 Verifiche preventive alla prima i10-HB CA 15
alla normativa CA: 3 A (240 V), 6 A (120 V)
con la macchina protetta dall’i10 H. messa in servizio
L’interruttore di sicurezza i10 H va utilizzato e- 2.2 Impostazione dell'angolo di co- CC 13
Per l’uso/l’installazione dell’interruttore di sicu- • Verifica del funzionamento meccanico
sclusivamente ai sensi della sezione 1.2 “Campi CC: 1,1 A (240 V), 2,2 A (125 V)
rezza nonché per la messa in servizio e le ripe-
d’impiego degli mando ! Aprire e chiudere per verificare che il disposi-
tute verifiche tecniche sono valide le normative Tensione minima di comando 5 V CC
interruttori di sicurezza” L’interruttore di sicu- ! Allentare una vite della testa di azionamento tivo di protezione sia facilmente azionabile.
nazionali/internazionali, in particolare Corrente minima di comando con 5 V CC 5 mA
rezza va utilizzato esclusivamente sulla mac- sul lato opposto dell'albero. • Verifica del funzionamento elettrico
• la Direttiva Macchine 98/37 CE, china in cui esso è stato montato, installato e In conformità alle norme EN 1088, EN 60947-5-1, EN 292, EN 60204-1
• la Direttiva “bassa tensione” 73/23 CE, ! Aprire il coperchio. ! Chiudere il dispositivo di protezione.
messo in funzione la prima volta da una perso-
• la Direttiva sugli utilizzatori di attrezzature di na qualificata in conformità a queste istruzioni ! Allentare le viti di fissaggio. ! Avviare la macchina. 5.2 Disegni quotati
lavoro 89/655 CEE, d’uso. ! Regolare l'angolo di comando della camma,
• le prescrizioni di sicurezza nonché Se l’interruttore viene usato per altri scopi o in ca-
so di sue modifiche – anche in fase di montaggio
serrare le viti di fissaggio e dopo averne veri-
ficato la funzione spinare in conformità a EN
!" Controllare se la macchina si arresta
quando il dispositivo di protezione viene
• le prescrizioni antinfortunistiche/ aperto.
o di installazione – decade ogni diritto di garanzia 294 (protezione dell'accoppiamento di forma).
le regole di sicurezza.
nei confronti della SICK AG. ! Foro per il perno di sicurezza di 3 ∅, profondi- ! Spegnere la macchina.
I costruttori e gli utenti della macchina su cui
vengono impiegati i nostri dispositivi di protezio- tà di 12 mm (fig. 2). ! Aprire il dispositivo di protezione.
1.4 Indicazioni di sicurezza generali
ne devono accettare, sotto la propria responsa-
bilità, tutte le vigenti prescrizioni e regole di si-
curezza con l’ente di competenza e, rispondono
e misure di protezione
Gli interruttori di sicurezza adempiono una fun- 3
!" La macchina non deve avviarsi se il di-
spositivo di protezione è aperto!
della loro osservanza. zione di protezione delle persone.
Un’installazione non appropriata o eventuali 4.2 Verifiche tecniche periodiche
1.1 Personale qualificato manipolazioni possono causare gravi lesioni alle Non è necessaria nessuna operazione di manu-
L’interruttore di sicurezza i10 H deve essere persone. tenzione. Per garantire una funzione a regola
montato, installato e messo in funzione esclusi- d’arte e duratura è necessario effettuare rego-
vamente da personale qualificato. Viene consi-
derato qualificato chi
!" Gli interruttori di sicurezza non devono
essere esclusi (contatti ponticellati), ruo- Fig. 2: montaggio, impostazione dell'angolo larmente dei controlli.
Giornalmente o prima dell’inizio del turno da
tati in posizione non efficace, eliminati o di comando
• dispone di un’adeguata formazione tecnica resi inefficaci in un altro modo. parte degli operatori della macchina:
e • che la funzione sia a regola d’arte
2.3 Protezione da influenze
• è stato istruito dal responsabile della sicurez- 2 Montaggio • che non sia visibile nessuna manipolazione
ambientali
za macchine nell’uso e nelle direttive di sicu- Regolarmente secondo un piano di manuten-
rezza vigenti Il presupposto per una funzione di sicurezza du- zione della macchina mediante una persona
e !" Il montaggio va effettuato esclusivamente
da personale tecnico autorizzato. ratura e a regola d’arte è la protezione
dell’interruttore dal penetramento di corpi estra-
qualificata
Fig. 4: Disegno quotato dell’i10-HA
• accede alle istruzioni per l’uso. • che la funzione di comando avvenga a regola
Montare l’interruttore di sicurezza in modo che nei come trucioli, sabbia, materiali per sabbiatu- d’arte
1.2 Campi d’impiego degli • esso risulti difficilmente raggiungibile per gli re etc.
• che il fissaggio dei componenti sia sicuro
interruttori di sicurezza operatori. Per eseguire dei lavori di verniciatura coprire la
targhetta. • che non vi siano residui o usura per M 16
• siano possibili il controllo e la sostituzione de-
Gli interruttori di sicurezza della serie i10 H sono dei gli interruttori di sicurezza. • che la tenuta dell’ingresso del cavo sia buona
dispositivi di comando elettromeccanici. 3 Installazione elettrica • che non vi siano dei collegamenti di linea o
Vengono montati sulle cerniere di porte di protezio-
!" L’interruttore non deve essere utilizzato
come finecorsa meccanico.
connettori allentati.
ne girevoli e proteggono i ripari mobili affinché
• lo stato pericoloso della macchina sia attivabi- !" Il collegamento elettrico va effettuato e-
sclusivamente da personale tecnico auto- !" In caso di danneggiamento o usura va
cambiato l’intero interruttore.
le esclusivamente quando il dispositivo di pro-
tezione è chiuso.
!" Gli interruttori di sicurezza e gli stantuffi di
comando devono essere sufficientemente
rizzato.
Il ricambio di singoli pezzi o gruppi non è
permesso!
sicuri e uniti tra di loro con accoppiamen- ! Perforare l’apertura d’ingresso.
• venga attivato un comando di ARRESTO se il to di forma. ! Montare il dispositivo di fissaggio cavo M 16 Gli interruttori di sicurezza vanno sostituiti com-
dispositivo di protezione viene aperto quando
la macchina è in funzione. Per corrispondere a questi requisiti con l’apposito tipo di protezione. pletamente dopo 1 milione di cicli di comando.
Per il controllo questo significa che • gli elementi di fissaggio devono essere affida- ! Per il collegamento dei contatti vedere 3.
• i comandi di accensione che causano stati pe- bili e richiedere un attrezzo per essere allen-
ricolosi devono rispondere esclusivamente
quando il dispositivo di protezione è posizio-
tati,
• vanno prese delle misure precauzionali per
!" Far funzionare tutte le coppie di contatti
con la stessa tensione.
nato in modo da proteggere, e che gli stati di assicurare l’accoppiamento di forma dopo la ! Collegare tutte le parti sotto tensione su un la-
pericolo devono essere terminati prima che regolazione (p.es. perni o spine di registro). to del blocco di contatto.
Fig. 5: Disegno quotato dell’i10-HB
tale protezione venga disattivata.
Drucken - PDF erstellen - EXCEL Datei erstellen - Systemkomponenten ausblenden 21.07.2009
-
15:08:55h
Datenblatt AZ 16-03zvrk
• Kunststoffgehäuse
• schutzisoliert
• großer Anschlussraum
• 52 mm x 90 mm x 30 mm
• Mehrfach-Codierung
• verschmutzungsunempfindlich durch patentiertes Walzensystem
• hohe Lebensdauer
• hohe Kontaktsicherheit bei niedrigen Strömen
• Langlöcher zum Einstellen, Rundlöcher zum Fixieren
• 3 Leitungseinführungen M 16 x 1.5
(Die Abbildung kann vom Original abweichen!)
Bestelldaten
Produkt-Typbezeichnung AZ 16-03ZVRK
Artikelnummer 1154220
EAN Code 4030661171579
Zulassung
Zulassung
BG, USA/CAN, CCC
Sicherheitsbetrachtung
Vorschriften EN ISO 13849-1

B10d Öffner (NC) 2 Millionen Schaltspiele
Gebrauchsdauer TM 20 Jahre
Allgemeine Daten
Produkt-Name AZ 16
Vorschriften IEC/EN 60947-5-1, BG-GS-ET-15
Richtlinienkonformität (J/N) Ja
Werkstoffe
- Werkstoff des Gehäuses Kunststoff, glasfaserverstärkter Thermoplast, selbstverlöschend
- Werkstoff der Kontakte Silber
Gehäusebeschichtung keine
Gewicht 115 g
Mechanische Daten
Ausführung des elektrischen Anschlusses Schraubanschluss
Anschlussquerschnitt
- min. Anschlussquerschnitt
- max. Anschlussquerschnitt 2,5 mm²
Mechanische Lebensdauer > 1 Million Schaltspiele
erhöhte Rastkraft (J/N) Ja
Rastkraft 30 N
mit Rückstellkraft (J/N) Nein
Zwangsöffnungskraft 30 N
Zwangsöffnungsweg 8 mm
max. Betätigungsgeschwindigkeit 0,2 m/s
Hinweis Alle Angaben zum Anschlussquerschnitt verstehen sich einschließlich Aderendhülsen.
Umgebungsbedingungen
Umgebungstemperatur
- min. Umgebungstemperatur - 30°C
- max. Umgebungstemperatur + 80°C
Schutzart IP67 gemäß IEC/EN 60529
Elektrische Daten
Ausführung des Schaltelementes Öffner (NC)

Schaltprinzip Schleichschaltglied
Anzahl der Hilfskontakte 0 St.
Anzahl der Sicherheitskontakte 3 St.
Bemessungsstoßspannungsfestigkeit Uimp 6 kV
Thermischer Dauerstrom Ithe 10 A
Gebrauchskategorie AC-15: 230 V / 4 A,
DC-13: 24 V / 4 A
Kurzschlussschutz 6 A gG D-Sicherung
ATEX
Explosionsschutz-Kategorie für Gas keine

Explosionsschutz-Kategorie für Staub keine
Abmessungen
Abmessungen des Sensors

- Breite des Sensors 52 mm
- Höhe des Sensors 90 mm
- Länge des Sensors 30 mm
Lieferumfang
Die Betätiger sind nicht im Lieferumfang enthalten.
Kontaktbild
Hinweis zum Kontaktbild
zwangsöffnender Öffnerkontakt
betätigt
unbetätigt
Schliesserkontakt
Öffnerkontakt
Schaltwegdiagramm
Hinweis zum Schaltwegdiagramm
Kontakt geschlossen
Kontakt geöffnet
Einstellbereich
Rastpunkt
Zwangsöffungsweg/- winkel
VS Verstellbereich Schließer
VÖ Verstellbereich Öffner
N Nachlauf
Bestellindex
Der Bestellindex wird an die Typenbezeichnung des Schalters angehängt.

Bestellbeispiel: AZ 16-03zvrk - 2254
...- 2254 Rastkraft 5 N
Ausführung mit M5 Vierkantmutter

zur Frontmontage des Sicherheitsschalters, z.B. an Blechverkleidungen
...- 1762 nicht nachrüstbar
...- 1637 mit 0,3 µm Kontaktvergoldung lieferbar, Bestellindex -1637
...- M20 Leitungseinführungen M20
Dokumente
Montage- und Anschlussanleitung (de, en, fr, it, es, jp) 271 kB, 28.07.2006
http://www.schmersal.net/Bilddata/AZ/Pdf/Az15_16/montage/m_z15p01.pdf
Konformitätserklärung (de, en) 82 kB, 24.10.2007
http://www.schmersal.net/Bilddata/AZ/Pdf/Az15_16/konform/__z15p01.pdf
Baumusterprüfbescheinigung (en) 1 MB, 07.03.2007

http://www.schmersal.net/Bilddata/AZ/Pdf/Az15_16/baumuste/z_z15p02.pdf
Baumusterprüfbescheinigung (de) 2 MB, 07.03.2007

CCC Zertifikat (cn) 730 kB, 12.12.2006

http://www.schmersal.net/Bilddata/AZ/Pdf/Az15_16/zertifikat/q_175p03.pdf
Gost Zertifikat (ru) 1 MB, 21.06.2007

http://www.schmersal.net/Bilddata/AZ/Pdf/Az15_16/zertifikat/q_az1p01.pdf
Abbildungen
Maßzeichnung (Grundgerät)
Systemkomponenten
Betätiger
1083036 - AZ 15/16-B1
1092711 - AZ 15/16-B1-1747
• zur spielfreien Zuhaltung leichter Schutztüren

• nachrüstbar
1093553 - AZ 15/16-B1-1747 MIT HAFTMAGNET

• der Haftmagnet lässt sich in jeder Betätigungsebene leicht montieren
• nachrüstbar
1108276 - AZ 15/16-B1-2024
1108278 - AZ 15/16-B1-2024 MIT SCHLITZABDECKUNG
• zum Schutz gegen das Eindringen von grobem Schmutz
1111079 - AZ 15/16-B1-2053
• zur Zuhaltung von leichten bis mittelschweren Schutztüren
1111081 - AZ 15/16-B1-2053 MIT KUGELRASTUNG
1126793 - AZ 15/16-B1-2177
• für leichte, nicht geführte Schutztüren
1126794 - AZ 15/16-B1-2177 MIT ZENTRIERHILFE
1137408 - AZ 15/16-B1-2245
• kompensiert Vibrationen an Schutzeinrichtungen

1095558 - AZ 15/16-B2
• für sehr kleine Betätigungsradien über die breite Seite des Betätigers
1096091 - AZ 15/16-B2-1747
• nachrüstbar
• nachrüstbar
1095550 - AZ 15/16-B3
• für sehr kleine Betätigungsradien über die schmale Seite des Betätigers
• nachrüstbar
1096092 - AZ 15/16-B3-1747
• nachrüstbar
1137434 - AZ 15/16-B6
• für sehr kleine Betätigungsradien über die schmale und breite Seite des Betätigers
Zubehör
1149214 - Montagebausatz MS AZ 15/16 R/P
1150373 - Montagebausatz MS AZ 15/16 P
1089116 - Schlitzverschluss AZ 15/16-1476

• zum Verschließen nicht benutzter Betätigungsschlitze
• einfache Montage durch Einklipsen
1115025 - Kugelrastung 2053-2
• zusätzliche Kugelrastung zur stabilen Zuhaltung von leichten bis mittelschweren

Schutztüren
• zur separaten Montage an der Schutztür
1110500 - SZ 16/335
• zum Schutz gegen versehentliches Schließen, z.B. bei Montagearbeiten

• für unübersichtliche Anlagen
• verhindert Betätigung des Schalters
• Anbringung von bis zu 6 Vorhängeschlössern
• Befestigung der Sperrzange mit einer Kette in der Nähe des Sicherheitsschalters
möglich
Befestigungsmaterial
1135338 - SICHERHEITSSCHRAUBEN M 5 x 12
• zur Befestigung des Betätigers

• höherer Schutz gegen Umgehen
• gegen unbefugte Demontage der Betätiger
• verschiedene Längen lieferbar


K.A. Schmersal GmbH, Möddinghofe 30, D-42279 Wuppertal
Die genannten Daten und Angaben wurden sorgfältig geprüft. Technische Änderungen und Irrtümer vorbehalten.
Generiert am 21.07.2009 - 15:08:57h Kasbase 1.2.9 DBI
-
09:27:46h
Datenblatt AZ 16-12zvrk
• schutzisoliert
• großer Anschlussraum
• 52 mm x 90 mm x 30 mm
• Mehrfach-Codierung
• verschmutzungsunempfindlich durch patentiertes Walzensystem
• hohe Kontaktsicherheit bei niedrigen Strömen
• Langlöcher zum Einstellen, Rundlöcher zum Fixieren
Bestelldaten
Produkt-Typbezeichnung AZ 16-12ZVRK
EAN Code 4030661171586
Zulassung
Zulassung
BG, USA/CAN, CCC

B10d Schließer (NO) 1 Million Schaltspiele
Allgemeine Daten
Produkt-Name AZ 16
Vorschriften IEC/EN 60947-5-1, BG-GS-ET-15
Werkstoffe
- Werkstoff des Gehäuses Kunststoff, glasfaserverstärkter Thermoplast, selbstverlöschend
- Werkstoff der Kontakte Silber
Gehäusebeschichtung keine
Gewicht 120 g
Mechanische Daten
Ausführung des elektrischen Anschlusses Schraubanschluss
- max. Anschlussquerschnitt 2,5 mm²
Mechanische Lebensdauer > 1 Million Schaltspiele
erhöhte Rastkraft (J/N) Ja
Rastkraft 30 N
mit Rückstellkraft (J/N) Nein
Zwangsöffnungskraft 20 N
Zwangsöffnungsweg 8 mm
max. Betätigungsgeschwindigkeit 0,2 m/s
Hinweis Alle Angaben zum Anschlussquerschnitt verstehen sich einschließlich Aderendhülsen.
Umgebungstemperatur
Schutzart IP67 gemäß IEC/EN 60529
Elektrische Daten
Ausführung des Schaltelementes Schließer (NO), Öffner (NC)

Schaltprinzip Schleichschaltglied
Anzahl der Hilfskontakte 1 St.
Anzahl der Sicherheitskontakte 2 St.
Bemessungsstoßspannungsfestigkeit Uimp 6 kV
Thermischer Dauerstrom Ithe 10 A
Gebrauchskategorie AC-15: 230 V / 4 A,
DC-13: 24 V / 4 A
Kurzschlussschutz 6 A gG D-Sicherung
ATEX

Abmessungen

Lieferumfang
Kontaktbild
betätigt
unbetätigt
Schliesserkontakt
Öffnerkontakt
Schaltwegdiagramm
Hinweis zum Schaltwegdiagramm
Kontakt geschlossen
Kontakt geöffnet
Einstellbereich
Rastpunkt
Zwangsöffungsweg/- winkel
VS Verstellbereich Schließer
VÖ Verstellbereich Öffner
N Nachlauf
Bestellindex
Der Bestellindex wird an die Typenbezeichnung des Schalters angehängt.

Bestellbeispiel: AZ 16-12zvrk - 2254
...- 2254 Rastkraft 5 N
Ausführung mit M5 Vierkantmutter

zur Frontmontage des Sicherheitsschalters, z.B. an Blechverkleidungen
...- 1762 nicht nachrüstbar
...- 1637 mit 0,3 µm Kontaktvergoldung lieferbar, Bestellindex -1637
...- M20 Leitungseinführungen M20
Dokumente
Montage- und Anschlussanleitung (de, en, fr, it, es, jp) 271 kB, 28.07.2006
http://www.schmersal.net/Bilddata/AZ/Pdf/Az15_16/montage/m_z15p01.pdf
http://www.schmersal.net/Bilddata/AZ/Pdf/Az15_16/konform/__z15p01.pdf
Baumusterprüfbescheinigung (en) 1 MB, 07.03.2007

Baumusterprüfbescheinigung (de) 2 MB, 07.03.2007

CCC Zertifikat (cn) 730 kB, 12.12.2006

http://www.schmersal.net/Bilddata/AZ/Pdf/Az15_16/zertifikat/q_175p03.pdf
Gost Zertifikat (ru) 1 MB, 21.06.2007

http://www.schmersal.net/Bilddata/AZ/Pdf/Az15_16/zertifikat/q_az1p01.pdf
Abbildungen
Systemkomponenten
Betätiger
1083036 - AZ 15/16-B1
1092711 - AZ 15/16-B1-1747

• nachrüstbar

• nachrüstbar
1108276 - AZ 15/16-B1-2024
1108278 - AZ 15/16-B1-2024 MIT SCHLITZABDECKUNG
1111079 - AZ 15/16-B1-2053
1111081 - AZ 15/16-B1-2053 MIT KUGELRASTUNG
1126793 - AZ 15/16-B1-2177
1126794 - AZ 15/16-B1-2177 MIT ZENTRIERHILFE
1137408 - AZ 15/16-B1-2245
• kompensiert Vibrationen an Schutzeinrichtungen

1095558 - AZ 15/16-B2
1096091 - AZ 15/16-B2-1747
• nachrüstbar
• nachrüstbar
1095550 - AZ 15/16-B3
• nachrüstbar
1096092 - AZ 15/16-B3-1747
• nachrüstbar
1137434 - AZ 15/16-B6
• für sehr kleine Betätigungsradien über die schmale und breite Seite des Betätigers
Zubehör
1149214 - Montagebausatz MS AZ 15/16 R/P
1150373 - Montagebausatz MS AZ 15/16 P
1089116 - Schlitzverschluss AZ 15/16-1476

• zum Verschließen nicht benutzter Betätigungsschlitze
• einfache Montage durch Einklipsen
1115025 - Kugelrastung 2053-2
• zusätzliche Kugelrastung zur stabilen Zuhaltung von leichten bis mittelschweren

Schutztüren
• zur separaten Montage an der Schutztür
1110500 - SZ 16/335
• zum Schutz gegen versehentliches Schließen, z.B. bei Montagearbeiten

• für unübersichtliche Anlagen
• verhindert Betätigung des Schalters
• Anbringung von bis zu 6 Vorhängeschlössern
• Befestigung der Sperrzange mit einer Kette in der Nähe des Sicherheitsschalters
möglich
Befestigungsmaterial



-
09:34:28h
Datenblatt BNS 16-12ZV
• für Nahrungsmittelbereich geeignet
• verdeckter Einbau möglich
• 52 mm x 90 mm x 39 mm
• unempfindlich gegen seitlichen Versatz
• kein mechanischer Verschleiß
• unempfindlich gegen Verschmutzung
• Anschlussraum
Bestelldaten
Produkt-Typbezeichnung BNS 16-12ZV

EAN Code 4030661301129
Zulassung
Zulassung
,

B10d Schließer (NO) 25 Millionen Schaltspiele
Klassifizierung bis PDF-M gemäß IEC 60947-5-3 - Nur in Verbindung mit einem
Sicherheitsbaustein
Allgemeine Daten
Produkt-Name BNS 16
Vorschriften IEC 60947-5-3, BG-GS-ET-14
Kategorie Sicherheit gemäß EN 954-1 4
Werkstoffe
- Werkstoff des Gehäuses Kunststoff, glasfaserverstärkter Thermoplast
Gewicht 125 g
Codierung vorhanden (J/N) Ja
Überwachungsfunktion nachgeschalteter Geräte vorhanden
(J/N) Nein
Voraussetzung Auswerteeinheit Ja
Empfohlene Auswertung AES 1135, AES 1136, AES 1165, AES 1166, AES 1165-2250, AES 1185, AES
1235, AES 1236, AES 1265, AES 1266, AES 1337, AES 2135, AES 2136, AES
2335, AES 2336, AES 2535, AES 2536, AES 2365, AES 2366, AES 2565, AES
2566, AES 2285, AES 3075, SRB 202C., SRB 400C.
Empfohlene Betätiger BPS 16
Mechanische Daten
Ausführung des elektrischen Anschlusses Klemme

- max. Anschlussquerschnitt 1,5 mm² ( einschl. Aderendhülsen)
mechanische Einbaubedingungen nicht bündig
Aktive Fläche vorderseitig
gesicherter Schaltabstand EIN Sao 8 mm
gesicherter Schaltabstand AUS Sar 18 mm
Art der Betätigung Magnet
Bewegungsrichtung frontal zur aktiven Fläche
Schockfestigkeit 30 g / 11 ms
Schwingungsfestigkeit 10 ... 55 Hz, Amplitude 1 mm
Umgebungstemperatur
Lager- und Transporttemperatur
- min. Lager- und Transporttemperatur - 25°C
- max. Lager- und Transporttemperatur + 70°C
Schutzart IP67
Elektrische Daten
Integrierte Auswerteeinheit vorhanden (J/N) Nein

Quer-/ Kurzschlusserkennung möglich (J/N) Ja
Spannungsart VAC/DC
Schaltfrequenz max. 5 Hz
Schaltspannung max. 100 VAC/DC
Schaltstrom max. 400 mA
Schaltleistung max. 10 W
Ausgänge
Ausführung des Schaltausgangs Sonstige, Reedkontakt

Anzahl der Schließer 1 St.
Anzahl der Öffner 2 St.
Elektrische Daten - Sicherheitsausgänge

Anzahl der sicheren Halbleiter-Ausgänge 0 St.
Anzahl der sicheren kontaktbehafteten Ausgänge 0 St.
Elektrische Daten - Diagnoseausgang
Anzahl der Halbleiter-Ausgänge mit Meldefunktion 0 St.

Anzahl der kontaktbehafteten Ausgänge mit Meldefunktion 0 St.
LED-Zustandsanzeige
LED-Zustandsanzeige (J/N) Nein
ATEX

Abmessungen

Hinweis
Darstellung der Kontaktsymbole bei geschlossener Schutzeinrichtung.
Lieferumfang
Zeichenlegende
5 verschiedene Betätigungsrichtungen: deckelseitig, vorderseitig, unterseitig, rechts und links
Kontaktbild
betätigt
unbetätigt
Schliesserkontakt
Öffnerkontakt
Dokumente
Montage- und Anschlussanleitung (de, en, fr) 73 kB, 30.07.2007

http://www.schmersal.net/Bilddata/Si_senso/Pdf/Bns16/montage/m_ns1p03.pdf

http://www.schmersal.net/Bilddata/Si_senso/Pdf/Bns33/konform/__ns3p02.pdf
Abbildungen
Maßzeichnung (Sonstige)
Funktionsweise
Systemkomponenten
Betätiger
1172566 - BPS 16

Product data sheet 3RT1017-1BB44-3MA0
CONTACTOR, AC-3, 5,5KW/400V, 2NO+2NC,

PERMANENT. JOINTED, 24V DC, 3-POLE,
SIZE S00,
SCREW TERMINAL FOR SUVA APPLICATIONS
General details:
product brand name SIRIUS
product designation power contactor
Size of the contactor S00
Protection class IP / on the front IP20
Degree of pollution 3
Installation altitude / at a height over sea level / maximum m 2,000
Ambient temperature / during operating phase °C -25 … 60
Active power loss / per conductor / typical W 1.24
Item designation
• according to DIN EN 61346-2 Q
• according to DIN 40719 extendable after IEC 204-2 / according K

to IEC 750
Mechanical operating cycles as operating time
• of the contactor / typical 30,000,000
• of the contactor with added auxiliary switch block / typical 10,000,000
• of the contactor with added electronics-compatible auxiliary 5,000,000

switch block / typical
Main circuit:
Number of poles / for main current circuit 3
3RT1017-1BB44-3MA0 subject to modifications

Page 1/ 5 06/10/2011 © Copyright Siemens AG 2011
Number of NC contacts / for main contacts 0
Number of NO contacts / for main contacts 3
Operating current / at AC-1 / at 400 V / at 40 °C ambient A 22

temperature / rated value

Operating current
• at AC-3 / at 400 V / rated value A 12
• with 1 current path
• at DC-1
• at 24 V / rated value A 20
• at 110 V / rated value A 2.1
• at DC-3 / at DC-5
• with 2 current paths in series
• at DC-1
• at DC-1
Service power
• at AC-1 / at 400 V / rated value kW 13
• at AC-2 / at 400 V / rated value kW 5.5
• at AC-3
• at 400 V / rated value kW 5.5
Control circuit:
Design of activation conventional
Type of voltage / of the controlled supply voltage DC
Control supply voltage / 1

• for DC
• rated value V 24
Auxiliary circuit:
Contact reliability / of the auxiliary contacts 1 faulty switching per 100 million (17 V, 1 mA)
Number of NC contacts / for auxiliary contacts
• instantaneous switching 2
• lagging switching 0
Number of NO contacts / for auxiliary contacts
• leading switching 0
Operating current / of the auxiliary contacts
• at AC-12 / maximum A 10
• at AC-15
• at 230 V A 6
• at 400 V A 3
• at DC-12
• at 60 V A 6
• at 110 V A 3
• at 220 V A 1
• at DC-13
• at 24 V A 10
• at 60 V A 2
• at 110 V A 1
• at 220 V A 0.3
Short-circuit:
Design of the fuse link
• for short-circuit protection of the auxiliary switch / required fuse gL/gG: 10 A
• for short-circuit protection of the main circuit
• with type of assignment 1 / required fuse gL/gG: 35 A
• at type of coordination 2 / required fuse gL/gG: 20 A
Installation/mounting/dimensions:
Type of mounting screw and snap-on mounting onto 35 mm standard
mounting rail according to DIN EN 50022
series installation Yes
Width mm 45
Height mm 57.5
Depth mm 111
Distance, to be maintained, to earthed part / sidewards mm 6

Connection type:
Design of the electrical connection
• for main current circuit screw-type terminals
• for auxiliary and control current circuit screw-type terminals
Identification number and letter for switching elements 22 E
Certificates/approvals:
General Product Approval Functional Safety / Test Certificates
Safety of
Machinery
KETI ROSTEST SUVA Manufacturer
Shipping Approval
ABS PRS
Shipping Approval other
Manufacturer other
Further information:
Information- and Downloadcenter (Catalogs, Brochures,…)
http://www.siemens.com/industrial-controls/catalogs
Industry Mall (Online ordering system)

http://www.siemens.com/industrial-controls/mall
CAx-Online-Generator
http://www.siemens.com/cax
Service&Support (Manuals, Certificates, Characteristics, FAQs,...)

http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/3RT1017-1BB44-3MA0/all
Image database (product images, 2D dimension drawings, 3D models, device circuit diagrams, ...)
http://www.automation.siemens.com/bilddb/cax_en.aspx?mlfb=3RT1017-1BB44-3MA0

last change: Jun 6, 2011

Product data sheet 3RT1025-1BB40
CONTACTOR, AC-3 7.5 KW/400 V, DC 24 V,

3-POLE, SIZE S0, SCREW CONNECTION
General details:
product brand name SIRIUS
product designation power contactor
Size of the contactor S0
Protection class IP / on the front IP20
Degree of pollution 3
Installation altitude / at a height over sea level / maximum m 2,000
Ambient temperature / during operating phase °C -25 … 60
Active power loss / per conductor / typical W 0.9
Item designation
• according to DIN EN 61346-2 Q
• according to DIN 40719 extendable after IEC 204-2 / according K

to IEC 750
Mechanical operating cycles as operating time
• of the contactor / typical 10,000,000
• of the contactor with added auxiliary switch block / typical 10,000,000
• of the contactor with added electronics-compatible auxiliary 5,000,000

switch block / typical
Main circuit:
Number of poles / for main current circuit 3
3RT1025-1BB40 subject to modifications

Number of NC contacts / for main contacts 0
Number of NO contacts / for main contacts 3


Operating current
• at AC-3 / at 400 V / rated value A 17
• with 1 current path
• at DC-1
• at DC-1
• at DC-1
Service power
• at AC-1 / at 400 V / rated value kW 23
• at AC-2 / at 400 V / rated value kW 7.5
• at AC-3
• at 500 V / rated value kW 10
• at 690 V / rated value kW 11
Control circuit:
Design of activation conventional
Type of voltage / of the controlled supply voltage DC
Control supply voltage / 1

• for DC
• rated value V 24
Auxiliary circuit:
Contact reliability / of the auxiliary contacts 1 faulty switching per 100 million (17 V, 1 mA)
Number of NC contacts / for auxiliary contacts
• lagging switching 0
Number of NO contacts / for auxiliary contacts
• leading switching 0
Operating current / of the auxiliary contacts
• at AC-12 / maximum A 10
• at AC-15
• at 230 V A 6
• at 400 V A 3
• at DC-12
• at 60 V A 6
• at 110 V A 3
• at 220 V A 1
• at DC-13
• at 24 V A 10
• at 60 V A 2
• at 110 V A 1
• at 220 V A 0.3
Short-circuit:
Design of the fuse link
• for short-circuit protection of the auxiliary switch / required fuse gL/gG: 10 A
• for short-circuit protection of the main circuit
• with type of assignment 1 / required fuse gL/gG: 63 A
• at type of coordination 2 / required fuse gL/gG: 25 A
Installation/mounting/dimensions:
Type of mounting screw and snap-on mounting onto 35 mm standard
mounting rail according to DIN EN 50022
series installation Yes
Width mm 45
Height mm 85
Depth mm 101
Distance, to be maintained, to earthed part / sidewards mm 6

Connection type:
Design of the electrical connection
• for main current circuit screw-type terminals
• for auxiliary and control current circuit screw-type terminals
Certificates/approvals:
General Product Approval Functional Safety /
Safety of
Machinery
CQC KETI ROSTEST SUVA
Test Certificates
Manufacturer other
Shipping Approval
ABS
Shipping Approval other
Manufacturer other
Further information:
Information- and Downloadcenter (Catalogs, Brochures,…)
http://www.siemens.com/industrial-controls/catalogs
Industry Mall (Online ordering system)

http://www.siemens.com/industrial-controls/mall
CAx-Online-Generator
http://www.siemens.com/cax
Service&Support (Manuals, Certificates, Characteristics, FAQs,...)

http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/3RT1025-1BB40/all
Image database (product images, 2D dimension drawings, 3D models, device circuit diagrams, ...)
http://www.automation.siemens.com/bilddb/cax_en.aspx?mlfb=3RT1025-1BB40

last change: Jun 6, 2011

SIRIUS
Sicherheitsschaltgerät 3TK2841
DIN EN / IEC 60947-5-1
Originalbetriebsanleitung Bestell-Nr.: 3ZX1012-0TK28-1JA1 Deutsch
Leitungs- bei 2 x 1,5 mm2 max. 2000 m (Gesamtlänge für Sensorik)
Vor der Installation, dem Betrieb oder der Wartung des Geräts längen
muss diese Anleitung gelesen und verstanden werden.
Bilder
Bild I: Maßbild (Maße in mm)
! GEFAHR Bild II: Montage / Anschluss
Bild IIIa: Sicherheitsdaten
Gefährliche Spannung. Bild IIIb: Applikationsdaten
Lebensgefahr oder schwere Verletzungsgefahr. Bild IIIc: Geräteinterne Daten
Vor Beginn der Arbeiten Anlage und Gerät spannungsfrei Bild IV: Innenbeschaltung: ¿ Netzteil, À Steuerlogik, Á Ausgang 1, Â Ausgang 2
schalten. Bild V: Schutztürüberwachung zweikanalig, Autostart
Bild VI: NOT-HALT einkanalig, überwachter Start
Bild VII: NOT-HALT zweikanalig, überwachter Start
VORSICHT Bild VIII: Lichtgitterüberwachung zweikanalig, Autostart
Eine sichere Gerätefunktion ist nur mit zertifizierten Komponenten Bild IX: NOT-HALT zweikanalig, überwachter Start und Schutztürüberwachung
gewährleistet. zweikanalig, Autostart
Bild X: Trittmatte 2-kanalig, Autostart
Unter Berücksichtigung der Umgebungsbedingungen müssen die Geräte in
Schaltschränke der Schutzart IP43 oder IP54 eingebaut werden. Betriebszustände
Wichtiger Hinweis LEDs Betrieb
Die hier beschriebenen Produkte wurden entwickelt, um als Teil einer Gesamtan- POWER RUN FAULT Netz NOT-HALT EIN-Taster Ausgänge
lage oder Maschine sicherheitsgerichtete Funktionen zu übernehmen. Ein kom-
plettes sicherheitsgerichtetes System enthält in der Regel Sensoren, ein nicht betätigt wird betätigt ein
Auswerteeinheiten, Meldegeräte und Konzepte für sichere Abschaltungen. Es
liegt im Verantwortungsbereich des Herstellers einer Anlage oder Maschine die betätigt 1) nicht betätigt aus
korrekte Gesamtfunktion sicherzustellen. Die Siemens AG, ihre Niederlassungen nicht betätigt nicht betätigt aus
und Beteiligungsgesellschaften (im Folgenden “Siemens”) sind nicht in der Lage,
alle Eigenschaften einer Gesamtanlage oder Maschine, die nicht durch Siemens bei Inbetriebnahme Selbsttest ca. 7 sec.
konzipiert wurde, zu garantieren. Blinkt
Siemens übernimmt auch keine Haftung für Empfehlungen, die durch die nachfol- Fehler
gende Beschreibung gegeben bzw. impliziert werden. Aufgrund der nachfolgen-
den Beschreibung können keine neuen, über die allgemeinen Siemens- • Defekt in Elektronik aus
Lieferbedingungen hinausgehenden Garantie-, Gewährleistungs- oder Haftungs- Blinkt • Änderung der Anschluss-
ansprüche abgeleitet werden. belegung im Betrieb
• Kurzschluss nach 24 V 2)
Anwendungsbereiche
Versorgungsspannung fehlt
Das Sicherheitsschaltgerät 3TK2841 können Sie in NOT-HALT-Einrichtungen
nach DIN EN / IEC 60947-5-5 und in Sicherheitsstromkreisen nach Technische Daten
DIN EN / IEC 60204-1 verwenden, z.B. bei beweglichen Verdeckungen und
Schutztüren bzw. bei berührungslos wirkenden Schutzeinrichtungen nach Zulässige Umgebungstemperatur Tu
DIN EN / IEC 61496-1, elektrischen Ausrüstungen von Feuerungsanlagen nach Betrieb/Lagerung –25 bis +60 °C / –40 bis +80 °C
VDE 0116 und Feuerungsautomaten für Gasbrenner nach DIN EN 298. Je nach Schutzart nach DIN EN / IEC 60529 IP40, IP20 an den Klemmen
äußerer Beschaltung ist mit diesem Gerät max. Performance Level PL e / Kat. 4
nach DIN EN ISO 13849-1 bzw. SIL 3 nach DIN EN / IEC 62061 zu erreichen. Der Bemessungsisolationsspannung 50 V
Anwender muss eine Bewertung des Gesamtsystems durchführen. Bemessungsstoßspannungsfestigkeit 500 V
Bemessungssteuerspeisespannung 24 V DC
Funktionsbeschreibung und Anschlusshinweise
Bemessungsleistung 1,3 W
Das elektronische Sicherheitsschaltgerät 3TK2841 besitzt zwei sichere elektro-
nische Ausgänge. Drei LEDs zeigen den Betriebszustand und die Funktion an. Arbeitsbereich 0,9 bis 1,15 x Us
Bei Inbetriebnahme durchläuft das Gerät einen Selbsttest, bei dem die interne Schockfestigkeit 8 g / 10 ms
Elektronik auf korrekte Funktion überprüft wird. Während des Betriebs werden alle Gewicht 150 g
internen Schaltungsteile zyklisch auf Fehler überwacht. Wiederbereitschaftszeit bei NOT-HALT min. 200 ms
Schließen Sie den NOT-HALT Taster bzw. die Positionsschalter oder Lichtgitter an Wiederbereitschaftszeit Netzausfall 7s
die Klemmen Y11, Y12 und Y21, Y22 an. Den EIN-Taster schließen Sie in Reihe
mit den Öffnerkontakten der externen Aktoren an die Versorgungsspannung L+ Rückfallzeit bei NOT-HALT 30 ms
(24 V DC) und an die Klemme Y34 an. Der Kaskadiereingang 1 ist entweder über Ansprechzeit max. 40 ms
einen sicheren Ausgang oder direkt an Versorgungsspannung L+ (24 V DC) zu Kurzschlussschutz keine Absicherung erforderlich
legen. Dunkelzeit 3) < 1 ms
Mit den sicheren Ausgängen 14, 24 können externe Aktoren oder Verbraucher Startsignal Y34 Puls (min. 200 ms / max. 5 s)
geschaltet werden. Es ist darauf zu achten, dass die Aktoren oder Verbraucher
und das elektronische Sicherheitsschaltgerät 3TK2841 das gleiche Massepoten- Relative Luftfeuchte max. 95 %
zial besitzen. Das Parallelschalten der Ausgänge 14 und 24 zur Erhöhung des Gebrauchskategorie Bemessungs- Bemessungsbetriebsstrom
Laststromes ist nicht zulässig. nach DIN EN / IEC 60947-5-1 betriebsspannung je Ausgang
Bei Einsatz von elektronischen Sensoren (Lichtgitter-Überwachung, etc.) sowie im
einkanaligen Betrieb ist Y35 mit L+ (24 V DC) zu beschalten. Für den Autostart- DC-13 24 V 1,5 A
Betrieb ist Y32 direkt und Y34 über Öffnerkontakte der externen Aktoren an 1)
L+ (24 V DC) zu legen. Sensorkreise geöffnet; Querschluss zwischen den Sensoren; Kurzschluss
der Sensoren nach Masse
Verwenden Sie als Stromversorgung ein Netzteil nach 2) nur bei Beschaltungsvariante mit "Querschluss-Erkennung"
DIN EN / IEC 60536 Schutzklasse III (SELV oder PELV) ! 3) Testbedingtes Abschalten der sicheren Ausgänge, hinreichend träge Aktoren
bleiben unbeeinflusst.
Klemmen- Betriebs- A1 L+
belegung spannung A2 M
Sensoren Y11, Y12 Kanal 1 NOT-HALT bzw. Positionsschalter Weitere Daten und Bestellnummern für Zubehör siehe Katalog.
Y21, Y22 Kanal 2 NOT-HALT bzw. Positionsschalter
Y35 mit / ohne Querschluss-Erkennung
Y32 Umschalter Autostart
Y34 EIN-Taster, Rückführkreis
Eingang 1 Kaskadiereingang
Ausgänge 14, 24 sichere elektronische Ausgänge
GWA 4NEB 926 2083-50 DS 01 Last update: 03 February 2010

SIRIUS
Safety Relay 3TK2841
DIN EN / IEC 60947-5-1
Original operating instructions Order No.: 3ZX1012-0TK28-1JA1 English
Read and understand these instructions before installing, Figures

operating, or maintaining the equipment. Fig. I: Dimension drawings (dimensions in mm)
Fig. II: Installation/Connection
Fig. IIIa: Safety data
! DANGER Fig. IIIb: Application data
Fig. IIIc: Device-internal data
Hazardous voltage. Fig. IV: Internal circuit: ¿ power pack, À control logic, Á Output 1, Â Output 2
Will cause death or serious injury. Fig. V: Protective-door monitoring, two-channel, autostart
Turn off and lock out all power supplying this device before working Fig. VI: EMERGENCY STOP, single-channel, monitored start *
on this device. Fig. VII: EMERGENCY STOP, two-channel, monitored start,
Fig. VIII: Light-array monitoring, two-channel, autostart
CAUTION Fig. IX: EMERGENCY STOP, two-channel, monitored start and protective-door
monitoring, autostart
Reliable functioning of the equipment is only ensured with certified Fig. X: Safety mat, two-channel, autostart
components.
The safety switching device must be installed in switchgear cubicles comp- Operating states
lying with degree of protection IP43 or IP54, depending on the prevailing
environmental conditions. LEDs Operation
IMPORTANT NOTICE POWER RUN FAULT PS EMERGENCY ON button Outputs
STOP
The products described herein are designed to be components of a customized
machinery safety-oriented control system. A complete safety-oriented system may ON not activated activated on
include safety sensors, evaluators, actuators and signaling components. It is the activated 1) not activated off
responsibility of each company to conduct its own evalution of the effectiveness of
the safety system by trained individuals. Siemens AG, its subsidiaries and affili- not activated not activated off
ates (collectively "Siemens") are not in a position to evaluate all of the characteris- on startup self-test approx. 7 sec.
tics of a given system or product or machine not designed by flashes
SIEMENS.
Siemens accepts no liability for any recommendation that may be implied or stated Faults
herein. The warranty contained in the contract of sale by Siemens is the sole war-
ranty of Siemens. Any statements contained herein do not create new warranties • Defect in electronics off
or modify existing ones. flashes • Change in terminal assignment
during operation
Application • Short-circuit to 24 V 2)
The 3TK2841 safety relay can be used in EMERGENCY STOP devices according No supply voltage
to DIN EN / IEC 60947-5-5 and in safety circuits according to
DIN EN / IEC 60204-1, e.g. in movable guards and protective doors or in non-con-
tact protective devices in accordance with DIN EN / IEC 61496-1, electrical equip- Technical data
ment for furnaces in accordance with VDE 0116 and automatic firing systems for
gas burners in accordance with DIN EN 298 . Depending on the external circuit Permissible ambient temperature Tu
elements, max. Performance Level PL e / Cat. 4 according to DIN EN ISO 13849- Operation/storage –25 to +60 °C / –40 to +80 °C
1 or SIL 3 according to DIN EN / IEC 62061 can be achieved. The user must carry Degree of protection to DIN EN / IEC 60529 IP40, IP20 at terminals
out an evaluation of the overall systems.
Rated insulation voltage 50 V
Functional description and instructions for connection
Rated impulse withstand voltage 500 V
The 3TK2841 safety relay has two reliable solid-state outputs. Three LEDs indi-
cate the operating state and the function. Rated control supply voltage 24 V DC
When the device is put into operation it runs through a self-test to test the Rated power 1.3 W
correct functioning of the internal electronics. All internal circuit components are
monitored for faults cyclically during operation. Operating range 0.9 to 1.15 x Us
Connect the EMERGENCY STOP button and/or the position switches or light Shock resistance 8 g / 10 ms
arrays to terminals Y11, Y12 and Y21, Y22. Connect the ON button in series with Weight 150 g
the NC contacts of the external actuators to the supply voltage L+ (24 V DC) and
to terminal Y34. Connect cascading input 1 either via a safe output or directly to Recovery time after EMERGENCY STOP min. 200 ms
the supply voltage L+ (24 V DC). Recovery time after power failure 7s
External actuators or loads can be switched via safe outputs 14, 24. It must be Release time after EMERGENCY STOP 30 ms
ensured that the actuators or loads and the 3TK2841 electronic safety relay have
the same frame potential. Paralleling outputs 14 and 24 to increase the load cur- Pickup time max. 40 ms
rent is not permissible. Short-circuit protection no fusing necessary!
If electronic sensors (light-array monitoring, etc.) are used, and in single-channel
operation, Y35 must be connected to L+ (24 V DC). For autostart operation, Y32 Dark time 3) < 1 ms
must be connected directly to L+ (24 V DC) and Y34 must be connected to it via Start signal Y34 pulse (min.200 ms / max. 5 s)
NC contacts of the external actuators. Relative humidity max. 95 %
Use a power pack to DIN EN / IEC 61114 safety class III (SELV or
PELV) for power supply! Utilization category Rated operational Rated operational current
as per DIN EN / IEC 60947-5-1 voltage per output
Terminal Operating A1 L+ DC-13 24 V 1,5 A
assignments voltage A2 M 1)
Sensor circuits open; Cross-circuit between the sensors; Short-circuit of sensors
Sensors Y11, Y12 Channel 1 EMERGENCY STOP or position
Y21, Y22 switch to frame
Y35 Channel 2 EMERGENCY STOP or position 2) only when using circuit variant with "cross-circuit detection"
Y32 switch 3) Safe outputs disconnected for test purposes; sufficiently
Y34 With / without cross-circuit detection slow actuators are
Autostart changeover switch not affected.
ON button, feedback circuit
Input 1 Cascading input For further data and accessories see Catalog.
Outputs 14, 24 Safe Solid-state outputs
Cable lengths for 2 x 1.5 mm2 max. 2000 m (total cable length for sensors)
2
SIRIUS
Bloc logique de sécurité 3TK2841
DIN EN / CEI 60947-5-1
Instructions de service originales N° de référence: 3ZX1012-0TK28-1JA1 Français
Ne pas installer, utiliser ou intervenir sur cet équipement avant d'avoir lu et Longueur de pour 2 x 1,5 mm2 max. 2000 m (longueur de câble totale pour
assimilé les présentes instructions et notamment les conseils de sécurité câbles capteurs)
et mises en garde qui y figurent. Figures
Fig. I : Encombrements (cotes en mm)
! DANGER Fig. II : Montage / Raccordement
Fig. IIIa : Données de sécurité
Fig. IIIb : Données d'application
Tension électrique. Fig. IIIc: Données internes de l’appareil
Danger de mort ou risque de blessures graves. Fig. IV : Montage interne : ¿ bloc secteur, À logique de commande, Á Sortie 1,
Mettre hors tension avant d’intervenir sur l’appareil. Â Sortie 2
Fig. V : Surveill. porte de sécurité bicanal, auto-démarr.
Fig. VI : ARRET URG. monocanal, démarr. contrôlé
PRUDENCE Fig. VII : ARRET URG. bicanal, démarr. contrôlé
La sécurité de fonctionnement de l'appareil n'est garantie qu'avec des Fig. VIII : Surveill. barrage immat. bicanal, auto-démarr.
composants certifiés. Fig. IX : ARRET URG. bicanal, démarr. contrôlé et surveill. porte de sécurité bicanal,
auto-démarr.
En considération des conditions d’environnement, les appareils doivent être Fig. X : Tapis sensible bicanal, auto-démarr.
montés en armoire offrant la protection IP43 ou IP54.
Remarque importante Etats de fonctionnement
Les produits décrits dans cette notice ont été développés pour assurer des fonc-
tions de sécurité en tant qu’éléments d’une installation complète ou d’une LED Service
machine. Un système de sécurité complet comporte en règle générale des cap- POWE RUN FAULT Réseau ARRET BP Sorties
teurs, des unités de traitement, des appareils de signalisation et des concepts de R D’URGENCE MARCHE
mise en sécurité. Il incombe au concepteur/constructeur de l’installation ou de la
machine d’assurer le fonctionnement correct de l’ensemble. Siemens AG, ses appliqué libéré a été actives
succursales et ses participations (désignées ci-après par “Siemens”) ne sont pas actionné
en mesure de garantir toutes les propriétés d’une installation complète ou d’une
machine qui n’a pas été conçue par Siemens. actionné 1) libéré non actives
Siemens dégage toute responsabilité pour les recommandations données dans la libéré libéré non actives
description ci-dessous ou qui peuvent en être déduites. La description ci-dessous
ne peut pas être invoquée pour faire valoir des revendications au titre de la garan- à la mise sous tension, autotest 7 s env.
tie ou de la responsabilité, qui dépasseraient les clauses des conditions générales clignote
de livraison de Siemens.
Défauts
Domaines d’utilisation
Le bloc logique de sécurité 3TK2841 peut être utilisé dans les dispositifs d’ARRET • Défaut dans électronique non actives
D’URGENCE conformes à la norme DIN EN / CEI 60947-5-5 et dans les circuits clignote • Modification de l’affectation des
de sécurité selon DIN EN / CEI 60204-1, par ex. pour des capotages mobiles et bornes en service
des portes de sécurité, ou pour les dispositifs de protection électro-sensibles • Court-circuit avec 24 V 2)
selon DIN EN / CEI 61496-1 , les équipements électriques pour brûleurs selon Tension d’alimentation manque
VDE 0116 et les systèmes de commande pour brûleurs à gaz selon DIN EN 298.
En fonction du circuit externe, cet appareil permet d'atteindre max. le niveau de
performance PL e / Cat. 4 selon DIN EN ISO 13849-1 ou le niveau de sécurité Caractéristiques techniques
intégrée SIL 3 conformément à DIN EN / CEI 62061. L'utilisateur doit effectuer
une analyse de l'ensemble du système. Température ambiante admissible Tu
en fonctionnement / au stockage –25 à +60 °C / –40 à +80 °C
Principe de fonctionnement et remarques concernant le raccordement
Degré de protection selon DIN EN / CEI 60529 IP40, IP20 aux bornes
Le bloc logique de sécurité 3TK2841 comporte deux sorties électroniques de
sécurité. Trois LEDs signalent l’état de fonctionnement et les défauts. Tension assignée d’isolement 50 V
A la mise sous tension, l’appareil subit un autotest pour vérifier le bon fonctionne- Tension assignée de tenue aux chocs 500 V
ment de l’électronique interne. En service, tous les éléments internes du montage Tension assignée d’alimentation de commande 24 V CC
sont soumis à un test cyclique pour en vérifier le bon fonctionnement. Puissance assignée 1,3 W
Raccorder le bouton d’ARRET D’URGENCE ou les interrupteurs de position ou le
barrage immatériel aux bornes Y11, Y12 et Y21, Y22. Brancher le bouton Marche Plage de fonctionnement 0,9 à 1,15 x Us
en série avec les contacts d’ouverture des actionneurs externes entre la source Tenue aux chocs 1/2 sinus 8 g / 10 ms
d’alimentation L+ (24 V CC) et la borneY34. Brancher l’entrée de cascadage 1 soit Poids 150 g
par l’intermédiaire d’une sortie de sécurité soit directement à la tension d’alimen- Temps de récupération sur ARRET D'URGENCE min. 200 ms
tation L+ (24 V CC).
Les sorties de sécurité 14, 24 peuvent commander des actionneurs ou consom- Temps de récupération après coupure secteur 7s
mateurs externes. Il faut s’assurer que les actionneurs ou consommateurs possè- Durée de retombée sur ARRET D'URGENCE 30 ms
dent le même potentiel de masse que le relais 3TK2841. Le couplage en parallèle Temps de réponse max. 40 ms
des sorties 14 und 24 en vue d’augmenter le courant de charge n’est pas admis.
En présence de capteurs électroniques (barrages immatériels, etc.) et en mode Protection contre les courts-circuits pas de protection nécessaire
monocanal, appliquer L+ (24 V CC) sur Y35. En mode démarrage automatique, Temps mort 3) < 1 ms
appliquer L+ (24 V CC) directement à Y32 et par l’intermédiaire des contacts Impulsion de démarrage Y34 (200 ms mini / 5 s maxi)
d’ouverture des actionneurs externes à Y34. Humidité relative de l’air 95 % max.
Utilisez pour l’alimentation un bloc secteur conforme à
DIN EN / CEI 60536 classe de protection III (TBTS ou TBTP) ! Catégorie d’emploi Tension assignée Courant assigné d’emploi
selon DIN EN CEI 60947-5-1 d’emploi par sortie
Affectation Tension A1 L+ DC-13 24 V 1,5 A
des bornes d'emploi A2 M 1)
Capteurs Y11, Y12 canal 1 - bouton AU ou interr. de position circuits de capteurs ouverts; Court-circuit entre capteurs; Court-circuit entre
Y21, Y22 canal 2 - bouton AU ou interr. de position capteurs et masse
Y35 avec / sans détection de court-circuit 2)
uniquement pour variante de montage avec "détection de court-circuit"
Y32 commutateur auto-démarrage 3) Coupure des départs protégés, pour raison d’essai, les actuateurs suffisamment
Y34 bouton MARCHE, boucle de retour
Entrée 1 entrée de cascadage lents n’en sont pas affectés.
Sorties 14, 24 sorties sorties électroniques Pour de plus amples informations et pour les accessoires, voir Catalogue.
3
SIRIUS
Módulo de seguridad 3TK2841
DIN EN / IEC 60947-5-1
Instructivo original Referencia: 3ZX1012-0TK28-1JA1 Español
Long. de cable para 2 x 1,5 mm2 máx. 2000 m (longitud total para sensores)
Leer y comprender este instructivo antes de la instalación, operación o
mantenimiento del equipo. Figuras
Fig. I: Croquis acotados (dimensiones en mm)
! PELIGRO Fig. II: Montaje/Conexión
Fig. IIIa: Datos de seguridad
Tensión peligrosa. Fig. IIIb: Datos de aplicación
Puede causar la muerte o lesiones graves. Fig. IIIc: Datos internos del aparato
Desconectar la alimentación eléctrica antes de trabajar en el Fig. IV: Conexionado interno: ¿ Alimentación, À Lógica de mando, Á Salida 1,
equipo. Â Salida 2
Fig. V: Vig. puerta de prot., 2 canales, autoarranque
PRECAUCIÓN Fig. VI: PARADA EMERG., 1 canal, arranque vigilado
Fig. VII: PARADA EMERG., 2 canales, arranque vigilado
El funcionamiento seguro del aparato sólo está garantizado con Fig. VIII: Vig. rejilla fotoeléctrica, 2 canales, autoaranque
componentes certificados. Fig. IX: PARADA EMERG., 2 canales, arranque vigilado y vig. puerta de prot.,
autoarranque
De acuerdo a las condiciones ambientales los aparatos deben montarse dentro Fig. X: Alfombra de seg., 2 canales, autoarranque
de armarios eléctricos que ofrezcan grado de protección IP43 ó IP54.
Nota importante Estados operativos
Los productos aquí descritos han sido desarrollados para ejecutar funciones de
seguridad formando parte de una instalación completa o máquina. Un sistema LEDs Operación
completo de seguridad incluye por regla general sensores, unidades de evaluaci- POWER RUN FAULT Red PARO Pulsador ON Salidas
ón, aparatos de señalización y filosofías que aseguran desconexiones seguras. EMERGENCIA
Por ello es responsabilidad del fabricante de una instalación o máquina asegurar
el funcionamiento correcto del conjunto. La Siemens AG, sus filiales y sociedades ON no accionado ha sido activada
participadas (en lo sucesivo “Siemens”) no están en condiciones de garantizar las accionado
propiedades de una instalación completa o máquina que no haya sido concebida accionado 1) no accionado desactiv.
por Siemens.
Siemens tampoco se hace responsable de recomendaciones que emanen implíci- no accionado no accionado desactiv.
ta o explícitamente de la descripción siguiente. De la descripción siguiente no es en puesta en marcha, autotest durante aprox.
posible reclamar ningún tipo de prestaciones de garantía o responsabilidad civil interm. 7 seg.
que excedan en las enunciadas en las Condiciones Generales de Suministro de
Siemens. Fallo
Aplicaciones • Defecto en la parte electrónica desactiv.
El módulo de seguridad 3TK2841 puede aplicarse en dispositivos de PARADA DE interm. • Modificación de conexiones durante
EMERGENCIA según DIN EN / IEC 60947-5-5 y en circuitos de seguridad según el funcionamiento
DIN EN / IEC 60204-1, p. ej. resguardos móviles y puertas de protección o en dis- • Cortocircuito a 24 V 2)
positivos de protección que actúan por proximidad según DIN EN / IEC 61496-1, Falta tensión de alimentación
equipos eléctricos de sistemas de combustión según VDE 0116 y sistemas
automáticos de control para quemadores de gas según DIN EN 298 . Dependi- Datos técnicos
endo del cableado externo, con este aparato se puede alcanzar el nivel máx. de
potencia PL e / Cat. 4 según la norma DIN EN / ISO 13849-1 o bien SIL 3 con- Temperatura ambiente admisible Tu
forme DIN EN / IEC 62061. El usuario debe realizar una evaluación global del sis- Operación/Almacenamiento –25 a +60 °C / –40 a +80 °C
tema. Categoría de protección según DIN EN / IEC 60529 IP40, IP20 en los bornes
Descripción funcional e indicaciones de conexión Tensión asignada de aislamiento 50 V
El módulo de seguridad 3TK2841 dispone de dos salidas electrónicas. Los tres Tensión de choque asignada 500 V
LEDs señalizan el estado operativo y la función. Tensión asignada de alimentación de mando 24 V DC
Al ponerlo en marcha el equipo ejecuta una rutina de autotest para verificar el cor- Potencia asignada 1,3 W
recto funcionamiento de los circuitos electrónicos internos. Durante el funciona- Campo de trabajo 0,9 a 1,15 x Us
miento se supervisan cíclicamente todas las partes activas del circuito para
detectar posibles fallos. Resist. a choques onda semisenoidal 8 g / 10 ms
Conecte el pulsador PARADA EMERGENCIA o los interruptores de posición o la Peso 150 g
rejilla fotoeléctrica en los bornes Y11, Y12 y Y21, Y22. El pulsador CON/ON se Tiempo de redisponibilidad tras min. 200 ms
conecta en serie con los contactos NC de los actuadores externos a la tensión de PARO DE EMERGENCIA
alimentación L+ (24 V DC) y al borne Y34. La entrada de conexión en cascada 1 Tiempo de redisponibilidad tras fallo de red 7s
debe conectarse a una salida segura o directamente a la tensión de alimentación Tiempo de caída tras PARO DE EMERGENCIA 30 ms
L+ (24 V DC).
A través de las salidas seguras 14, 24 es posible conectar y desconectar actua- Tiempo de respuesta máx. 40 ms
dores externos o cargas. Es necesaria atender a que tanto los actuadores como Protección contra cortocircuito no requiere protección
las cargas así como el módulo electrónico de seguridad 3TK2841 tengan el expresa
mismo potencial de masa. No se permite conectar en paralelo las salidas 14 y 24 Tiempo a oscuras 3) < 1 ms
para incrementar la corriente de carga. Señal de inicio Y34 (mín. 200 ms / máx. 5 s)
De utilizarse sensores electrónicos (vigilancia por rejilla fotoeléctrica, etc.) así Humedad relativa del aire máx. 95 %
como en régimen monocanal es necesario conectar Y35 con L+ (24 V DC). Para
el modo de autoarranque es necesario conectar Y32 directamente a L+ (24 V DC) Categoría de aplicación según Tensión asignada Intensidad asig. de servicio
y Y34 a través de los contactos NC de los actuadores externos. DIN EN / IEC 60947-5-1 de servicio por salida
Utilice como alimentación una fuente según DC-13 24 V 1,5 A
DIn EN / IEC 61114, clase de protección III (SELV ó PELV)! 1) Circuitos de sensor abiertos; Corto entre sensores; Cortocircuito de sensores a masa
Ocupación Tensión de A1 L+ 2)
de bornes servicio A2 M sólo en la variante de conexión con "detección de cortos entre polos"
3)
Sensores Y11, Y12 Canal 1 P. EMERG. o interruptor de posición Desconexión de salidas seguras condicionada por pruebase, no afecta a actua-
Y21, Y22 Canal 2 P. EMERG. o interruptor de posición dores con inercia suficiente.
Y35 con/sin detección de cortos entre polos
Y32 Conmutador autoarranque Para más datos y el Nº de referencia para accesorios, v. Catálogo.
Y34 Pulsador ON, circuito de retorno
Entradas 1 Entrada de conexión en cascada
Salidas 14, 24 Salidas electrónicas seguras
4
SIRIUS
Dispositivo di sicurezza 3TK2841
DIN EN / IEC 60947-5-1
Istruzioni per l'uso originali N° di ordinaz.: 3ZX1012-0TK28-1JA1 Italiano
Leggere con attenzione queste istruzioni prima di installare, utilizzare o Lunghezza con 2 x 1,5 mm2 max. 2000 m (lunghezza totale per sensori)
eseguire manutenzione su questa apparecchiatura. conduttori
Figure
! PERICOLO Fig. I: Dimensioni (in mm)
Fig. II: Montaggio/Collegamenti
Tensione pericolosa. Fig. IIIa: Dati di sicurezza
Può provocare morte o lesioni gravi. Fig. IIIb: Dati applicazione
Scollegare l’alimentazione prima di eseguire interventi Fig. IIIc: Dati interni all'apparecchio
sull'apparecchiatura. Fig. IV: Circuito interno: ¿ Parte di rete, À Logica di comando, Á Uscita 1,
Â Uscita 2
CAUTELA Fig. V: Sorveglianza porta di protezione a due canali, avvio automatico
Fig. VI: Arresto di emergenza a un canale, avvio sorvegliato
Il funzionamento sicuro dell'apparecchiatura è garantito soltanto con Fig. VII: Arresto di emergenza a due canali, avvio sorvegliato
componenti certificati. Fig. VIII: Sorveglianza griglia ottica a due canali, avvio automatico
Fig. IX: Arresto di emergenza a due canali, avvio sorvegliato e sorveglianza di
In base alle condizioni ambientali, tutti gli apparecchi vanno installati in protezione a due canali, avvio automatico
armadi di comando con grado di protezione IP43 o IP54. Fig. X: Tappeto di sicurezza a due canali, avvio automatico
Avviso importante
I prodotti qui descritti sono stati concepiti per svolgere funzioni rilevanti per la Stati d'esercizio
sicurezza in interi impianti. Un sistema di sicurezza completo prevede normal-
mente sensori, dispositivi di segnalazione, apparecchiature e unità di valutazione LED Funzionamento
e dispositivi per disinserzioni sicure. È compito del costruttore di macchine garan- POWER RUN FAULT Rete Emerg. Tasto ON Uscite
tire il funzionamento sicuro dell’impianto o della macchina. La Siemens AG, le sue ON non azionato è stato ON
filiali e consociate (qui di seguito "Siemens") non sono in grado di garantire tutte le azionato
caratteristiche di un impianto o una macchina non ideati da Siemens.
Siemens declina ogni responsabilità per raccomandazioni contenute nella pre- azionato 1) non azionato OFF
sente descrizione. Non è possibile in base alla presente documentazione, rivendi- non azionato non azionato OFF
care diritti di garanzia e/o responsabilità che vadano oltre quanto contenuto nelle
condizioni generali di vendita e fornitura. con la messa in servizio self-test di ca. 7 sec.
Lampeggia
Campo d’impiego
Errore
E’ possibile impiegare i dispostivo di sicurezza 3TK2841 in dispositivi di arresto
d’emergenza secondo DIN EN / IEC 60947-5-5 e in circuiti di sicurezza elettrici • Difetto nell’elettronica OFF
secondo DIN EN / IEC 60204-1, ad es. in coperture mobili e in porte di protezione Lampeggia • Modifica della configurazione
e/o in dispositivi di protezione ad attivazione di prossimità secondo connettore in esercizio.
DIN EN / IEC 61496-1, in equipaggiamenti elettrici di impianti di combustione • Cortocircuito a 24 V 2)
secondo VDE 0116 e in dispositivi automatici di accensione per bruciatori a gas Manca tensione di alimentazione
secondo DIN EN 298. A seconda del cablaggio esterno, questo apparecchio
permette di raggiungere massimo il Performance Level PL e / Cat. 4 a norma Dati tecnici
DIN EN ISO 13849-1 oppure SIL 3 a norma DIN EN / IEC 62061. L'utente deve
eseguire una valutazione dell'intero sistema. Temperatura ambiente ammissibile Tu
Descrizione del funzionamento e indicazioni per il collegamento di funzionamento/magazzinaggio –25 ... +60 °C / –40 ... +80 °C
I dispositivi di sicurezza 3TK2841è dotato di due uscite elettroniche sicure. Tre Grado di protezione secondo DIN EN / IEC 60529 IP40, IP20 ai morsetti
LED visualizzano lo stato d’esecizio e la funzione in atto.Durante la messa in ser- Tensione nominale d’isolamento 50 V
vizio l’apparecchio viene sottoposto anche ad un self-test, che controlla il corretto Tensione nominale di tenuta ad impulso 500 V
funzionamento dell’elettronica. Durante il funzionamento tutti i componenti di com- Tensione nominale di comando 24 V DC
mutazione interni vengono sorvegliati ciclicamente riguardo eventuali errori.
Collegare l’interruttore di arresto d’emergenza risp. l’interruttore di posizione o la Potenza nominale 1,3 W
griglia ottica ai morsetti Y11, Y12 e Y21, Y22. Collegare il tasto ON alla tensione Campo di lavoro 0,9 ... 1,15 x Us
di alimentazione L+ (24 V DC) e al morsetto Y34, in sequenza con i contatti di Resistenza agli urti 8 g / 10 ms
riposo degli attuatori esterni. L’ingresso in cascata 1 deve essere posizionato su Peso 150 g
un’uscita sicura oppure direttamente alla tensione di alimentazione L+ (24 V DC). Tempo di riarmo in caso di EMERGENZA min. 200 ms
Tramite le uscite sicure 14, 24 possono essere collegati attuatori esterni o utenze.
In questo caso è necessario assicurarsi, che gli attuatori oppure le utenze e dispo- Tempo di rispristino in caso di caduta di rete 7s
sitivi di sicurezza elettronici 3TK2841 possiedano lo stesso potenziale di massa. Tempo di diseccitazione in caso di EMERGENZA 30 ms
Non è ammesso il collegamento in parallelo delle uscite 14 e 24 al fine di incre- Tempo di risposta max. 40 ms
mentare la corrente di carico. Protezione da cortocircuito nessuna protezione richiesta
Il morsetto Y35, in caso di impiego di sensori elettronici (sorveglianza griglia ottica Tempo di buio 3) < 1 ms
ecc.) come anche nell’esercizio a un canale, deve essere connesso a L+
(24 V DC). Per il funzionamento ad avvio automatico è necessario effettuare un Segnale d’avvio Y34 impulso (min. 200 ms / max. 5 s)
collegamento diretto del morsetto Y32 a L+ (24 V DC) e un collegamento del mor- Umidità relativa max. 95 %
setto Y34 tramite i contatti di riposo degli attuatori esterni a L+ (24 V DC). Categoria di utilizzazione Tensione nominale Corrente nominale d’impiego
Utilizzare un alimentatore sec. DIN EN / IEC 61114 classe sec. DIN EN / IEC 60947-5-1 d’impiego per uscita
di protezione III (SELV o PELV)! DC-13 24 V 1,5 A
1) Circuiti sensore aperti; Cortocircuito tra i sensori; Cortocircuito dei sensori per massa
Collegamento Tensione di A1 L+
dei morsetti esercizio A2 M 2)
solo per la variante di cablaggio con "riconoscimento cortocircuito"
Sensori Y11, Y12 Canale 1 arresto di emergenza o interruttore 3) Disinserzione delle uscite sicure a fini di test, gli attuatori sufficientemente
di posizione lentinon vengono influenzati.
Y21, Y22 Canale 2 arresto di emergenza o interruttore
di posizione
Y35 con / senza riconoscimento di cortocircuito Per altri dati e per le sigle di ordinazione degli accessori vedere il catalogo.
Y32 Commutatore avvio automatico
Y34 Tasto ON, circuito retroazione
Ingresso 1 Ingresso in cascata
Uscite 14, 24 sicure Uscite elettroniche
5
SIRIUS
Chaveador de segurança 3TK2841
DIN EN / IEC 60947-5-1
Instrução de Serviço original Nº de enc.: 3ZX1012-0TK28-1JA1 Português
Comprimento em 2 x 1,5 mm2 max. 2000m (comprimento total para os
Ler e compreender estas instruções antes da instalação, de fiação sensores)
operação ou manutenção do equipamento.
Figuras Fig I: esquema de medidas (medidas em mm)
Fig II: montagem/conexão
! PERIGO Fig IIIa: Dados de segurança
Tensão perigosa. Fig IIIb: Dados de aplicação
Perigo de morte ou ferimentos graves. Fig. IIIc: Dados internos do equipamento
Desligue a alimentação elétrica e proteja contra o religamento, Fig IV: Ligação interna: ¿ fonte de aliment., À Lógica comando,
antes de iniciar o trabalho no equipamento. Á Canal 1, Â Canal 2
Fig V: Supervisão de porta de proteção de dois canais, início automático
CUIDADO Fig VI: PARAGEM DE EMERGÊNCIA de um canal, início supervisionado
O funcionamento seguro do aparelho apenas pode ser garantido se forem Fig VII: PARAGEM DE EMERG. de dois canais, início supervisionado;
utilizados os componentes certificados. Fig VIII: Supervisão de grade de luz de dois canais, início automático;
Fig IX: PARAGEM DE EMERG. de dois canais, início supervisionado e
Tendo em consideração as condições de ambiente, é necessário instalar os dis- supervisão de porta de proteção de dois canais, início automático;
positivos em quadros de distribuição do grau de proteção IP43 ou IP54.
Fig X: esteira de dois canais, início automático
Indicação importante
Os produtos aqui descritos foram concebidos para assumir como uma parte de Operação
uma unidade total ou de uma máquina, funções relacionadas com a segurança.
Por norma, um sistema completo orientado para a segurança, contém sensores, LEDs Operação
unidades de interpretação, aparelhos sinalizadores e conceitos para circuitos de POWER RUN FAULT Rede PARAG. LIGAR Saídas
desconexão seguros. A responsabilidade pela garantia de um correto funciona- EMERG.
mento geral recai sobre o fabricante de uma unidade ou máquina. A Siemens AG, ligado não atuado foi acionado ligado
suas filiais e sociedades de participação financeira (seguidamente designadas
"Siemens") não estão em condições de garantir todas as caraterísticas de uma atuado1) não atuado desligado
unidade completa ou máquina, não concebida pela Siemens. não atuado não atuado desligado
A Siemens não assume a responsabilidade por recomendações implicadas ou
fornecidas pela seguinte descrição. Com base na descrição que se segue não autoteste de aprox. 7 seg. no inicío de operação
podem ser interpretados novos direitos de garantia, qualidade de garantia ou pisca
indenizações, que vão para além das condições gerais de fornecimento da Erro
Siemens..
• defeito na eletrônica desligado
Áreas de aplicação • mudança na ocupação de
pisca
O chaveador de segurança 3TK2841 pode ser aplicado em instalações de PARA- conexões durante a operação
GEM DE EMERGÊNCIA segundo DIN EN / IEC 60947-5-5 e em circuitos de cor- • curto-circuito segundo 24 V 2)
rente de segurança segundo DIN EN / IEC 60204-1, p.ex. em coberturas móveis e falta de tensão de alimentação
portas de proteção e/ou instalações de proteção com funcionamento sem contato
segundo DIN EN / IEC 61496-1, equipamento elétrico de instalações de aqueci- Dados técnicos
mento segundo VDE 0116 e máquinas automáticas de aquecimento para maçari-
co de gás segundo DIN EN 298. De acordo com a conexão externa, com este Temperatura ambiente permitida Tu
equipamento pode ser atingido máx. o nível de performance PL e / Cat. 4 con- Operação/Armazenamento –25 até +60 °C / –40 até +80 °C
forme a DIN EN ISO 13849-1 ou SIL 3 conforme DIN EN / IEC 62061. O usuário Grau de proteção conforme IP40, IP20 nos bornes
deve realizar uma avaliação do sistema geral. DIN EN / IEC 60529
Descrição do funcionamento e indicações de conexão Tensão de isolamento medida 50 V
O chaveador de segurança 3TK2841 possui duas saídas eletrônicas seguras. Resistência à tensão de carga medida 500 V
Três LEDs indicam o estado de operação e sua função. Tensão de alimentação medida 24 V DC
No início de operação o aparelho passa por um auto-teste, no qual é controlado o Potência nominal 1,3 W
funcionamento correto da eletrônica interna. Faixa de trabalho 0,9 até 1,15 x Us
Durante a operação são controladas cíclicamente todas as peças de conexão Resistência a choques 8 g / 10 ms
internas.
Conecte a tecla PARAGEM DE EMERGÊNCIA e/ou o interruptor de posição ou a Peso 150 g
grade de luz aos bornes Y11, Y12 e Y21, Y22. Conecte a tecla LIGAR em série Tempo de recuperação em PARAGEM
junto com os contatos abertos dos atuadores externos à tensão de alimentação DE EMERGÊNCIA min. 200 ms
L+ (24 V DC) e ao borne Y34. A entrada em cascata 1 deve ser colocada numa Tempo de recup. em disfunção da rede 7s
saída segura ou diretamente à tensão de alimentação L+ (24 V DC). Tempo de livram. em PARAG EMERG. 30 ms
Com as saídas seguras 14, 24 podem ser ligados atuadores externos ou consumi- Tempo de acionamento max. 40 ms
dores. Deve-se prestar atenção de que os atuadores ou consumidores e o chave-
ador de segurança 3TK2841 tenham o mesmo potencial de massa. Não é Proteção contra curto-circuito proteção por fusível não necessária!
permitida a conexão em paralelo das saídas 14 e 24 para aumentar a corrente de Tempo escuro 3) < 1 ms
carga. Sinal de início Y34 (min. 200 ms / max. 5 s)
No uso de sensores eletrônicos (supervisão de grades de luz, etc.) como também Umidade relativa do ar máx. 95 %
durante a operação de um canal deve ser ligado Y35 à L+ (24 V DC). Para a ope-
ração de início automático deve ser colocado Y32, diretamente, e Y34, através de Categoria de uso, Medida de tensão Medida de corrente de
contatos abertos dos atuadores externos, à L+ (24 V DC). segundo de operação operação
DIN EN / IEC 60947-5-1 dependendo saída
Para a alimentação de corrente use uma fonte de alimentação DC-13 24 V 1,5 A
segundo DIN EN / IEC 61114 grau de proteção III (SELV ou PELV)!
1)
Ocupação Tensão de A1 L+ circuitos abertos de sensores; contato transversal entre os sensores;
dos bornes operação A2 M curto-circuito dos sensores segundo a massa
Sensores Y11, Y12 canal 1 PARAGEM DE EMERGÊNCIA e/ou 2)
só em caso de ligação com "identificação de contato transversal"
interruptor de posição 3)
desligamento das saídas seguras condicionado a teste, atuadores suficiente-
Y21, Y22 canal 2 PARAGEM DE EMERGÊNCIA e/ou mentelentos não são influenciados.
interruptor de posição
Y35 com /sem ident. de contato transversal Para mais informações e núm. de encomenda, consulte o catálogo.
Y32 comutador início automático
Y34 tecla LIGAR, circuito de retrocesso
Entrada 1 entrada em cascata
Saídas 14, 24 saídas eletrônicas seguras
6
22,5
I 7,2 7,2
6
a
86
2,5
b
5
110,5 x 15
75,1
94,1
87,2
68,2
e
73,5
d
c
a b c d e
3TK2841-1... 65 36 82,6 92,2 101,6
28,8 3TK2841-2... — — 84,4 93,9 103,4
II
3RP1903
1. U = 0 V
2. a, b, c, d
D
C
c
b
a A B
1
DIN ISO 2380 -1A 0,5 x 3
3 mm
3TK2841-1... 3TK2841-2... D
~10°
C
2
0,8 ... 1,2 Nm ~10°
—
∅ 5 ... 6 mm / PZ2 7 to 10.3 lb·in B
A
10 1 x 0,5 ... 4,0 mm²
2 x 0,5 ... 2,5 mm² 2 x 0,25 ... 1,5 mm² A, B, C, D:
10 3 Kodiert
2 x 0,5 ... 1,5 mm²
1 x 0,5 ... 2,5 mm² 2 x 0,25 ... 1,5 mm² 5 Coded
10
Codé
— 2 x 0,25 ... 1,5 mm² Cifrado
Codificato
AWG 2 x 20 to 14 2 x 24 to 16
4 Codificado
3ZX1012-0TK28-1JA1 7
IIIa 3TK2841
PFHD (DIN EN / IEC 61508) 5,4 x 10-11
PFD (DIN EN / IEC 61508) -
T1[a] (DIN EN / IEC 61508) 20
IIIb 1-kanalig 2) 2-kanalig 3)

SIL (DIN EN / IEC 61508) 1 3
PL (DIN EN ISO 13849) c e
Kat. (DIN EN ISO 13849) 1 4
IIIc 3TK2841
Kat.1) (DIN EN ISO 13849) 4
HFT (DIN EN / IEC 61508 1
nOP (DIN EN ISO 13849) 1
dOP (DIN EN ISO 13849) 365
hOP (DIN EN ISO 13849) 24
DE 1)
max. erreichbare Werte 2)
1-kanalig 3)
2-kanalig
EN 1)
max. achievable values 2)
single-channel 3)
two-channel
FR 1)
valeurs max. pouvant être atteintes 2)
monocanal 3)
bicanal
ES 1)
valores máximos que se pueden alcanzar 2)
1 canal 3)
2 canales
IT 1) valori max. raggiungibili 2) un canale 3) due canali
PT 1) valores máximos atingíveis 2) um canal 3) dois canais
8 3ZX1012-0TK28-1JA1
A1 (+) Y11 Y21 Y35 Y32
I
IV 6,3 A
∇
À
¿
∇
µC1 µC2
Á
∇ Â
A2 (-) Y12 Y22 1 Y34 14 24
L+
V Q1
Q2

A1 Y11 Y12 Y32 1 Y34
Q1
3TK2841
Q2
Y35 Y21 Y22 A2 14 24

M

M Q1 Q2
L+
VI Q1
Q2
EIN / ON / Q1
MARCHE /
LIGADO
A1 Y11 Y12 Y32 1 Y34 M
3TK2841
Y35 Y21 Y22 A2 14 24

Q2
M Q1 Q2
M
L+
VII Q1
Q2
EIN / ON /
MARCHE /
LIGADO
A1 Y11 Y12 Y32 1 Y34

Q1
3TK2841
Q2
Y35 Y21 Y22 A2 14 24

M
M Q1 Q2
3ZX1012-0TK28-1JA1 9
VIII Q1
Q2
Type 4 (IEC/CEI 61 496-1)
A1 Y11 Y12 Y32 1 Y34

Q1
3TK2841
Q2
Y35 Y21 Y22 A2 14 24

M
Q1 Q2
M
IX L+
EIN / ON /
MARCHE /
LIGADO
A1 Y11 Y12 Y32 1 Y34 Q1
3TK2841
Q2
Y35 Y21 Y22 A2 14 24

A1 Y11 Y12 Y32 1 Y34
Q1
3TK2841
Q2
Y35 Y21 Y22 A2 14 24

M

Q1 Q2
M
X L+
Q1
Q2
Q1
A1 Y11 Y12 Y32 1 Y34

Q2
3TK2841
Y35 Y21 Y22 A2 14 24
Q1 Q2
M
10 3ZX1012-0TK28-1JA1
Der Hersteller erklärt, dass die Sicherheitsbauteile der Baureihe SIRIUS 3TK28 in der von uns in Verkehr gebrachten Ausführungen
den einschlägigen grundlegenden Sicherheits- und Gesundheitsanforderungen der aufgeführten EG-Richtlinien* (einschließlich
aller Änderungen) entsprechen und dass bei Konzeption und Bauart die aufgeführten Normen* angewandt worden sind.
DE
* Die vollständige EG-Konformitätserklärung können Sie als PDF downloaden unter:
http://support.automation.siemens.com
The manufacturer declares that the series SIRIUS 3TK28 safety modules as offered for sale by us comply with the relevant basic
health and safety requirements of the EC guidelines stated* (including all changes) and that the stated standards* were applied
during the conceptual design and the design.
EN
* The complete EC declaration of conformity is available as a PDF file for download at:
Le fabricant déclare que les composants de sécurité des séries SIRIUS 3TK28 présents sur les versions mises en circulation par
notre entreprise sont conformes aux exigences fondamentales correspondantes en matière de santé et de sécurité des directives
CE* (y compris toutes les modifications) et que les normes* mentionnées ont été observées lors de la conception et de la
FR construction.
* Vous pouvez télécharger l’ensemble de la Déclaration de Conformité CE en format PDF sous :

El fabricante declara, que los componentes de seguridad de las series SIRIUS 3TK28 en los modelos puestos en circulación por
nosotros, cumplen con las exigencias fundamentales aplicables de las directivas CE* (inclusive todas sus modificaciones)
referentes a la seguridad y salud, y que en el diseño y construcción fueron observadas las mencionadas normas*.
ES
* El texto completo de la Declaración de Conformidad CE puede descargarse en formato PDF bajo:
Il costruttore dichiara che i componenti di sicurezza della serie SIRIUS 3TK28, nelle versioni da noi messe in commercio, sono
conformi alle disposizioni fondamentali applicabili in materia di sicurezza e salute di cui alle direttive CE indicate* (incluse tutte le
modifiche delle stesse) e che per progettazione e tipo costruttivo sono state applicate le norme indicate*.
IT
* La dichiarazione di conformità CE completa è disponibile per il download in formato PDF sul sito:
O fabricante declara, que os componentes de segurança da série SIRIUS 3TK28 nas versões por nós colocadas em circulação
correspondem aos requisitos específicos básicos de segurança e de saúde das diretrizes da CE mencionadas* (inclusive todas as
alterações), e que as normas* mencionadas foram aplicadas no conceito e tipo construtivo.
PT
* A Declaração de Conformidade CE completa pode ser baixada como arquivo PDF sob:
Technical Assistance: Telephone: +49 (0) 911-895-5900 (8°° - 17°° CET) Fax: +49 (0) 911-895-5907 SIEMENS AG, Technical Assistance
E-mail: [email protected] Würzburger Str. 121
Internet: www.siemens.com/industrial-controls/technical-assistance D-90766 Fürth
Technische Änderungen vorbehalten. Zum späteren Gebrauch aufbewahren! Bestell-Nr./Order No.: 3ZX1012-0TK28-1JA1
Subject to change without prior notice. Store for use at a later date.
© Siemens AG 2002

(00A) Manual-0660274-Total-Gb

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

(00A) Manual-0660274-Total-Gb

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

(00A) Manual-0660274-Total-Gb

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

OPERATING MANUAL

Translation of the original

König Maschinen Gesellschaft m.b.H., Austria, Tel.: +43 316.6901.0,

Machine No. 06.6.0274

KÖNIG Maschinen Gesellschaft m.b.H.

6.3.2 OPTIONS TO ORDER 27

KÖNIG Maschinen Gesellschaft m.b.H.

7.6.7.1 FITTING / REMOVING THE TRANSFER ROLLER 63

KÖNIG Maschinen Gesellschaft m.b.H.

11.3 CLEANING AND MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE 92

KÖNIG Maschinen Gesellschaft m.b.H.

KÖNIG Maschinen Gesellschaft m.b.H.

2 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS - EXPLANA-

2.1 SAFETY SYMBOLS

Danger: These safety instructions refer to an imminent risk to the health or

Attention: These safety instructions refer to potentially dangerous situa-

Danger: These safety instructions refer to potential hazards by electric power!

Danger: At the infeed points, there is a risk of injury from crushing!

Danger: There is a risk of limbs or clothing being caught by drive elements,

KÖNIG Maschinen Gesellschaft m.b.H.

Attention: Machines / boxes must only be lifted by the eyelets provided!

Attention: This symbol indicates a light source.

Attention: This symbol indicates hot surfaces.

Danger: Ignition hazard if an explosion-prone atmosphere can be formed (due

Danger: This symbol indicates possible environmental hazards.

Failure to observe this information can lead to damage of machine components

KÖNIG Maschinen Gesellschaft m.b.H.

Attention: Smoking prohibited!

Attention: Use of open flames prohibited!

KÖNIG Maschinen Gesellschaft m.b.H.

2.2 SYMBOLS USED FOR INSTRUCTIONS

■ This symbol designates general lists

Â This symbol designates cleaning and maintenance instructions.

** This symbol designates foot notes

KÖNIG Maschinen Gesellschaft m.b.H.

2.3 GENERAL SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

2.3.1 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS FOR MACHINE OWNER

Note: The operating personnel must regularly be instructed as regards safe

KÖNIG Maschinen Gesellschaft m.b.H.

Danger: Subsequent additions of accessory devices produced by other manu-

2.3.2 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS FOR OPERATING STAFF

The operating personnel must be qualified in relation to the task, e.g.:

Technical experts are considered to be König Maschinen GmbH engineers or specially

Specialist electrician (industrial electrician):

KÖNIG Maschinen Gesellschaft m.b.H.

Danger: The electrical equipment installed in the machine includes devices

Danger: It is prohibited to deactivate or remove any of the safety equip-

Danger: Access to the EMERGENCY-STOP switches may not be blocked!

Attention: Do not remove screwed covers for normal operation!

KÖNIG Maschinen Gesellschaft m.b.H.

Attention: Always strictly adhere to the cleaning instructions in this operating

Attention: For cleaning, maintenance and modification work on the machine, it

KÖNIG Maschinen Gesellschaft m.b.H.

2.4 SAFETY DEVICES

2.4.1 SLIDING WINDOWS IN FRONT OF STAMPING STA-

KÖNIG Maschinen Gesellschaft m.b.H.

2.4.2 WARNING NOTICES

Wording of the stickers: